Merge pull request #4275 from netbox-community/develop

Release v2.7.8

.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE.md

@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-<!--
-    Please note: GitHub issues are to be used only for feature requests
-    and bug reports. For installation assistance or general discussion,
-    please join us on the mailing list:
-
-        https://groups.google.com/forum/#!forum/netbox-discuss
-
-    Please indicate "bug report" or "feature request" below. Be sure to
-    search the existing set of issues (both open and closed) to see if
-    a similar issue has already been raised.
--->
-### Issue type:
-
-<!--
-    If filing a bug, please indicate the version of Python and NetBox
-    you are running. (This is not necessary for feature requests.)
--->
-**Python version:**
-**NetBox version:**
-
-<!--
-    If filing a bug, please record the exact steps taken to reproduce
-    the bug and any errors messages that are generated.
-
-    If filing a feature request, please precisely describe the data
-    model or workflow you would like to see implemented, and provide a
-    use case.
--->

.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE/bug_report.md

@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+---
+name: 🐛 Bug Report
+about: Report a reproducible bug in the current release of NetBox
+
+---
+
+<!--
+    NOTE: IF YOUR ISSUE DOES NOT FOLLOW THIS TEMPLATE, IT WILL BE CLOSED.
+
+    This form is only for reproducible bugs. If you need assistance with
+    NetBox installation, or if you have a general question, DO NOT open an
+    issue. Instead, post to our mailing list:
+
+        https://groups.google.com/forum/#!forum/netbox-discuss
+
+    Please describe the environment in which you are running NetBox. Be sure
+    that you are running an unmodified instance of the latest stable release
+    before submitting a bug report.
+-->
+### Environment
+* Python version:  <!-- Example: 3.6.9 -->
+* NetBox version:  <!-- Example: 2.7.3 -->
+
+<!--
+    Describe in detail the exact steps that someone else can take to reproduce
+    this bug using the current stable release of NetBox (or the current beta
+    release where applicable). Begin with the creation of any necessary
+    database objects and call out every operation being performed explicitly.
+    If reporting a bug in the REST API, be sure to reconstruct the raw HTTP
+    request(s) being made: Don't rely on a wrapper like pynetbox.
+-->
+### Steps to Reproduce
+1.
+2.
+3.
+
+<!-- What did you expect to happen? -->
+### Expected Behavior
+
+
+<!-- What happened instead? -->
+### Observed Behavior

.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE/config.yml

@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+# Reference: https://help.github.com/en/github/building-a-strong-community/configuring-issue-templates-for-your-repository#configuring-the-template-chooser
+blank_issues_enabled: false
+contact_links:
+  - name: 📖 Contributing Policy
+    url: https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/blob/develop/CONTRIBUTING.md
+    about: Please read through our contributing policy before opening an issue or pull request
+  - name: 💬 Discussion Group
+    url: https://groups.google.com/forum/#!forum/netbox-discuss
+    about: Join our discussion group for assistance with installation issues and other problems

.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE/documentation_change.md

@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+---
+name: 📖 Documentation Change
+about: Suggest an addition or modification to the NetBox documentation
+
+---
+
+<!--
+    NOTE: IF YOUR ISSUE DOES NOT FOLLOW THIS TEMPLATE, IT WILL BE CLOSED.
+
+    Please indicate the nature of the change by placing an X in one of the
+    boxes below.
+-->
+### Change Type
+[ ] Addition
+[ ] Correction
+[ ] Deprecation
+[ ] Cleanup (formatting, typos, etc.)
+
+### Area
+[ ] Installation instructions
+[ ] Configuration parameters
+[ ] Functionality/features
+[ ] REST API
+[ ] Administration/development
+[ ] Other
+
+<!-- Describe the proposed change(s). -->
+### Proposed Changes

.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE/feature_request.md

@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+---
+name: ✨ Feature Request
+about: Propose a new NetBox feature or enhancement
+
+---
+
+<!--
+    NOTE: IF YOUR ISSUE DOES NOT FOLLOW THIS TEMPLATE, IT WILL BE CLOSED.
+
+    This form is only for proposing specific new features or enhancements.
+    If you have a general idea or question, please post to our mailing list
+    instead of opening an issue:
+
+        https://groups.google.com/forum/#!forum/netbox-discuss
+
+    NOTE: Due to an excessive backlog of feature requests, we are not currently
+    accepting any proposals which significantly extend NetBox's feature scope.
+
+    Please describe the environment in which you are running NetBox. Be sure
+    that you are running an unmodified instance of the latest stable release
+    before submitting a bug report.
+-->
+### Environment
+* Python version:  <!-- Example: 3.6.9 -->
+* NetBox version:  <!-- Example: 2.7.3 -->
+
+<!--
+    Describe in detail the new functionality you are proposing. Include any
+    specific changes to work flows, data models, or the user interface.
+-->
+### Proposed Functionality
+
+
+<!--
+    Convey an example use case for your proposed feature. Write from the
+    perspective of a NetBox user who would benefit from the proposed
+    functionality and describe how.
+--->
+### Use Case
+
+
+<!--
+    Note any changes to the database schema necessary to support the new
+    feature. For example, does the proposal require adding a new model or
+    field? (Not all new features require database changes.)
+--->
+### Database Changes
+
+
+<!--
+    List any new dependencies on external libraries or services that this new
+    feature would introduce. For example, does the proposal require the
+    installation of a new Python package? (Not all new features introduce new
+    dependencies.)
+-->
+### External Dependencies

.github/ISSUE_TEMPLATE/housekeeping.md

@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+---
+name: 🏡 Housekeeping
+about: A change pertaining to the codebase itself (developers only)
+
+---
+
+<!--
+    NOTE: This template is for use by maintainers only. Please do not submit
+    an issue using this template unless you have been specifically asked to
+    do so.
+-->
+### Proposed Changes
+
+
+<!-- Provide justification for the proposed change(s). -->
+### Justification

.github/PULL_REQUEST_TEMPLATE.md

@@ -6,9 +6,10 @@
     be able to accept.
 
     Please indicate the relevant feature request or bug report below.
+    IF YOUR PULL REQUEST DOES NOT REFERENCE AN ACCEPTED BUG REPORT OR
+    FEATURE REQUEST, IT WILL BE MARKED AS INVALID AND CLOSED.
 -->
-### Fixes:
-
+### Fixes: <ISSUE NUMBER GOES HERE>
 <!--
     Please include a summary of the proposed changes below.
 -->

.github/lock.yml

@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+# Configuration for Lock (https://github.com/apps/lock)
+
+# Number of days of inactivity before a closed issue or pull request is locked
+daysUntilLock: 90
+
+# Skip issues and pull requests created before a given timestamp. Timestamp must
+# follow ISO 8601 (`YYYY-MM-DD`). Set to `false` to disable
+skipCreatedBefore: false
+
+# Issues and pull requests with these labels will be ignored. Set to `[]` to disable
+exemptLabels: []
+
+# Label to add before locking, such as `outdated`. Set to `false` to disable
+lockLabel: false
+
+# Comment to post before locking. Set to `false` to disable
+lockComment: false
+
+# Assign `resolved` as the reason for locking. Set to `false` to disable
+setLockReason: true
+
+# Limit to only `issues` or `pulls`
+# only: issues

.github/stale.yml

@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+# Configuration for Stale (https://github.com/apps/stale)
+
+# Pull requests are exempt from being marked as stale
+only: issues
+
+# Number of days of inactivity before an issue becomes stale
+daysUntilStale: 14
+
+# Number of days of inactivity before a stale issue is closed
+daysUntilClose: 7
+
+# Issues with these labels will never be considered stale
+exemptLabels:
+  - "status: accepted"
+  - "status: gathering feedback"
+  - "status: blocked"
+
+# Label to use when marking an issue as stale
+staleLabel: wontfix
+
+# Comment to post when marking an issue as stale. Set to `false` to disable
+markComment: >
+  This issue has been automatically marked as stale because it has not had
+  recent activity. It will be closed if no further activity occurs. NetBox
+  is governed by a small group of core maintainers which means not all opened
+  issues may receive direct feedback. Please see our [contributing guide](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/blob/develop/CONTRIBUTING.md).
+
+# Comment to post when closing a stale issue. Set to `false` to disable
+closeComment: >
+  This issue has been automatically closed due to lack of activity. In an
+  effort to reduce noise, please do not comment any further. Note that the
+  core maintainers may elect to reopen this issue at a later date if deemed
+  necessary.

.gitignore

@@ -1,6 +1,10 @@
 *.pyc
 /netbox/netbox/configuration.py
 /netbox/netbox/ldap_config.py
+/netbox/reports/*
+!/netbox/reports/__init__.py
+/netbox/scripts/*
+!/netbox/scripts/__init__.py
 /netbox/static
 .idea
 /*.sh
@@ -8,3 +12,9 @@
 fabfile.py
 *.swp
 gunicorn_config.py
+gunicorn.py
+netbox.log
+netbox.pid
+.DS_Store
+.vscode
+.coverage

.travis.yml

@@ -1,21 +1,18 @@
 sudo: required
-
 services:
-  - docker
-
-env:
-  - DOCKER_TAG=$TRAVIS_TAG
-
+  - postgresql
+  - redis-server
+addons:
+  postgresql: "9.4"
 language: python
 python:
-  - "2.7"
   - "3.5"
 install:
   - pip install -r requirements.txt
-  - pip install pep8
+  - pip install pycodestyle
+  - pip install coverage
+before_script:
+  - psql --version
+  - psql -U postgres -c 'SELECT version();'
 script:
   - ./scripts/cibuild.sh
-after_success:
-  - if [ ! -z "$TRAVIS_TAG" ] && [ "$TRAVIS_PULL_REQUEST" == "false" ]; then
-    ./scripts/docker-build.sh;
-    fi

CHANGELOG.md

@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+The changelog has been moved to the [project release notes](https://netbox.readthedocs.io/en/stable/release-notes/).

CONTRIBUTING.md

@@ -1,8 +1,8 @@
 ## Getting Help
 
 If you encounter any issues installing or using NetBox, try one of the
-following resources to get assistance. Please **do not** open a GitHub
-issue except to report bugs or request features.
+following resources to get assistance. Please **do not** open a GitHub issue
+except to report bugs or request features.
 
 ### Mailing List
 
@@ -10,104 +10,159 @@ We have established a Google Groups Mailing List for issues and general
 discussion. This is the best forum for obtaining assistance with NetBox
 installation. You can find us [here](https://groups.google.com/forum/#!forum/netbox-discuss).
 
-### Freenode IRC
+### Slack
 
-For real-time discussion, you can join the #netbox channel on [Freenode](https://freenode.net/).
-You can connect to Freenode at irc.freenode.net using an IRC client, or
-you can use their [webchat client](https://webchat.freenode.net/).
+For real-time discussion, you can join the #netbox Slack channel on [NetworkToCode](https://slack.networktocode.com/).
 
 ## Reporting Bugs
 
-* First, ensure that you've installed the [latest stable version](https://github.com/digitalocean/netbox/releases) of
-NetBox. If you're running an older version, it's possible that the bug
-has already been fixed.
+* First, ensure that you're running the [latest stable version](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/releases)
+of NetBox. If you're running an older version, it's possible that the bug has
+already been fixed.
 
-* Next, check the GitHub [issues list](https://github.com/digitalocean/netbox/issues) to see if the bug you've found has
-already been reported. If you think you may be experiencing a reported
-issue that hasn't already been resolved, please click "add a reaction"
-in the top right corner of the issue and add a thumbs up (+1). You might
-also want to add a comment describing how it's affecting your
-installation. This will allow us to prioritize bugs based on how many
-users are affected.
+* Next, check the GitHub [issues list](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues)
+to see if the bug you've found has already been reported. If you think you may
+be experiencing a reported issue that hasn't already been resolved, please
+click "add a reaction" in the top right corner of the issue and add a thumbs
+up (+1). You might also want to add a comment describing how it's affecting your
+installation. This will allow us to prioritize bugs based on how many users are
+affected.
 
-* If you haven't found an existing issue that describes your suspected
-bug, please inquire about it on the mailing list. **Do not** file an
-issue until you have received confirmation that it is in fact a bug.
-Invalid issues are very distracting and slow the pace at which NetBox is
-developed.
-
-* When submitting an issue, please be as descriptive as possible. Be
-sure to include:
+* When submitting an issue, please be as descriptive as possible. Be sure to
+provide all information request in the issue template, including:
 
     * The environment in which NetBox is running
-    * The exact steps that can be taken to reproduce the issue (if
-      applicable)
+    * The exact steps that can be taken to reproduce the issue
+    * Expected and observed behavior
     * Any error messages generated
     * Screenshots (if applicable)
 
-* Keep in mind that we prioritize bugs based on their severity and how
-much work is required to resolve them. It may take some time for someone
-to address your issue.
+* Please avoid prepending any sort of tag (e.g. "[Bug]") to the issue title.
+The issue will be reviewed by a maintainer after submission and the appropriate
+labels will be applied for categorization.
+
+* Keep in mind that we prioritize bugs based on their severity and how much
+work is required to resolve them. It may take some time for someone to address
+your issue.
+
+* For more information on how bug reports are handled, please see our [issue
+intake policy](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/wiki/Issue-Intake-Policy).
 
 ## Feature Requests
 
-* First, check the GitHub [issues list](https://github.com/digitalocean/netbox/issues) to see if the feature you're
-requesting is already listed. (Be sure to search closed issues as well,
-since some feature requests are rejected.) If the feature you'd like to
-see has already been requested, click "add a reaction" in the top right
-corner of the issue and add a thumbs up (+1). This ensures that the
-issue has a better chance of making it onto the roadmap. Also feel free
-to add a comment with any additional justification for the feature.
+* First, check the GitHub [issues list](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues)
+to see if the feature you're requesting is already listed. (Be sure to search
+closed issues as well, since some feature requests have been rejected.) If the
+feature you'd like to see has already been requested and is open, click "add a
+reaction" in the top right corner of the issue and add a thumbs up (+1). This
+ensures that the issue has a better chance of receiving attention. Also feel
+free to add a comment with any additional justification for the feature.
 (However, note that comments with no substance other than a "+1" will be
-deleted. Please use GitHub's reactions feature to indicate your
-support.)
+deleted. Please use GitHub's reactions feature to indicate your support.)
 
-* While suggestions for new features are welcome, it's important to
-limit the scope of NetBox's feature set to avoid feature creep. For
-example, the following features would be firmly out of scope for NetBox:
-
-    * Ticket management
-    * Network state monitoring
-    * Acting as a DNS server
-    * Acting as an authentication server
+* Due to a large backlog of feature requests, we are not currently accepting
+any proposals which substantially extend NetBox's functionality beyond its
+current feature set. This includes the introduction of any new views or models
+which have not already been proposed in an existing feature request.
 
 * Before filing a new feature request, consider raising your idea on the
-mailing list first. Feedback you receive there will help validate and
-shape the proposed feature before filing a formal issue.
+mailing list first. Feedback you receive there will help validate and shape the
+proposed feature before filing a formal issue.
 
-* Good feature requests are very narrowly defined. Be sure to enumerate
-specific functionality and data schema. The more effort you put into
-writing a feature request, the better its chance is of being
+* Good feature requests are very narrowly defined. Be sure to thoroughly
+describe the functionality and data model(s) being proposed. The more effort
+you put into writing a feature request, the better its chance is of being
 implemented. Overly broad feature requests will be closed.
 
-* When submitting a feature request on GitHub, be sure to include the
-following:
+* When submitting a feature request on GitHub, be sure to include all
+information requested by the issue template, including:
 
     * A detailed description of the proposed functionality
-    * A use case for the feature; who would use it and what value it
-      would add to NetBox
-    * A rough description of changes necessary to the database schema
-      (if applicable)
-    * Any third-party libraries or other resources which would be
-      involved
+    * A use case for the feature; who would use it and what value it would add
+      to NetBox
+    * A rough description of changes necessary to the database schema (if
+      applicable)
+    * Any third-party libraries or other resources which would be involved
+
+* Please avoid prepending any sort of tag (e.g. "[Feature]") to the issue
+title. The issue will be reviewed by a moderator after submission and the
+appropriate labels will be applied for categorization.
+
+* For more information on how feature requests are handled, please see our
+[issue intake policy](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/wiki/Issue-Intake-Policy).
 
 ## Submitting Pull Requests
 
-* Be sure to open an issue before starting work on a pull request, and
-discuss your idea with the NetBox maintainers before beginning work​.
-This will help prevent wasting time on something that might we might not
-be able to implement. When suggesting a new feature, also make sure it
-won't conflict with any work that's already in progress.
+* Be sure to open an issue **before** starting work on a pull request, and
+discuss your idea with the NetBox maintainers before beginning work. This will
+help prevent wasting time on something that might we might not be able to
+implement. When suggesting a new feature, also make sure it won't conflict with
+any work that's already in progress.
 
-* When submitting a pull request, please be sure to work off of the
-`develop` branch, rather than `master`. In NetBox, the `develop` branch
-is used for ongoing development, while `master` is used for tagging new
-stable releases.
+* Any pull request which does _not_ relate to an accepted issue will be closed.
 
-* All code submissions should meet the following criteria (CI will
-enforce these checks):
+* All major new functionality must include relevant tests where applicable.
+
+* When submitting a pull request, please be sure to work off of the `develop`
+branch, rather than `master`. The `develop` branch is used for ongoing
+development, while `master` is used for tagging stable releases.
+
+* All code submissions should meet the following criteria (CI will enforce
+these checks):
 
     * Python syntax is valid
     * All tests pass when run with `./manage.py test`
     * PEP 8 compliance is enforced, with the exception that lines may be
       greater than 80 characters in length
+
+## Commenting
+
+Only comment on an issue if you are sharing a relevant idea or constructive
+feedback. **Do not** comment on an issue just to show your support (give the
+top post a :+1: instead) or ask for an ETA. These comments will be deleted to
+reduce noise in the discussion.
+
+## Issue Lifecycle
+
+New issues are handled according to our [issue intake policy](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/wiki/Issue-Intake-Policy).
+Maintainers will assign label(s) and/or close new issues as the policy
+dictates. This helps ensure a productive development environment and avoid
+accumulating a large backlog of work.
+
+The core maintainers group has chosen to make use of GitHub's [Stale bot](https://github.com/apps/stale)
+to aid in issue management.
+
+* Issues will be marked as stale after 14 days of no activity.
+* Then after 7 more days of inactivity, the issue will be closed.
+* Any issue bearing one of the following labels will be exempt from all Stale
+  bot actions:
+  * `status: accepted`
+  * `status: gathering feedback`
+  * `status: blocked`
+
+It is natural that some new issues get more attention than others. Often this
+is a metric of an issues's overall value to the project. In other cases in
+which issues merely get lost in the shuffle, notifications from Stale bot can
+bring renewed attention to potentially meaningful issues.
+
+## Maintainer Guidance
+
+* Maintainers are expected to contribute at least four hours per week to the
+  project on average. This can be employer-sponsored or individual time, with
+  the understanding that all contributions are submitted under the Apache 2.0
+  license and that your employer may not make claim to any contributions.
+  Contributions include code work, issue management, and community support. All
+  development must be in accordance with our [development guidance](https://netbox.readthedocs.io/en/stable/development/).
+
+* Maintainers are expected to attend (where feasible) our biweekly ~30-minute
+  sync to review agenda items. This meeting provides opportunity to present and
+  discuss pressing topics. Meetings are held as virtual audio/video conferences.
+
+* Official channels for communication include:
+
+    * GitHub issues/pull requests
+    * The [netbox-discuss](https://groups.google.com/forum/#!forum/netbox-discuss) mailing list
+    * The **#netbox** channel on [NetworkToCode Slack](https://networktocode.slack.com/)
+
+* Maintainers with no substantial recorded activity in a 60-day period will be
+  removed from the project.

NOTICE

@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+Copyrighted and licensed under Apache License 2.0 by DigitalOcean, LLC.

README.md

@@ -1,36 +1,54 @@
-![NetBox](docs/netbox_logo.png "NetBox logo")
+![NetBox](docs/netbox_logo.svg "NetBox logo")
 
-NetBox is an IP address management (IPAM) and data center infrastructure management (DCIM) tool. Initially conceived by the network engineering team at [DigitalOcean](https://www.digitalocean.com/), NetBox was developed specifically to address the needs of network and infrastructure engineers.
+NetBox is an IP address management (IPAM) and data center infrastructure
+management (DCIM) tool. Initially conceived by the network engineering team at
+[DigitalOcean](https://www.digitalocean.com/), NetBox was developed specifically
+to address the needs of network and infrastructure engineers. It is intended to
+function as a domain-specific source of truth for network operations.
 
-NetBox runs as a web application atop the [Django](https://www.djangoproject.com/) Python framework with a [PostgreSQL](http://www.postgresql.org/) database. For a complete list of requirements, see `requirements.txt`. The code is available [on GitHub](https://github.com/digitalocean/netbox).
+NetBox runs as a web application atop the [Django](https://www.djangoproject.com/)
+Python framework with a [PostgreSQL](http://www.postgresql.org/) database. For a
+complete list of requirements, see `requirements.txt`. The code is available [on GitHub](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox).
 
 The complete documentation for NetBox can be found at [Read the Docs](http://netbox.readthedocs.io/en/stable/).
 
-Questions? Comments? Please subscribe to [the netbox-discuss mailing list](https://groups.google.com/forum/#!forum/netbox-discuss), or join us on IRC in **#netbox** on **irc.freenode.net**!
+Questions? Comments? Please subscribe to [the netbox-discuss mailing list](https://groups.google.com/forum/#!forum/netbox-discuss),
+or join us in the #netbox Slack channel on [NetworkToCode](https://networktocode.slack.com/)!
 
 ### Build Status
 
-NetBox is built against both Python 2.7 and 3.5.  Python 3.5 is recommended.
-
 |             | status |
 |-------------|------------|
-| **master** | [![Build Status](https://travis-ci.org/digitalocean/netbox.svg?branch=master)](https://travis-ci.org/digitalocean/netbox) |
-| **develop** | [![Build Status](https://travis-ci.org/digitalocean/netbox.svg?branch=develop)](https://travis-ci.org/digitalocean/netbox) |
+| **master** | [![Build Status](https://travis-ci.org/netbox-community/netbox.svg?branch=master)](https://travis-ci.com/netbox-community/netbox/) |
+| **develop** | [![Build Status](https://travis-ci.org/netbox-community/netbox.svg?branch=develop)](https://travis-ci.com/netbox-community/netbox/) |
 
 ## Screenshots
 
 ![Screenshot of main page](docs/media/screenshot1.png "Main page")
 
+---
+
 ![Screenshot of rack elevation](docs/media/screenshot2.png "Rack elevation")
 
+---
+
 ![Screenshot of prefix hierarchy](docs/media/screenshot3.png "Prefix hierarchy")
 
 # Installation
 
-Please see [the documentation](http://netbox.readthedocs.io/en/stable/) for instructions on installing NetBox. To upgrade NetBox, please download the [latest release](https://github.com/digitalocean/netbox/releases) and run `upgrade.sh`.
+Please see [the documentation](http://netbox.readthedocs.io/en/stable/) for
+instructions on installing NetBox. To upgrade NetBox, please download the [latest release](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/releases)
+and run `upgrade.sh`.
 
-## Alternative Installations
+# Providing Feedback
 
-* [Docker container](https://github.com/digitalocean/netbox-docker)
-* [Heroku deployment](https://heroku.com/deploy?template=https://github.com/BILDQUADRAT/netbox/tree/heroku) (via [@mraerino](https://github.com/BILDQUADRAT/netbox/tree/heroku))
-* [Vagrant deployment](https://github.com/ryanmerolle/netbox-vagrant)
+Feature requests and bug reports must be submitted as GiHub issues. (Please be
+sure to use the [appropriate template](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/new/choose).)
+For general discussion, please consider joining our [mailing list](https://groups.google.com/forum/#!forum/netbox-discuss).
+
+If you are interested in contributing to the development of NetBox, please read
+our [contributing guide](CONTRIBUTING.md) prior to beginning any work.
+
+# Related projects
+
+Please see [our wiki](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/wiki/Community-Contributions) for a list of relevant community projects.

base_requirements.txt

@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+# The Python web framework on which NetBox is built
+# https://github.com/django/django
+Django
+
+# Django caching using Redis
+# https://github.com/Suor/django-cacheops
+django-cacheops
+
+# Django middleware which permits cross-domain API requests
+# https://github.com/OttoYiu/django-cors-headers
+django-cors-headers
+
+# Runtime UI tool for debugging Django
+# https://github.com/jazzband/django-debug-toolbar
+django-debug-toolbar
+
+# Library for writing reusable URL query filters
+# https://github.com/carltongibson/django-filter
+django-filter
+
+# Modified Preorder Tree Traversal (recursive nesting of objects)
+# https://github.com/django-mptt/django-mptt
+django-mptt
+
+# Context managers for PostgreSQL advisory locks
+# https://github.com/Xof/django-pglocks
+django-pglocks
+
+# Prometheus metrics library for Django
+# https://github.com/korfuri/django-prometheus
+django-prometheus
+
+# Django integration for RQ (Reqis queuing)
+# https://github.com/rq/django-rq
+django-rq
+
+# Abstraction models for rendering and paginating HTML tables
+# https://github.com/jieter/django-tables2
+django-tables2
+
+# User-defined tags for objects
+# https://github.com/alex/django-taggit
+django-taggit
+
+# A Django REST Framework serializer which represents tags
+# https://github.com/glemmaPaul/django-taggit-serializer
+django-taggit-serializer
+
+# A Django field for representing time zones
+# https://github.com/mfogel/django-timezone-field/
+django-timezone-field
+
+# A REST API framework for Django projects
+# https://github.com/encode/django-rest-framework
+djangorestframework
+
+# Swagger/OpenAPI schema generation for REST APIs
+# https://github.com/axnsan12/drf-yasg
+drf-yasg[validation]
+
+# Platform-agnostic template rendering engine
+# https://github.com/pallets/jinja
+Jinja2
+
+# Simple markup language for rendering HTML
+# https://github.com/Python-Markdown/markdown
+# py-gfm requires Markdown<3.0
+Markdown<3.0
+
+# Library for manipulating IP prefixes and addresses
+# https://github.com/drkjam/netaddr
+netaddr
+
+# Fork of PIL (Python Imaging Library) for image processing
+# https://github.com/python-pillow/Pillow
+Pillow
+
+# PostgreSQL database adapter for Python
+# https://github.com/psycopg/psycopg2
+psycopg2-binary
+
+# GitHub-flavored Markdown extensions
+# https://github.com/zopieux/py-gfm
+py-gfm
+
+# Extensive cryptographic library (fork of pycrypto)
+# https://github.com/Legrandin/pycryptodome
+pycryptodome
+
+# YAML rendering library
+# https://github.com/yaml/pyyaml
+PyYAML
+
+# In-memory key/value store used for caching and queuing
+# https://github.com/andymccurdy/redis-py
+redis
+
+# SVG image rendering (used for rack elevations)
+# https://github.com/mozman/svgwrite
+svgwrite

contrib/gunicorn.py

@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+# The IP address (typically localhost) and port that the Netbox WSGI process should listen on
+bind = '127.0.0.1:8001'
+
+# Number of gunicorn workers to spawn. This should typically be 2n+1, where
+# n is the number of CPU cores present.
+workers = 5
+
+# Number of threads per worker process
+threads = 3
+
+# Timeout (in seconds) for a request to complete
+timeout = 120
+
+# The maximum number of requests a worker can handle before being respawned
+max_requests = 5000
+max_requests_jitter = 500

contrib/netbox-rq.service

@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[Unit]
+Description=NetBox Request Queue Worker
+Documentation=https://netbox.readthedocs.io/en/stable/
+After=network-online.target
+Wants=network-online.target
+
+[Service]
+Type=simple
+
+User=www-data
+Group=www-data
+
+WorkingDirectory=/opt/netbox
+
+ExecStart=/usr/bin/python3 /opt/netbox/netbox/manage.py rqworker
+
+Restart=on-failure
+RestartSec=30
+PrivateTmp=true
+
+[Install]
+WantedBy=multi-user.target

contrib/netbox.service

@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[Unit]
+Description=NetBox WSGI Service
+Documentation=https://netbox.readthedocs.io/en/stable/
+After=network-online.target
+Wants=network-online.target
+
+[Service]
+Type=simple
+
+User=www-data
+Group=www-data
+PIDFile=/var/tmp/netbox.pid
+WorkingDirectory=/opt/netbox
+
+ExecStart=/usr/local/bin/gunicorn --pid /var/tmp/netbox.pid --pythonpath /opt/netbox/netbox --config /opt/netbox/gunicorn.py netbox.wsgi
+
+Restart=on-failure
+RestartSec=30
+PrivateTmp=true
+
+[Install]
+WantedBy=multi-user.target

docs/additional-features/caching.md

@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+# Caching
+
+To improve performance, NetBox supports caching for most object and list views. Caching is implemented using Redis,
+and [django-cacheops](https://github.com/Suor/django-cacheops)
+
+Several management commands are avaliable for administrators to manaully invalidate cache entries in extenuating circumstances.
+
+To invalidate a specifc model instance (for example a Device with ID 34):
+```
+python netbox/manage.py invalidate dcim.Device.34
+```
+
+To invalidate all instance of a model:
+```
+python netbox/manage.py invalidate dcim.Device
+```
+
+To flush the entire cache database:
+```
+python netbox/manage.py invalidate all
+```

docs/additional-features/change-logging.md

@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+# Change Logging
+
+Every time an object in NetBox is created, updated, or deleted, a serialized copy of that object is saved to the database, along with meta data including the current time and the user associated with the change. These records form a running changelog both for each individual object as well as NetBox as a whole (Organization > Changelog).
+
+A serialized representation is included for each object in JSON format. This is similar to how objects are conveyed within the REST API, but does not include any nested representations. For instance, the `tenant` field of a site will record only the tenant's ID, not a representation of the tenant.
+
+When a request is made, a random request ID is generated and attached to any change records resulting from the request. For example, editing multiple objects in bulk will create a change record for each object, and each of those objects will be assigned the same request ID. This makes it easy to identify all the change records associated with a particular request.
+
+Change records are exposed in the API via the read-only endpoint `/api/extras/object-changes/`. They may also be exported in CSV format.

docs/additional-features/context-data.md

@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+# Contextual Configuration Data
+
+Sometimes it is desirable to associate arbitrary data with a group of devices to aid in their configuration. For example, you might want to associate a set of syslog servers for all devices at a particular site. Context data enables the association of arbitrary data to devices and virtual machines grouped by region, site, role, platform, and/or tenant. Context data is arranged hierarchically, so that data with a higher weight can be entered to override more general lower-weight data. Multiple instances of data are automatically merged by NetBox to present a single dictionary for each object.
+
+Devices and Virtual Machines may also have a local config context defined. This local context will always overwrite the rendered config context objects for the Device/VM. This is useful in situations were the device requires a one-off value different from the rest of the environment.

docs/additional-features/custom-fields.md

@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+# Custom Fields
+
+Each object in NetBox is represented in the database as a discrete table, and each attribute of an object exists as a column within its table. For example, sites are stored in the `dcim_site` table, which has columns named `name`, `facility`, `physical_address`, and so on. As new attributes are added to objects throughout the development of NetBox, tables are expanded to include new rows.
+
+However, some users might want to associate with objects attributes that are somewhat esoteric in nature, and that would not make sense to include in the core NetBox database schema. For instance, suppose your organization needs to associate each device with a ticket number pointing to the support ticket that was opened to have it installed. This is certainly a legitimate use for NetBox, but it's perhaps not a common enough need to warrant expanding the internal data schema. Instead, you can create a custom field to hold this data.
+
+Custom fields must be created through the admin UI under Extras > Custom Fields. To create a new custom field, select the object(s) to which you want it to apply, and the type of field it will be. NetBox supports six field types:
+
+* Free-form text (up to 255 characters)
+* Integer
+* Boolean (true/false)
+* Date
+* URL
+* Selection
+
+Assign the field a name. This should be a simple database-friendly string, e.g. `tps_report`. You may optionally assign the field a human-friendly label (e.g. "TPS report") as well; the label will be displayed on forms. If a description is provided, it will appear beneath the field in a form.
+
+Marking the field as required will require the user to provide a value for the field when creating a new object or when saving an existing object. A default value for the field may also be provided. Use "true" or "false" for boolean fields. (The default value has no effect for selection fields.)
+
+When creating a selection field, you should create at least two choices. These choices will be arranged first by weight, with lower weights appearing higher in the list, and then alphabetically.
+
+## Using Custom Fields
+
+When a single object is edited, the form will include any custom fields which have been defined for the object type. These fields are included in the "Custom Fields" panel. On the backend, each custom field value is saved separately from the core object as an independent database call, so it's best to avoid adding too many custom fields per object.
+
+When editing multiple objects, custom field values are saved in bulk. There is no significant difference in overhead when saving a custom field value for 100 objects versus one object. However, the bulk operation must be performed separately for each custom field.

docs/additional-features/custom-links.md

@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+# Custom Links
+
+Custom links allow users to place arbitrary hyperlinks within NetBox views. These are helpful for cross-referencing related records in external systems. For example, you might create a custom link on the device view which links to the current device in a network monitoring system.
+
+Custom links are created under the admin UI. Each link is associated with a particular NetBox object type (site, device, prefix, etc.) and will be displayed on relevant views. Each link is assigned text and a URL, both of which support Jinja2 templating. The text and URL are rendered with the context variable `obj` representing the current object.
+
+For example, you might define a link like this:
+
+* Text: `View NMS`
+* URL: `https://nms.example.com/nodes/?name={{ obj.name }}`
+
+When viewing a device named Router4, this link would render as:
+
+```
+<a href="https://nms.example.com/nodes/?name=Router4">View NMS</a>
+```
+
+Custom links appear as buttons at the top right corner of the page. Numeric weighting can be used to influence the ordering of links.
+
+## Conditional Rendering
+
+Only links which render with non-empty text are included on the page. You can employ conditional Jinja2 logic to control the conditions under which a link gets rendered.
+
+For example, if you only want to display a link for active devices, you could set the link text to
+
+```
+{% if obj.status == 1 %}View NMS{% endif %}
+```
+
+The link will not appear when viewing a device with any status other than "active."
+
+Another example, if you want to only show an object of a certain manufacturer, you could set the link text to:
+
+```
+{% if obj.device_type.manufacturer.name == 'Cisco' %}View NMS {% endif %}
+```
+
+The link will only appear when viewing a device with a manufacturer name of "Cisco."
+
+## Link Groups
+
+You can specify a group name to organize links into related sets. Grouped links will render as a dropdown menu beneath a
+single button bearing the name of the group.

docs/additional-features/custom-scripts.md

@@ -0,0 +1,268 @@
+# Custom Scripts
+
+Custom scripting was introduced to provide a way for users to execute custom logic from within the NetBox UI. Custom scripts enable the user to directly and conveniently manipulate NetBox data in a prescribed fashion. They can be used to accomplish myriad tasks, such as:
+
+* Automatically populate new devices and cables in preparation for a new site deployment
+* Create a range of new reserved prefixes or IP addresses
+* Fetch data from an external source and import it to NetBox
+
+Custom scripts are Python code and exist outside of the official NetBox code base, so they can be updated and changed without interfering with the core NetBox installation. And because they're written from scratch, a custom script can be used to accomplish just about anything.
+
+## Writing Custom Scripts
+
+All custom scripts must inherit from the `extras.scripts.Script` base class. This class provides the functionality necessary to generate forms and log activity.
+
+```
+from extras.scripts import Script
+
+class MyScript(Script):
+    ..
+```
+
+Scripts comprise two core components: variables and a `run()` method. Variables allow your script to accept user input via the NetBox UI. The `run()` method is where your script's execution logic lives. (Note that your script can have as many methods as needed: this is merely the point of invocation for NetBox.)
+
+```
+class MyScript(Script):
+    var1 = StringVar(...)
+    var2 = IntegerVar(...)
+    var3 = ObjectVar(...)
+
+    def run(self, data, commit):
+        ...
+```
+
+The `run()` method should accept two arguments:
+
+* `data` - A dictionary containing all of the variable data passed via the web form.
+* `commit` - A boolean indicating whether database changes will be committed.
+
+!!! note
+    The `commit` argument was introduced in NetBox v2.7.8. Backward compatibility is maintained for scripts which accept only the `data` argument, however moving forward scripts should accept both arguments.
+
+Defining variables is optional: You may create a script with only a `run()` method if no user input is needed.
+
+Returning output from your script is optional. Any raw output generated by the script will be displayed under the "output" tab in the UI.
+
+## Module Attributes
+
+### `name`
+
+You can define `name` within a script module (the Python file which contains one or more scripts) to set the module name. If `name` is not defined, the filename will be used.
+
+## Script Attributes
+
+Script attributes are defined under a class named `Meta` within the script. These are optional, but encouraged.
+
+### `name`
+
+This is the human-friendly names of your script. If omitted, the class name will be used.
+
+### `description`
+
+A human-friendly description of what your script does.
+
+### `field_order`
+
+A list of field names indicating the order in which the form fields should appear. This is optional, however on Python 3.5 and earlier the fields will appear in random order. (Declarative ordering is preserved on Python 3.6 and above.) For example:
+
+```
+field_order = ['var1', 'var2', 'var3']
+```
+
+### `commit_default`
+
+The checkbox to commit database changes when executing a script is checked by default. Set `commit_default` to False under the script's Meta class to leave this option unchecked by default.
+
+```
+commit_default = False
+```
+
+## Accessing Request Data
+
+Details of the current HTTP request (the one being made to execute the script) are available as the instance attribute `self.request`. This can be used to infer, for example, the user executing the script and the client IP address:
+
+```python
+username = self.request.user.username
+ip_address = self.request.META.get('HTTP_X_FORWARDED_FOR') or self.request.META.get('REMOTE_ADDR')
+self.log_info("Running as user {} (IP: {})...".format(username, ip_address))
+```
+
+For a complete list of available request parameters, please see the [Django documentation](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/request-response/).
+
+## Reading Data from Files
+
+The Script class provides two convenience methods for reading data from files:
+
+* `load_yaml`
+* `load_json`
+
+These two methods will load data in YAML or JSON format, respectively, from files within the local path (i.e. `SCRIPTS_ROOT`).
+
+## Logging
+
+The Script object provides a set of convenient functions for recording messages at different severity levels:
+
+* `log_debug`
+* `log_success`
+* `log_info`
+* `log_warning`
+* `log_failure`
+
+Log messages are returned to the user upon execution of the script. Markdown rendering is supported for log messages.
+
+## Variable Reference
+
+### StringVar
+
+Stores a string of characters (i.e. a line of text). Options include:
+
+* `min_length` - Minimum number of characters
+* `max_length` - Maximum number of characters
+* `regex` - A regular expression against which the provided value must match
+
+Note: `min_length` and `max_length` can be set to the same number to effect a fixed-length field.
+
+### TextVar
+
+Arbitrary text of any length. Renders as multi-line text input field.
+
+### IntegerVar
+
+Stored a numeric integer. Options include:
+
+* `min_value` - Minimum value
+* `max_value` - Maximum value
+
+### BooleanVar
+
+A true/false flag. This field has no options beyond the defaults.
+
+### ChoiceVar
+
+A set of choices from which the user can select one.
+
+* `choices` - A list of `(value, label)` tuples representing the available choices. For example:
+
+```python
+CHOICES = (
+    ('n', 'North'),
+    ('s', 'South'),
+    ('e', 'East'),
+    ('w', 'West')
+)
+
+direction = ChoiceVar(choices=CHOICES)
+```
+
+### ObjectVar
+
+A NetBox object. The list of available objects is defined by the queryset parameter. Each instance of this variable is limited to a single object type.
+
+* `queryset` - A [Django queryset](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/topics/db/queries/)
+
+### FileVar
+
+An uploaded file. Note that uploaded files are present in memory only for the duration of the script's execution: They will not be save for future use.
+
+### IPAddressVar
+
+An IPv4 or IPv6 address, without a mask. Returns a `netaddr.IPAddress` object.
+
+### IPAddressWithMaskVar
+
+An IPv4 or IPv6 address with a mask. Returns a `netaddr.IPNetwork` object which includes the mask.
+
+### IPNetworkVar
+
+An IPv4 or IPv6 network with a mask. Returns a `netaddr.IPNetwork` object. Two attributes are available to validate the provided mask:
+
+* `min_prefix_length` - Minimum length of the mask (default: none)
+* `max_prefix_length` - Maximum length of the mask (default: none)
+
+### Default Options
+
+All variables support the following default options:
+
+* `default` - The field's default value
+* `description` - A brief description of the field
+* `label` - The name of the form field
+* `required` - Indicates whether the field is mandatory (default: true)
+* `widget` - The class of form widget to use (see the [Django documentation](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/forms/widgets/))
+
+## Example
+
+Below is an example script that creates new objects for a planned site. The user is prompted for three variables:
+
+* The name of the new site
+* The device model (a filtered list of defined device types)
+* The number of access switches to create
+
+These variables are presented as a web form to be completed by the user. Once submitted, the script's `run()` method is called to create the appropriate objects.
+
+```
+from django.utils.text import slugify
+
+from dcim.choices import DeviceStatusChoices, SiteStatusChoices
+from dcim.models import Device, DeviceRole, DeviceType, Site
+from extras.scripts import *
+
+
+class NewBranchScript(Script):
+
+    class Meta:
+        name = "New Branch"
+        description = "Provision a new branch site"
+        field_order = ['site_name', 'switch_count', 'switch_model']
+
+    site_name = StringVar(
+        description="Name of the new site"
+    )
+    switch_count = IntegerVar(
+        description="Number of access switches to create"
+    )
+    switch_model = ObjectVar(
+        description="Access switch model",
+        queryset = DeviceType.objects.filter(
+            manufacturer__name='Cisco',
+            model__in=['Catalyst 3560X-48T', 'Catalyst 3750X-48T']
+        )
+    )
+
+    def run(self, data, commit):
+
+        # Create the new site
+        site = Site(
+            name=data['site_name'],
+            slug=slugify(data['site_name']),
+            status=SiteStatusChoices.STATUS_PLANNED
+        )
+        site.save()
+        self.log_success("Created new site: {}".format(site))
+
+        # Create access switches
+        switch_role = DeviceRole.objects.get(name='Access Switch')
+        for i in range(1, data['switch_count'] + 1):
+            switch = Device(
+                device_type=data['switch_model'],
+                name='{}-switch{}'.format(site.slug, i),
+                site=site,
+                status=DeviceStatusChoices.STATUS_PLANNED,
+                device_role=switch_role
+            )
+            switch.save()
+            self.log_success("Created new switch: {}".format(switch))
+
+        # Generate a CSV table of new devices
+        output = [
+            'name,make,model'
+        ]
+        for switch in Device.objects.filter(site=site):
+            attrs = [
+                switch.name,
+                switch.device_type.manufacturer.name,
+                switch.device_type.model
+            ]
+            output.append(','.join(attrs))
+
+        return '\n'.join(output)
+```

docs/additional-features/export-templates.md

@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+# Export Templates
+
+NetBox allows users to define custom templates that can be used when exporting objects. To create an export template, navigate to Extras > Export Templates under the admin interface.
+
+Each export template is associated with a certain type of object. For instance, if you create an export template for VLANs, your custom template will appear under the "Export" button on the VLANs list.
+
+Export templates are written in [Django's template language](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/templates/language/), which is very similar to Jinja2. The list of objects returned from the database is stored in the `queryset` variable, which you'll typically want to iterate through using a `for` loop. Object properties can be access by name. For example:
+
+```
+{% for rack in queryset %}
+Rack: {{ rack.name }}
+Site: {{ rack.site.name }}
+Height: {{ rack.u_height }}U
+{% endfor %}
+```
+
+To access custom fields of an object within a template, use the `cf` attribute. For example, `{{ obj.cf.color }}` will return the value (if any) for a custom field named `color` on `obj`.
+
+A MIME type and file extension can optionally be defined for each export template. The default MIME type is `text/plain`.
+
+## Example
+
+Here's an example device export template that will generate a simple Nagios configuration from a list of devices.
+
+```
+{% for device in queryset %}{% if device.status and device.primary_ip %}define host{
+        use                     generic-switch
+        host_name               {{ device.name }}
+        address                 {{ device.primary_ip.address.ip }}
+}
+{% endif %}{% endfor %}
+```
+
+The generated output will look something like this:
+
+```
+define host{
+        use                     generic-switch
+        host_name               switch1
+        address                 192.0.2.1
+}
+define host{
+        use                     generic-switch
+        host_name               switch2
+        address                 192.0.2.2
+}
+define host{
+        use                     generic-switch
+        host_name               switch3
+        address                 192.0.2.3
+}
+```

docs/additional-features/graphs.md

@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+# Graphs
+
+NetBox does not have the ability to generate graphs natively, but this feature allows you to embed contextual graphs from an external resources (such as a monitoring system) inside the site, provider, and interface views. Each embedded graph must be defined with the following parameters:
+
+* **Type:** Site, device, provider, or interface. This determines in which view the graph will be displayed.
+* **Weight:** Determines the order in which graphs are displayed (lower weights are displayed first). Graphs with equal weights will be ordered alphabetically by name.
+* **Name:** The title to display above the graph.
+* **Source URL:** The source of the image to be embedded. The associated object will be available as a template variable named `obj`.
+* **Link URL (optional):** A URL to which the graph will be linked. The associated object will be available as a template variable named `obj`.
+
+Graph names and links can be rendered using the Django or Jinja2 template languages.
+
+!!! warning
+    Support for the Django templating language will be removed in NetBox v2.8. Jinja2 is recommended.
+
+## Examples
+
+You only need to define one graph object for each graph you want to include when viewing an object. For example, if you want to include a graph of traffic through an interface over the past five minutes, your graph source might looks like this:
+
+```
+https://my.nms.local/graphs/?node={{ obj.device.name }}&interface={{ obj.name }}&duration=5m
+```
+
+You can define several graphs to provide multiple contexts when viewing an object. For example:
+
+```
+https://my.nms.local/graphs/?type=throughput&node={{ obj.device.name }}&interface={{ obj.name }}&duration=60m
+https://my.nms.local/graphs/?type=throughput&node={{ obj.device.name }}&interface={{ obj.name }}&duration=24h
+https://my.nms.local/graphs/?type=errors&node={{ obj.device.name }}&interface={{ obj.name }}&duration=60m
+```

docs/additional-features/napalm.md

@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+# NAPALM
+
+NetBox supports integration with the [NAPALM automation](https://napalm-automation.net/) library. NAPALM allows NetBox to fetch live data from devices and return it to a requester via its REST API.
+
+!!! info
+    To enable the integration, the NAPALM library must be installed. See [installation steps](../../installation/2-netbox/#napalm-automation-optional) for more information.
+
+```
+GET /api/dcim/devices/1/napalm/?method=get_environment
+
+{
+    "get_environment": {
+        ...
+    }
+}
+```
+
+## Authentication
+
+By default, the [`NAPALM_USERNAME`](../../configuration/optional-settings/#napalm_username) and [`NAPALM_PASSWORD`](../../configuration/optional-settings/#napalm_password) are used for NAPALM authentication. They can be overridden for an individual API call through the `X-NAPALM-Username` and `X-NAPALM-Password` headers.
+
+```
+$ curl "http://localhost/api/dcim/devices/1/napalm/?method=get_environment" \
+-H "Authorization: Token f4b378553dacfcfd44c5a0b9ae49b57e29c552b5" \
+-H "Content-Type: application/json" \
+-H "Accept: application/json; indent=4" \
+-H "X-NAPALM-Username: foo" \
+-H "X-NAPALM-Password: bar"
+```
+
+## Method Support
+
+The list of supported NAPALM methods depends on the [NAPALM driver](https://napalm.readthedocs.io/en/latest/support/index.html#general-support-matrix) configured for the platform of a device. NetBox only supports [get](https://napalm.readthedocs.io/en/latest/support/index.html#getters-support-matrix) methods.
+
+## Multiple Methods
+
+More than one method in an API call can be invoked by adding multiple `method` parameters. For example:
+
+```
+GET /api/dcim/devices/1/napalm/?method=get_ntp_servers&method=get_ntp_peers
+
+{
+    "get_ntp_servers": {
+        ...
+    },
+    "get_ntp_peers": {
+        ...
+    }
+}
+```
+
+## Optional Arguments
+
+The behavior of NAPALM drivers can be adjusted according to the [optional arguments](https://napalm.readthedocs.io/en/latest/support/index.html#optional-arguments). NetBox exposes those arguments using headers prefixed with `X-NAPALM-`.
+
+
+For instance, the SSH port is changed to 2222 in this API call:
+
+```
+$ curl "http://localhost/api/dcim/devices/1/napalm/?method=get_environment" \
+-H "Authorization: Token f4b378553dacfcfd44c5a0b9ae49b57e29c552b5" \
+-H "Content-Type: application/json" \
+-H "Accept: application/json; indent=4" \
+-H "X-NAPALM-port: 2222"
+```

docs/additional-features/prometheus-metrics.md

@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+# Prometheus Metrics
+
+NetBox supports optionally exposing native Prometheus metrics from the application. [Prometheus](https://prometheus.io/) is a popular time series metric platform used for monitoring.
+
+NetBox exposes metrics at the `/metrics` HTTP endpoint, e.g. `https://netbox.local/metrics`. Metric exposition can be toggled with the `METRICS_ENABLED` configuration setting. Metrics are not exposed by default.
+
+## Metric Types
+
+NetBox makes use of the [django-prometheus](https://github.com/korfuri/django-prometheus) library to export a number of different types of metrics, including:
+
+- Per model insert, update, and delete counters
+- Per view request counters
+- Per view request latency histograms
+- Request body size histograms
+- Response body size histograms
+- Response code counters
+- Database connection, execution, and error counters
+- Cache hit, miss, and invalidation counters
+- Django middleware latency histograms
+- Other Django related metadata metrics
+
+For the exhaustive list of exposed metrics, visit the `/metrics` endpoint on your NetBox instance.
+
+## Multi Processing Notes
+
+When deploying NetBox in a multiprocess mannor--such as using Gunicorn as recomented in the installation docs--the Prometheus client library requires the use of a shared directory
+to collect metrics from all the worker processes. This can be any arbitrary directory to which the processes have read/write access. This directory is then made available by use of the
+`prometheus_multiproc_dir` environment variable.
+
+This can be setup by first creating a shared directory and then adding this line (with the appropriate directory) to the `[program:netbox]` section of the supervisor config file.
+
+```
+environment=prometheus_multiproc_dir=/tmp/prometheus_metrics
+```

docs/additional-features/reports.md

@@ -0,0 +1,133 @@
+# NetBox Reports
+
+A NetBox report is a mechanism for validating the integrity of data within NetBox. Running a report allows the user to verify that the objects defined within NetBox meet certain arbitrary conditions. For example, you can write reports to check that:
+
+* All top-of-rack switches have a console connection
+* Every router has a loopback interface with an IP address assigned
+* Each interface description conforms to a standard format
+* Every site has a minimum set of VLANs defined
+* All IP addresses have a parent prefix
+
+...and so on. Reports are completely customizable, so there's practically no limit to what you can test for.
+
+## Writing Reports
+
+Reports must be saved as files in the [`REPORTS_ROOT`](../../configuration/optional-settings/#reports_root) path (which defaults to `netbox/reports/`). Each file created within this path is considered a separate module. Each module holds one or more reports (Python classes), each of which performs a certain function. The logic of each report is broken into discrete test methods, each of which applies a small portion of the logic comprising the overall test.
+
+!!! warning
+    The reports path includes a file named `__init__.py`, which registers the path as a Python module. Do not delete this file.
+
+For example, we can create a module named `devices.py` to hold all of our reports which pertain to devices in NetBox. Within that module, we might define several reports. Each report is defined as a Python class inheriting from `extras.reports.Report`.
+
+```
+from extras.reports import Report
+
+class DeviceConnectionsReport(Report):
+    description = "Validate the minimum physical connections for each device"
+
+class DeviceIPsReport(Report):
+    description = "Check that every device has a primary IP address assigned"
+```
+
+Within each report class, we'll create a number of test methods to execute our report's logic. In DeviceConnectionsReport, for instance, we want to ensure that every live device has a console connection, an out-of-band management connection, and two power connections.
+
+```
+from dcim.choices import DeviceStatusChoices
+from dcim.constants import CONNECTION_STATUS_PLANNED
+from dcim.models import ConsolePort, Device, PowerPort
+from extras.reports import Report
+
+
+class DeviceConnectionsReport(Report):
+    description = "Validate the minimum physical connections for each device"
+
+    def test_console_connection(self):
+
+        # Check that every console port for every active device has a connection defined.
+        active = DeviceStatusChoices.STATUS_ACTIVE
+        for console_port in ConsolePort.objects.prefetch_related('device').filter(device__status=active):
+            if console_port.connected_endpoint is None:
+                self.log_failure(
+                    console_port.device,
+                    "No console connection defined for {}".format(console_port.name)
+                )
+            elif console_port.connection_status == CONNECTION_STATUS_PLANNED:
+                self.log_warning(
+                    console_port.device,
+                    "Console connection for {} marked as planned".format(console_port.name)
+                )
+            else:
+                self.log_success(console_port.device)
+
+    def test_power_connections(self):
+
+        # Check that every active device has at least two connected power supplies.
+        for device in Device.objects.filter(status=DeviceStatusChoices.STATUS_ACTIVE):
+            connected_ports = 0
+            for power_port in PowerPort.objects.filter(device=device):
+                if power_port.connected_endpoint is not None:
+                    connected_ports += 1
+                    if power_port.connection_status == CONNECTION_STATUS_PLANNED:
+                        self.log_warning(
+                            device,
+                            "Power connection for {} marked as planned".format(power_port.name)
+                        )
+            if connected_ports < 2:
+                self.log_failure(
+                    device,
+                    "{} connected power supplies found (2 needed)".format(connected_ports)
+                )
+            else:
+                self.log_success(device)
+```
+
+As you can see, reports are completely customizable. Validation logic can be as simple or as complex as needed.
+
+!!! warning
+    Reports should never alter data: If you find yourself using the `create()`, `save()`, `update()`, or `delete()` methods on objects within reports, stop and re-evaluate what you're trying to accomplish. Note that there are no safeguards against the accidental alteration or destruction of data.
+
+The following methods are available to log results within a report:
+
+* log(message)
+* log_success(object, message=None)
+* log_info(object, message)
+* log_warning(object, message)
+* log_failure(object, message)
+
+The recording of one or more failure messages will automatically flag a report as failed. It is advised to log a success for each object that is evaluated so that the results will reflect how many objects are being reported on. (The inclusion of a log message is optional for successes.) Messages recorded with `log()` will appear in a report's results but are not associated with a particular object or status.
+
+To perform additional tasks, such as sending an email or calling a webhook, after a report has been run, extend the `post_run()` method. The status of the report is available as `self.failed` and the results object is `self.result`.
+
+Once you have created a report, it will appear in the reports list. Initially, reports will have no results associated with them. To generate results, run the report.
+
+## Running Reports
+
+### Via the Web UI
+
+Reports can be run via the web UI by navigating to the report and clicking the "run report" button at top right. Note that a user must have permission to create ReportResults in order to run reports. (Permissions can be assigned through the admin UI.)
+
+Once a report has been run, its associated results will be included in the report view.
+
+### Via the API
+
+To run a report via the API, simply issue a POST request to its `run` endpoint. Reports are identified by their module and class name.
+
+```
+    POST /api/extras/reports/<module>.<name>/run/
+```
+
+Our example report above would be called as:
+
+```
+    POST /api/extras/reports/devices.DeviceConnectionsReport/run/
+```
+
+### Via the CLI
+
+Reports can be run on the CLI by invoking the management command:
+
+```
+python3 manage.py runreport <module>
+```
+
+where ``<module>`` is the name of the python file in the ``reports`` directory without the ``.py`` extension.  One or more report modules may be specified.

docs/additional-features/tags.md

@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+# Tags
+
+Tags are free-form text labels which can be applied to a variety of objects within NetBox. Tags are created on-demand as they are assigned to objects. Use commas to separate tags when adding multiple tags to an object (for example: `Inventoried, Monitored`). Use double quotes around a multi-word tag when adding only one tag, e.g. `"Core Switch"`.
+
+Each tag has a label and a URL-friendly slug. For example, the slug for a tag named "Dunder Mifflin, Inc." would be `dunder-mifflin-inc`. The slug is generated automatically and makes tags easier to work with as URL parameters.
+
+Objects can be filtered by the tags they have applied. For example, the following API request will retrieve all devices tagged as "monitored":
+
+```
+GET /api/dcim/devices/?tag=monitored
+```
+
+Tags are included in the API representation of an object as a list of plain strings:
+
+```
+{
+    ...
+    "tags": [
+        "Core Switch",
+        "Monitored"
+    ],
+    ...
+}
+```

docs/additional-features/webhooks.md

@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+# Webhooks
+
+A webhook is a mechanism for conveying to some external system a change that took place in NetBox. For example, you may want to notify a monitoring system whenever a device status is changed in NetBox. This can be done by creating a webhook for the device model in NetBox. When NetBox detects a change to a device, an HTTP request containing the details of the change and who made it be sent to the specified receiver. Webhooks are configured in the admin UI under Extras > Webhooks.
+
+## Configuration
+
+* **Name** - A unique name for the webhook. The name is not included with outbound messages.
+* **Object type(s)** - The type or types of NetBox object that will trigger the webhook.
+* **Enabled** - If unchecked, the webhook will be inactive.
+* **Events** - A webhook may trigger on any combination of create, update, and delete events. At least one event type must be selected.
+* **HTTP method** - The type of HTTP request to send. Options include GET, POST, PUT, PATCH, and DELETE.
+* **URL** - The fuly-qualified URL of the request to be sent. This may specify a destination port number if needed.
+* **HTTP content type** - The value of the request's `Content-Type` header. (Defaults to `application/json`)
+* **Additional headers** - Any additional headers to include with the request (optional). Add one header per line in the format `Name: Value`. Jinja2 templating is supported for this field (see below).
+* **Body template** - The content of the request being sent (optional). Jinja2 templating is supported for this field (see below). If blank, NetBox will populate the request body with a raw dump of the webhook context. (If the HTTP cotent type is set to `application/json`, this will be formatted as a JSON object.)
+* **Secret** - A secret string used to prove authenticity of the request (optional). This will append a `X-Hook-Signature` header to the request, consisting of a HMAC (SHA-512) hex digest of the request body using the secret as the key.
+* **SSL verification** - Uncheck this option to disable validation of the receiver's SSL certificate. (Disable with caution!)
+* **CA file path** - The file path to a particular certificate authority (CA) file to use when validating the receiver's SSL certificate (optional).
+
+## Jinja2 Template Support
+
+[Jinja2 templating](https://jinja.palletsprojects.com/) is supported for the `additional_headers` and `body_template` fields. This enables the user to convey change data in the request headers as well as to craft a customized request body. Request content can be crafted to enable the direct interaction with external systems by ensuring the outgoing message is in a format the receiver expects and understands.
+
+For example, you might create a NetBox webhook to [trigger a Slack message](https://api.slack.com/messaging/webhooks) any time an IP address is created. You can accomplish this using the following configuration:
+
+* Object type: IPAM > IP address
+* HTTP method: POST
+* URL: <Slack incoming webhook URL>
+* HTTP content type: `application/json`
+* Body template: `{"text": "IP address {{ data['address'] }} was created by {{ username }}!"}`
+
+### Available Context
+
+The following data is available as context for Jinja2 templates:
+
+* `event` - The type of event which triggered the webhook: created, updated, or deleted.
+* `model` - The NetBox model which triggered the change.
+* `timestamp` - The time at which the event occurred (in [ISO 8601](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_8601) format).
+* `username` - The name of the user account associated with the change.
+* `request_id` - The unique request ID. This may be used to correlate multiple changes associated with a single request.
+* `data` - A serialized representation of the object _after_ the change was made. This is typically equivalent to the model's representation in NetBox's REST API.
+
+### Default Request Body
+
+If no body template is specified, the request body will be populated with a JSON object containing the context data. For example, a newly created site might appear as follows:
+
+```no-highlight
+{
+    "event": "created",
+    "timestamp": "2020-02-25 15:10:26.010582+00:00",
+    "model": "site",
+    "username": "jstretch",
+    "request_id": "fdbca812-3142-4783-b364-2e2bd5c16c6a",
+    "data": {
+        "id": 19,
+        "name": "Site 1",
+        "slug": "site-1",
+        "status": 
+            "value": "active",
+            "label": "Active",
+            "id": 1
+        },
+        "region": null,
+        ...
+    }
+}
+```
+
+## Webhook Processing
+
+When a change is detected, any resulting webhooks are placed into a Redis queue for processing. This allows the user's request to complete without needing to wait for the outgoing webhook(s) to be processed. The webhooks are then extracted from the queue by the `rqworker` process and HTTP requests are sent to their respective destinations. The current webhook queue and any failed webhooks can be inspected in the admin UI under Django RQ > Queues.
+
+A request is considered successful if the response has a 2XX status code; otherwise, the request is marked as having failed. Failed requests may be retried manually via the admin UI.

docs/administration/netbox-shell.md

@@ -0,0 +1,194 @@
+NetBox includes a Python shell within which objects can be directly queried, created, modified, and deleted. To enter the shell, run the following command:
+
+```
+./manage.py nbshell
+```
+
+This will launch a customized version of [the built-in Django shell](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/django-admin/#shell) with all relevant NetBox models pre-loaded. (If desired, the stock Django shell is also available by executing `./manage.py shell`.)
+
+```
+$ ./manage.py nbshell
+### NetBox interactive shell (jstretch-laptop)
+### Python 3.5.2 | Django 2.0.8 | NetBox 2.4.3
+### lsmodels() will show available models. Use help(<model>) for more info.
+```
+
+The function `lsmodels()` will print a list of all available NetBox models:
+
+```
+>>> lsmodels()
+DCIM:
+  ConsolePort
+  ConsolePortTemplate
+  ConsoleServerPort
+  ConsoleServerPortTemplate
+  Device
+  ...
+```
+
+## Querying Objects
+
+Objects are retrieved by forming a [Django queryset](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/topics/db/queries/#retrieving-objects). The base queryset for an object takes the form `<model>.objects.all()`, which will return a (truncated) list of all objects of that type.
+
+```
+>>> Device.objects.all()
+<QuerySet [<Device: TestDevice1>, <Device: TestDevice2>, <Device: TestDevice3>, <Device: TestDevice4>, <Device: TestDevice5>, '...(remaining elements truncated)...']>
+```
+
+Use a `for` loop to cycle through all objects in the list:
+
+```
+>>> for device in Device.objects.all():
+...   print(device.name, device.device_type)
+...
+(u'TestDevice1', <DeviceType: PacketThingy 9000>)
+(u'TestDevice2', <DeviceType: PacketThingy 9000>)
+(u'TestDevice3', <DeviceType: PacketThingy 9000>)
+(u'TestDevice4', <DeviceType: PacketThingy 9000>)
+(u'TestDevice5', <DeviceType: PacketThingy 9000>)
+...
+```
+
+To count all objects matching the query, replace `all()` with `count()`:
+
+```
+>>> Device.objects.count()
+1274
+```
+
+To retrieve a particular object (typically by its primary key or other unique field), use `get()`:
+
+```
+>>> Site.objects.get(pk=7)
+<Site: Test Lab>
+```
+
+### Filtering Querysets
+
+In most cases, you want to retrieve only a specific subset of objects. To filter a queryset, replace `all()` with `filter()` and pass one or more keyword arguments. For example:
+
+```
+>>> Device.objects.filter(status=STATUS_ACTIVE)
+<QuerySet [<Device: TestDevice1>, <Device: TestDevice2>, <Device: TestDevice3>, <Device: TestDevice8>, <Device: TestDevice9>, '...(remaining elements truncated)...']>
+```
+
+Querysets support slicing to return a specific range of objects.
+
+```
+>>> Device.objects.filter(status=STATUS_ACTIVE)[:3]
+<QuerySet [<Device: TestDevice1>, <Device: TestDevice2>, <Device: TestDevice3>]>
+```
+
+The `count()` method can be appended to the queryset to return a count of objects rather than the full list.
+
+```
+>>> Device.objects.filter(status=STATUS_ACTIVE).count()
+982
+```
+
+Relationships with other models can be traversed by concatenating field names with a double-underscore. For example, the following will return all devices assigned to the tenant named "Pied Piper."
+
+```
+>>> Device.objects.filter(tenant__name='Pied Piper')
+```
+
+This approach can span multiple levels of relations. For example, the following will return all IP addresses assigned to a device in North America:
+
+```
+>>> IPAddress.objects.filter(interface__device__site__region__slug='north-america')
+```
+
+!!! note
+    While the above query is functional, it is very inefficient. There are ways to optimize such requests, however they are out of the scope of this document. For more information, see the [Django queryset method reference](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/models/querysets/) documentation.
+
+Reverse relationships can be traversed as well. For example, the following will find all devices with an interface named "em0":
+
+```
+>>> Device.objects.filter(interfaces__name='em0')
+```
+
+Character fields can be filtered against partial matches using the `contains` or `icontains` field lookup (the later of which is case-insensitive).
+
+```
+>>> Device.objects.filter(name__icontains='testdevice')
+```
+
+Similarly, numeric fields can be filtered by values less than, greater than, and/or equal to a given value.
+
+```
+>>> VLAN.objects.filter(vid__gt=2000)
+```
+
+Multiple filters can be combined to further refine a queryset.
+
+```
+>>> VLAN.objects.filter(vid__gt=2000, name__icontains='engineering')
+```
+
+To return the inverse of a filtered queryset, use `exclude()` instead of `filter()`.
+
+```
+>>> Device.objects.count()
+4479
+>>> Device.objects.filter(status=STATUS_ACTIVE).count()
+4133
+>>> Device.objects.exclude(status=STATUS_ACTIVE).count()
+346
+```
+
+!!! info
+    The examples above are intended only to provide a cursory introduction to queryset filtering. For an exhaustive list of the available filters, please consult the [Django queryset API docs](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/models/querysets/).
+
+## Creating and Updating Objects
+
+New objects can be created by instantiating the desired model, defining values for all required attributes, and calling `save()` on the instance.
+
+```
+>>> lab1 = Site.objects.get(pk=7)
+>>> myvlan = VLAN(vid=123, name='MyNewVLAN', site=lab1)
+>>> myvlan.save()
+```
+
+Alternatively, the above can be performed as a single operation:
+
+```
+>>> VLAN(vid=123, name='MyNewVLAN', site=Site.objects.get(pk=7)).save()
+```
+
+To modify an object, retrieve it, update the desired field(s), and call `save()` again.
+
+```
+>>> vlan = VLAN.objects.get(pk=1280)
+>>> vlan.name
+u'MyNewVLAN'
+>>> vlan.name = 'BetterName'
+>>> vlan.save()
+>>> VLAN.objects.get(pk=1280).name
+u'BetterName'
+```
+
+!!! warning
+    The Django ORM provides methods to create/edit many objects at once, namely `bulk_create()` and `update()`. These are best avoided in most cases as they bypass a model's built-in validation and can easily lead to database corruption if not used carefully.
+
+## Deleting Objects
+
+To delete an object, simply call `delete()` on its instance. This will return a dictionary of all objects (including related objects) which have been deleted as a result of this operation.
+
+```
+>>> vlan
+<VLAN: 123 (BetterName)>
+>>> vlan.delete()
+(1, {u'extras.CustomFieldValue': 0, u'ipam.VLAN': 1})
+```
+
+To delete multiple objects at once, call `delete()` on a filtered queryset. It's a good idea to always sanity-check the count of selected objects _before_ deleting them.
+
+```
+>>> Device.objects.filter(name__icontains='test').count()
+27
+>>> Device.objects.filter(name__icontains='test').delete()
+(35, {u'extras.CustomFieldValue': 0, u'dcim.DeviceBay': 0, u'secrets.Secret': 0, u'dcim.InterfaceConnection': 4, u'extras.ImageAttachment': 0, u'dcim.Device': 27, u'dcim.Interface': 4, u'dcim.ConsolePort': 0, u'dcim.PowerPort': 0})
+```
+
+!!! warning
+    Deletions are immediate and irreversible. Always think very carefully before calling `delete()` on an instance or queryset.

docs/administration/replicating-netbox.md

@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+# Replicating the Database
+
+NetBox uses [PostgreSQL](https://www.postgresql.org/) for its database, so general PostgreSQL best practices will apply to NetBox. You can dump and restore the database using the `pg_dump` and `psql` utilities, respectively.
+
+!!! note
+    The examples below assume that your database is named `netbox`.
+
+## Export the Database
+
+Use the `pg_dump` utility to export the entire database to a file:
+
+```no-highlight
+pg_dump netbox > netbox.sql
+```
+
+When replicating a production database for development purposes, you may find it convenient to exclude changelog data, which can easily account for the bulk of a database's size. To do this, exclude the `extras_objectchange` table data from the export. The table will still be included in the output file, but will not be populated with any data.
+
+```no-highlight
+pg_dump --exclude-table-data=extras_objectchange netbox > netbox.sql
+```
+
+## Load an Exported Database
+
+!!! warning
+    This will destroy and replace any existing instance of the database.
+
+```no-highlight
+psql -c 'drop database netbox'
+psql -c 'create database netbox'
+psql netbox < netbox.sql
+```
+
+Keep in mind that PostgreSQL user accounts and permissions are not included with the dump: You will need to create those manually if you want to fully replicate the original database (see the [installation docs](../installation/1-postgresql.md)). When setting up a development instance of NetBox, it's strongly recommended to use different credentials anyway.
+
+## Export the Database Schema
+
+If you want to export only the database schema, and not the data itself (e.g. for development reference), do the following:
+
+```no-highlight
+pg_dump -s netbox > netbox_schema.sql
+```
+If you are migrating your instance of NetBox to a different machine, please make sure you invalidate the cache by performing this command:
+
+```no-highlight
+python3 manage.py invalidate all
+```
+
+---
+
+# Replicating Media
+
+NetBox stored uploaded files (such as image attachments) in its media directory. To fully replicate an instance of NetBox, you'll need to copy both the database and the media files.
+
+## Archive the Media Directory
+
+Execute the following command from the root of the NetBox installation path (typically `/opt/netbox`):
+
+```no-highlight
+tar -czf netbox_media.tar.gz netbox/media/
+```
+
+## Restore the Media Directory
+
+To extract the saved archive into a new installation, run the following from the installation root:
+
+```no-highlight
+tar -xf netbox_media.tar.gz
+```

docs/api/authentication.md

@@ -4,6 +4,9 @@ The NetBox API employs token-based authentication. For convenience, cookie authe
 
 A token is a unique identifier that identifies a user to the API. Each user in NetBox may have one or more tokens which he or she can use to authenticate to the API. To create a token, navigate to the API tokens page at `/user/api-tokens/`.
 
+!!! note
+    The creation and modification of API tokens can be restricted per user by an administrator. If you don't see an option to create an API token, ask an administrator to grant you access.
+
 Each token contains a 160-bit key represented as 40 hexadecimal characters. When creating a token, you'll typically leave the key field blank so that a random key will be automatically generated. However, NetBox allows you to specify a key in case you need to restore a previously deleted token to operation.
 
 By default, a token can be used for all operations available via the API. Deselecting the "write enabled" option will restrict API requests made with the token to read operations (e.g. GET) only.
@@ -24,7 +27,7 @@ $ curl -H "Accept: application/json; indent=4" http://localhost/api/dcim/sites/
 }
 ```
 
-However, if the [`LOGIN_REQUIRED`](../configuration/optional-settings/#login_required) configuration setting has been set to `True`, all requests must be authenticated.
+However, if the [`LOGIN_REQUIRED`](../../configuration/optional-settings/#login_required) configuration setting has been set to `True`, all requests must be authenticated.
 
 ```
 $ curl -H "Accept: application/json; indent=4" http://localhost/api/dcim/sites/

docs/api/examples.md

@@ -4,7 +4,8 @@ Supported HTTP methods:
 
 * `GET`: Retrieve an object or list of objects
 * `POST`: Create a new object
-* `PUT`: Update an existing object
+* `PUT`: Update an existing object, all mandatory fields must be specified
+* `PATCH`: Updates an existing object, only specifying the field to be changed
 * `DELETE`: Delete an existing object
 
 To authenticate a request, attach your token in an `Authorization` header:
@@ -81,15 +82,15 @@ $ curl -H "Accept: application/json; indent=4" http://localhost/api/dcim/sites/6
 
 ### Creating a new site
 
-Send a `POST` request to the site list endpoint with token authentication and JSON-formatted data. Only mandatory fields are required.
+Send a `POST` request to the site list endpoint with token authentication and JSON-formatted data. Only mandatory fields are required. This example includes one non required field, "region."
 
 ```
-$ curl -X POST -H "Authorization: Token d2f763479f703d80de0ec15254237bc651f9cdc0" -H "Content-Type: application/json" -H "Accept: application/json; indent=4" http://localhost:8000/api/dcim/sites/ --data '{"name": "My New Site", "slug": "my-new-site"}'
+$ curl -X POST -H "Authorization: Token d2f763479f703d80de0ec15254237bc651f9cdc0" -H "Content-Type: application/json" -H "Accept: application/json; indent=4" http://localhost:8000/api/dcim/sites/ --data '{"name": "My New Site", "slug": "my-new-site", "region": 5}'
 {
     "id": 16,
     "name": "My New Site",
     "slug": "my-new-site",
-    "region": null,
+    "region": 5,
     "tenant": null,
     "facility": "",
     "asn": null,
@@ -101,21 +102,29 @@ $ curl -X POST -H "Authorization: Token d2f763479f703d80de0ec15254237bc651f9cdc0
     "comments": ""
 }
 ```
+Note that in this example we are creating a site bound to a region with the ID of 5. For write API actions (`POST`, `PUT`, and `PATCH`) the integer ID value is used for `ForeignKey` (related model) relationships, instead of the nested representation that is used in the `GET` (list) action.
 
 ### Modify an existing site
 
-Make an authenticated `PUT` request to the site detail endpoint. As with a create (POST) request, all mandatory fields must be included.
+Make an authenticated `PUT` request to the site detail endpoint. As with a create (`POST`) request, all mandatory fields must be included.
 
 ```
 $ curl -X PUT -H "Authorization: Token d2f763479f703d80de0ec15254237bc651f9cdc0" -H "Content-Type: application/json" -H "Accept: application/json; indent=4" http://localhost:8000/api/dcim/sites/16/ --data '{"name": "Renamed Site", "slug": "renamed-site"}'
 ```
 
+### Modify an object by changing a field
+
+Make an authenticated `PATCH` request to the device endpoint. With `PATCH`, unlike `POST` and `PUT`, we only specify the field that is being changed. In this example, we add a serial number to a device.
+```
+$ curl -X PATCH -H "Authorization: Token d2f763479f703d80de0ec15254237bc651f9cdc0" -H "Content-Type: application/json" -H "Accept: application/json; indent=4" http://localhost:8000/api/dcim/devices/2549/ --data '{"serial": "FTX1123A090"}'
+```
+
 ### Delete an existing site
 
 Send an authenticated `DELETE` request to the site detail endpoint.
 
 ```
-$ curl -v X DELETE -H "Authorization: Token d2f763479f703d80de0ec15254237bc651f9cdc0" -H "Content-Type: application/json" -H "Accept: application/json; indent=4" http://localhost:8000/api/dcim/sites/16/
+$ curl -v -X DELETE -H "Authorization: Token d2f763479f703d80de0ec15254237bc651f9cdc0" -H "Content-Type: application/json" -H "Accept: application/json; indent=4" http://localhost:8000/api/dcim/sites/16/
 * Connected to localhost (127.0.0.1) port 8000 (#0)
 > DELETE /api/dcim/sites/16/ HTTP/1.1
 > User-Agent: curl/7.35.0
@@ -135,4 +144,4 @@ $ curl -v X DELETE -H "Authorization: Token d2f763479f703d80de0ec15254237bc651f9
 * Closing connection 0
 ```
 
-The response to a successfull `DELETE` request will have code 204 (No Content); the body of the response will be empty.
+The response to a successful `DELETE` request will have code 204 (No Content); the body of the response will be empty.

docs/api/overview.md

@@ -1,8 +1,44 @@
-NetBox v2.0 and later includes a full-featured REST API that allows its data model to be read and manipulated externally.
+# What is a REST API?
+
+REST stands for [representational state transfer](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Representational_state_transfer). It's a particular type of API which employs HTTP to create, retrieve, update, and delete objects from a database. (This set of operations is commonly referred to as CRUD.) Each type of operation is associated with a particular HTTP verb:
+
+* `GET`: Retrieve an object or list of objects
+* `POST`: Create an object
+* `PUT` / `PATCH`: Modify an existing object. `PUT` requires all mandatory fields to be specified, while `PATCH` only expects the field that is being modified to be specified.
+* `DELETE`: Delete an existing object
+
+The NetBox API represents all objects in [JavaScript Object Notation (JSON)](http://www.json.org/). This makes it very easy to interact with NetBox data on the command line with common tools. For example, we can request an IP address from NetBox and output the JSON using `curl` and `jq`. (Piping the output through `jq` isn't strictly required but makes it much easier to read.)
+
+```
+$ curl -s http://localhost:8000/api/ipam/ip-addresses/2954/ | jq '.'
+{
+  "custom_fields": {},
+  "nat_outside": null,
+  "nat_inside": null,
+  "description": "An example IP address",
+  "id": 2954,
+  "family": 4,
+  "address": "5.101.108.132/26",
+  "vrf": null,
+  "tenant": null,
+  "status": {
+    "label": "Active",
+    "value": 1
+  },
+  "role": null,
+  "interface": null
+}
+```
+
+Each attribute of the NetBox object is expressed as a field in the dictionary. Fields may include their own nested objects, as in the case of the `status` field above. Every object includes a primary key named `id` which uniquely identifies it in the database.
+
+# Interactive Documentation
+
+Comprehensive, interactive documentation of all API endpoints is available on a running NetBox instance at `/api/docs/`. This interface provides a convenient sandbox for researching and experimenting with NetBox's various API endpoints and different request types.
 
 # URL Hierarchy
 
-NetBox's entire REST API is housed under the API root, `/api/`. The API's URL structure is divided at the root level by application: circuits, DCIM, extras, IPAM, secrets, and tenancy. Within each application, each model has its own path. For example, the provider and circuit objects are located under the "circuits" application:
+NetBox's entire API is housed under the API root at `https://<hostname>/api/`. The URL structure is divided at the root level by application: circuits, DCIM, extras, IPAM, secrets, and tenancy. Within each application, each model has its own path. For example, the provider and circuit objects are located under the "circuits" application:
 
 * /api/circuits/providers/
 * /api/circuits/circuits/
@@ -13,9 +49,9 @@ Likewise, the site, rack, and device objects are located under the "DCIM" applic
 * /api/dcim/racks/
 * /api/dcim/devices/
 
-The full hierarchy of available endpoints can be viewed by navigating to the API root (e.g. /api/) in a web browser.
+The full hierarchy of available endpoints can be viewed by navigating to the API root in a web browser.
 
-Each model generally has two URLs associated with it: a list URL and a detail URL. The list URL is used to request a list of multiple objects or to create a new object. The detail URL is used to retrieve, update, or delete an existing object. All objects are referenced by their numeric primary key (ID).
+Each model generally has two views associated with it: a list view and a detail view. The list view is used to request a list of multiple objects or to create a new object. The detail view is used to retrieve, update, or delete an existing object. All objects are referenced by their numeric primary key (`id`).
 
 * /api/dcim/devices/ - List devices or create a new device
 * /api/dcim/devices/123/ - Retrieve, update, or delete the device with ID 123
@@ -54,10 +90,10 @@ The base serializer is used to represent the default view of a model. This inclu
     "vid": 101,
     "name": "Users-Floor1",
     "tenant": null,
-    "status": [
-        1,
-        "Active"
-    ],
+    "status": {
+        "value": 1,
+        "label": "Active"
+    },
     "role": {
         "id": 9,
         "url": "http://localhost:8000/api/ipam/roles/9/",
@@ -70,24 +106,114 @@ The base serializer is used to represent the default view of a model. This inclu
 }
 ```
 
-Related objects (e.g. `ForeignKey` fields) are represented using a nested serializer. A nested serializer provides a minimal representation of an object, including only its URL and enough information to construct its name.
+## Related Objects
 
-When a base serializer includes one or more nested serializers, the hierarchical structure precludes it from being used for write operations. Thus, a flat representation of an object may be provided using a writable serializer. This serializer includes only raw database values and is not typically used for retrieval, except as part of the response to the creation or updating of an object.
+Related objects (e.g. `ForeignKey` fields) are represented using a nested serializer. A nested serializer provides a minimal representation of an object, including only its URL and enough information to display the object to a user. When performing write API actions (`POST`, `PUT`, and `PATCH`), related objects may be specified by either numeric ID (primary key), or by a set of attributes sufficiently unique to return the desired object.
+
+For example, when creating a new device, its rack can be specified by NetBox ID (PK):
 
 ```
 {
-    "id": 1201,
-    "site": 7,
-    "group": 4,
-    "vid": 102,
-    "name": "Users-Floor2",
-    "tenant": null,
-    "status": 1,
-    "role": 9,
-    "description": ""
+    "name": "MyNewDevice",
+    "rack": 123,
+    ...
 }
 ```
 
+Or by a set of nested attributes used to identify the rack:
+
+```
+{
+    "name": "MyNewDevice",
+    "rack": {
+        "site": {
+            "name": "Equinix DC6"
+        },
+        "name": "R204"
+    },
+    ...
+}
+```
+
+Note that if the provided parameters do not return exactly one object, a validation error is raised.
+
+## Brief Format
+
+Most API endpoints support an optional "brief" format, which returns only a minimal representation of each object in the response. This is useful when you need only a list of the objects themselves without any related data, such as when populating a drop-down list in a form.
+
+For example, the default (complete) format of an IP address looks like this:
+
+```
+GET /api/ipam/prefixes/13980/
+
+{
+    "id": 13980,
+    "family": 4,
+    "prefix": "192.0.2.0/24",
+    "site": null,
+    "vrf": null,
+    "tenant": null,
+    "vlan": null,
+    "status": {
+        "value": 1,
+        "label": "Active"
+    },
+    "role": null,
+    "is_pool": false,
+    "description": "",
+    "tags": [],
+    "custom_fields": {},
+    "created": "2018-12-11",
+    "last_updated": "2018-12-11T16:27:55.073174-05:00"
+}
+```
+
+The brief format is much more terse, but includes a link to the object's full representation:
+
+```
+GET /api/ipam/prefixes/13980/?brief=1
+
+{
+    "id": 13980,
+    "url": "https://netbox/api/ipam/prefixes/13980/",
+    "family": 4,
+    "prefix": "192.0.2.0/24"
+}
+```
+
+The brief format is supported for both lists and individual objects.
+
+## Static Choice Fields
+
+Some model fields, such as the `status` field in the above example, utilize static integers corresponding to static choices. The available choices can be retrieved from the read-only `_choices` endpoint within each app. A specific `model:field` tuple may optionally be specified in the URL.
+
+Each choice includes a human-friendly label and its corresponding numeric value. For example, `GET /api/ipam/_choices/prefix:status/` will return:
+
+```
+[
+    {
+        "value": 0,
+        "label": "Container"
+    },
+    {
+        "value": 1,
+        "label": "Active"
+    },
+    {
+        "value": 2,
+        "label": "Reserved"
+    },
+    {
+        "value": 3,
+        "label": "Deprecated"
+    }
+]
+```
+
+Thus, to set a prefix's status to "Reserved," it would be assigned the integer `2`.
+
+A request for `GET /api/ipam/_choices/` will return choices for _all_ fields belonging to models within the IPAM app.
+
 # Pagination
 
 API responses which contain a list of objects (for example, a request to `/api/dcim/devices/`) will be paginated to avoid unnecessary overhead. The root JSON object will contain the following attributes:
@@ -120,7 +246,7 @@ Vary: Accept
 }
 ```
 
-The default page size derives from the [`PAGINATE_COUNT`](../configuration/optional-settings/#paginate_count) configuration setting, which defaults to 50. However, this can be overridden per request by specifying the desired `offset` and `limit` query parameters. For example, if you wish to retrieve a hundred devices at a time, you would make a request for:
+The default page size derives from the [`PAGINATE_COUNT`](../../configuration/optional-settings/#paginate_count) configuration setting, which defaults to 50. However, this can be overridden per request by specifying the desired `offset` and `limit` query parameters. For example, if you wish to retrieve a hundred devices at a time, you would make a request for:
 
 ```
 http://localhost:8000/api/dcim/devices/?limit=100
@@ -136,3 +262,52 @@ The response will return devices 1 through 100. The URL provided in the `next` a
     "results": [...]
 }
 ```
+
+The maximum number of objects that can be returned is limited by the [`MAX_PAGE_SIZE`](../../configuration/optional-settings/#max_page_size) setting, which is 1000 by default. Setting this to `0` or `None` will remove the maximum limit. An API consumer can then pass `?limit=0` to retrieve _all_ matching objects with a single request.
+
+!!! warning
+    Disabling the page size limit introduces a potential for very resource-intensive requests, since one API request can effectively retrieve an entire table from the database.
+
+# Filtering
+
+A list of objects retrieved via the API can be filtered by passing one or more query parameters. The same parameters used by the web UI work for the API as well. For example, to return only prefixes with a status of "Active" (`1`):
+
+```
+GET /api/ipam/prefixes/?status=1
+```
+
+The choices available for fixed choice fields such as `status` are exposed in the API under a special `_choices` endpoint for each NetBox app. For example, the available choices for `Prefix.status` are listed at `/api/ipam/_choices/` under the key `prefix:status`:
+
+```
+"prefix:status": [
+    {
+        "label": "Container",
+        "value": 0
+    },
+    {
+        "label": "Active",
+        "value": 1
+    },
+    {
+        "label": "Reserved",
+        "value": 2
+    },
+    {
+        "label": "Deprecated",
+        "value": 3
+    }
+],
+```
+
+For most fields, when a filter is passed multiple times, objects matching _any_ of the provided values will be returned. For example, `GET /api/dcim/sites/?name=Foo&name=Bar` will return all sites named "Foo" _or_ "Bar". The exception to this rule is ManyToManyFields which may have multiple values assigned. Tags are the most common example of a ManyToManyField. For example, `GET /api/dcim/sites/?tag=foo&tag=bar` will return only sites tagged with both "foo" _and_ "bar".
+
+## Custom Fields
+
+To filter on a custom field, prepend `cf_` to the field name. For example, the following query will return only sites where a custom field named `foo` is equal to 123:
+
+```
+GET /api/dcim/sites/?cf_foo=123
+```
+
+!!! note
+    Full versus partial matching when filtering is configurable per custom field. Filtering can be toggled (or disabled) for a custom field in the admin UI.

docs/api/working-with-secrets.md

@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ As with most other objects, the NetBox API can be used to create, modify, and de
 
 # Generating a Session Key
 
-In order to encrypt or decrypt secret data, a session key must be attached to the API request. To generate a session key, send an authenticated request to the `/api/secrets/get-session-key/` endpoint with the private RSA key which matches your [UserKey](../data-model/secrets/#user-keys). The private key must be POSTed with the name `private_key`.
+In order to encrypt or decrypt secret data, a session key must be attached to the API request. To generate a session key, send an authenticated request to the `/api/secrets/get-session-key/` endpoint with the private RSA key which matches your [UserKey](../../core-functionality/secrets/#user-keys). The private key must be POSTed with the name `private_key`.
 
 ```
 $ curl -X POST http://localhost:8000/api/secrets/get-session-key/ \

docs/configuration/index.md

@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+# NetBox Configuration
+
+NetBox's local configuration is stored in `netbox/netbox/configuration.py`. An example configuration is provided at `netbox/netbox/configuration.example.py`. You may copy or rename the example configuration and make changes as appropriate. NetBox will not run without a configuration file.
+
+While NetBox has many configuration settings, only a few of them must be defined at the time of installation.
+
+* [Required settings](required-settings.md)
+* [Optional settings](optional-settings.md)
+
+## Changing the Configuration
+
+Configuration settings may be changed at any time. However, the NetBox service must be restarted before the changes will take effect:
+
+```no-highlight
+# sudo supervisorctl restart netbox
+```

docs/configuration/mandatory-settings.md

@@ -1,45 +0,0 @@
-NetBox's local configuration is held in `netbox/netbox/configuration.py`. An example configuration is provided at `netbox/netbox/configuration.example.py`. You may copy or rename the example configuration and make changes as appropriate. NetBox will not run without a configuration file.
-
-## ALLOWED_HOSTS
-
-This is a list of valid fully-qualified domain names (FQDNs) that is used to reach the NetBox service. Usually this is the same as the hostname for the NetBox server, but can also be different (e.g. when using a reverse proxy serving the NetBox website under a different FQDN than the hostname of the NetBox server). NetBox will not permit access to the server via any other hostnames (or IPs). The value of this option is also used to set `CSRF_TRUSTED_ORIGINS`, which restricts `HTTP POST` to the same set of hosts (more about this [here](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/1.9/ref/settings/#std:setting-CSRF_TRUSTED_ORIGINS)). Keep in mind that NetBox, by default, has `USE_X_FORWARDED_HOST = True` (in `netbox/netbox/settings.py`) which means that if you're using a reverse proxy, it's the FQDN used to reach that reverse proxy which needs to be in this list (more about this [here](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/1.9/ref/settings/#allowed-hosts)).
-
-Example:
-
-```
-ALLOWED_HOSTS = ['netbox.example.com', '192.0.2.123']
-```
-
----
-
-## DATABASE
-
-NetBox requires access to a PostgreSQL database service to store data. This service can run locally or on a remote system. The following parameters must be defined within the `DATABASE` dictionary:
-
-* NAME - Database name
-* USER - PostgreSQL username
-* PASSWORD - PostgreSQL password
-* HOST - Name or IP address of the database server (use `localhost` if running locally)
-* PORT - TCP port of the PostgreSQL service; leave blank for default port (5432)
-
-Example:
-
-```
-DATABASE = {
-    'NAME': 'netbox',               # Database name
-    'USER': 'netbox',               # PostgreSQL username
-    'PASSWORD': 'J5brHrAXFLQSif0K', # PostgreSQL password
-    'HOST': 'localhost',            # Database server
-    'PORT': '',                     # Database port (leave blank for default)
-}
-```
-
----
-
-## SECRET_KEY
-
-This is a secret cryptographic key is used to improve the security of cookies and password resets. The key defined here should not be shared outside of the configuration file. `SECRET_KEY` can be changed at any time, however be aware that doing so will invalidate all existing sessions.
-
-Please note that this key is **not** used for hashing user passwords or for the encrypted storage of secret data in NetBox.
-
-`SECRET_KEY` should be at least 50 characters in length and contain a random mix of letters, digits, and symbols. The script located at `netbox/generate_secret_key.py` may be used to generate a suitable key.

docs/configuration/optional-settings.md

@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-The following are optional settings which may be declared in `netbox/netbox/configuration.py`.
+# Optional Configuration Settings
 
 ## ADMINS
 
@@ -17,7 +17,7 @@ ADMINS = [
 
 ## BANNER_BOTTOM
 
-Setting these variables will display content in a banner at the top and/or bottom of the page, respectively. To replicate the content of the top banner in the bottom banner, set:
+Setting these variables will display content in a banner at the top and/or bottom of the page, respectively. HTML is allowed. To replicate the content of the top banner in the bottom banner, set:
 
 ```
 BANNER_TOP = 'Your banner text'
@@ -26,6 +26,12 @@ BANNER_BOTTOM = BANNER_TOP
 
 ---
 
+## BANNER_LOGIN
+
+The value of this variable will be displayed on the login page above the login form. HTML is allowed.
+
+---
+
 ## BASE_PATH
 
 Default: None
@@ -38,6 +44,22 @@ BASE_PATH = 'netbox/'
 
 ---
 
+## CACHE_TIMEOUT
+
+Default: 900
+
+The number of seconds to retain cache entries before automatically invalidating them.
+
+---
+
+## CHANGELOG_RETENTION
+
+Default: 90
+
+The number of days to retain logged changes (object creations, updates, and deletions). Set this to `0` to retain changes in the database indefinitely. (Warning: This will greatly increase database size over time.)
+
+---
+
 ## CORS_ORIGIN_ALLOW_ALL
 
 Default: False
@@ -50,7 +72,13 @@ If True, cross-origin resource sharing (CORS) requests will be accepted from all
 
 ## CORS_ORIGIN_REGEX_WHITELIST
 
-These settings specify a list of origins that are authorized to make cross-site API requests. Use `CORS_ORIGIN_WHITELIST` to define a list of exact hostnames, or `CORS_ORIGIN_REGEX_WHITELIST` to define a set of regular expressions. (These settings have no effect if `CORS_ORIGIN_ALLOW_ALL` is True.)
+These settings specify a list of origins that are authorized to make cross-site API requests. Use `CORS_ORIGIN_WHITELIST` to define a list of exact hostnames, or `CORS_ORIGIN_REGEX_WHITELIST` to define a set of regular expressions. (These settings have no effect if `CORS_ORIGIN_ALLOW_ALL` is True.) For example:
+
+```
+CORS_ORIGIN_WHITELIST = [
+    'https://example.com',
+]
+```
 
 ---
 
@@ -62,6 +90,14 @@ This setting enables debugging. This should be done only during development or t
 
 ---
 
+## DEVELOPER
+
+Default: False
+
+This parameter serves as a safeguard to prevent some potentially dangerous behavior, such as generating new database schema migrations. Set this to `True` **only** if you are actively developing the NetBox code base.
+
+---
+
 ## EMAIL
 
 In order to send email, NetBox needs an email server configured. The following items can be defined within the `EMAIL` setting:
@@ -73,9 +109,47 @@ In order to send email, NetBox needs an email server configured. The following i
 * TIMEOUT - Amount of time to wait for a connection (seconds)
 * FROM_EMAIL - Sender address for emails sent by NetBox
 
+Email is sent from NetBox only for critical events. If you would like to test the email server configuration please use the django function [send_mail()](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/topics/email/#send-mail):
+
+```
+# python ./manage.py nbshell
+>>> from django.core.mail import send_mail
+>>> send_mail(
+  'Test Email Subject',
+  'Test Email Body',
+  'noreply-netbox@example.com',
+  ['users@example.com'],
+  fail_silently=False
+)
+```
+
 ---
 
-# ENFORCE_GLOBAL_UNIQUE
+## EXEMPT_VIEW_PERMISSIONS
+
+Default: Empty list
+
+A list of models to exempt from the enforcement of view permissions. Models listed here will be viewable by all users and by anonymous users.
+
+List models in the form `<app>.<model>`. For example:
+
+```
+EXEMPT_VIEW_PERMISSIONS = [
+    'dcim.site',
+    'dcim.region',
+    'ipam.prefix',
+]
+```
+
+To exempt _all_ models from view permission enforcement, set the following. (Note that `EXEMPT_VIEW_PERMISSIONS` must be an iterable.)
+
+```
+EXEMPT_VIEW_PERMISSIONS = ['*']
+```
+
+---
+
+## ENFORCE_GLOBAL_UNIQUE
 
 Default: False
 
@@ -83,6 +157,34 @@ Enforcement of unique IP space can be toggled on a per-VRF basis. To enforce uni
 
 ---
 
+## LOGGING
+
+By default, all messages of INFO severity or higher will be logged to the console. Additionally, if `DEBUG` is False and email access has been configured, ERROR and CRITICAL messages will be emailed to the users defined in `ADMINS`.
+
+The Django framework on which NetBox runs allows for the customization of logging, e.g. to write logs to file. Please consult the [Django logging documentation](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/topics/logging/) for more information on configuring this setting. Below is an example which will write all INFO and higher messages to a file:
+
+```
+LOGGING = {
+    'version': 1,
+    'disable_existing_loggers': False,
+    'handlers': {
+        'file': {
+            'level': 'INFO',
+            'class': 'logging.FileHandler',
+            'filename': '/var/log/netbox.log',
+        },
+    },
+    'loggers': {
+        'django': {
+            'handlers': ['file'],
+            'level': 'INFO',
+        },
+    },
+}
+```
+
+---
+
 ## LOGIN_REQUIRED
 
 Default: False
@@ -91,6 +193,14 @@ Setting this to True will permit only authenticated users to access any part of
 
 ---
 
+## LOGIN_TIMEOUT
+
+Default: 1209600 seconds (14 days)
+
+The liftetime (in seconds) of the authentication cookie issued to a NetBox user upon login.
+
+---
+
 ## MAINTENANCE_MODE
 
 Default: False
@@ -99,11 +209,69 @@ Setting this to True will display a "maintenance mode" banner at the top of ever
 
 ---
 
-## NETBOX_USERNAME
+## MAX_PAGE_SIZE
 
-## NETBOX_PASSWORD
+Default: 1000
 
-If provided, NetBox will use these credentials to authenticate against devices when collecting data.
+An API consumer can request an arbitrary number of objects by appending the "limit" parameter to the URL (e.g. `?limit=1000`). This setting defines the maximum limit. Setting it to `0` or `None` will allow an API consumer to request all objects by specifying `?limit=0`.
+
+---
+
+## MEDIA_ROOT
+
+Default: $BASE_DIR/netbox/media/
+
+The file path to the location where media files (such as image attachments) are stored. By default, this is the `netbox/media/` directory within the base NetBox installation path.
+
+---
+
+## METRICS_ENABLED
+
+Default: False
+
+Toggle exposing Prometheus metrics at `/metrics`. See the [Prometheus Metrics](../../additional-features/prometheus-metrics/) documentation for more details.
+
+---
+
+## NAPALM_USERNAME
+
+## NAPALM_PASSWORD
+
+NetBox will use these credentials when authenticating to remote devices via the [NAPALM library](https://napalm-automation.net/), if installed. Both parameters are optional.
+
+Note: If SSH public key authentication has been set up for the system account under which NetBox runs, these parameters are not needed.
+
+---
+
+## NAPALM_ARGS
+
+A dictionary of optional arguments to pass to NAPALM when instantiating a network driver. See the NAPALM documentation for a [complete list of optional arguments](http://napalm.readthedocs.io/en/latest/support/#optional-arguments). An example:
+
+```
+NAPALM_ARGS = {
+    'api_key': '472071a93b60a1bd1fafb401d9f8ef41',
+    'port': 2222,
+}
+```
+
+Note: Some platforms (e.g. Cisco IOS) require an argument named `secret` to be passed in addition to the normal password. If desired, you can use the configured `NAPALM_PASSWORD` as the value for this argument:
+
+```
+NAPALM_USERNAME = 'username'
+NAPALM_PASSWORD = 'MySecretPassword'
+NAPALM_ARGS = {
+    'secret': NAPALM_PASSWORD,
+    # Include any additional args here
+}
+```
+
+---
+
+## NAPALM_TIMEOUT
+
+Default: 30 seconds
+
+The amount of time (in seconds) to wait for NAPALM to connect to a device.
 
 ---
 
@@ -123,6 +291,50 @@ When determining the primary IP address for a device, IPv6 is preferred over IPv
 
 ---
 
+## REPORTS_ROOT
+
+Default: $BASE_DIR/netbox/reports/
+
+The file path to the location where custom reports will be kept. By default, this is the `netbox/reports/` directory within the base NetBox installation path.
+
+---
+
+## SCRIPTS_ROOT
+
+Default: $BASE_DIR/netbox/scripts/
+
+The file path to the location where custom scripts will be kept. By default, this is the `netbox/scripts/` directory within the base NetBox installation path.
+
+---
+
+## SESSION_FILE_PATH
+
+Default: None
+
+Session data is used to track authenticated users when they access NetBox. By default, NetBox stores session data in the PostgreSQL database. However, this inhibits authentication to a standby instance of NetBox without write access to the database. Alternatively, a local file path may be specified here and NetBox will store session data as files instead of using the database. Note that the user as which NetBox runs must have read and write permissions to this path.
+
+---
+
+## STORAGE_BACKEND
+
+Default: None (local storage)
+
+The backend storage engine for handling uploaded files (e.g. image attachments). NetBox supports integration with the [`django-storages`](https://django-storages.readthedocs.io/en/stable/) package, which provides backends for several popular file storage services. If not configured, local filesystem storage will be used.
+
+The configuration parameters for the specified storage backend are defined under the `STORAGE_CONFIG` setting.
+
+---
+
+## STORAGE_CONFIG
+
+Default: Empty
+
+A dictionary of configuration parameters for the storage backend configured as `STORAGE_BACKEND`. The specific parameters to be used here are specific to each backend; see the [`django-storages` documentation](https://django-storages.readthedocs.io/en/stable/) for more detail.
+
+If `STORAGE_BACKEND` is not defined, this setting will be ignored.
+
+---
+
 ## TIME_ZONE
 
 Default: UTC
@@ -133,7 +345,7 @@ The time zone NetBox will use when dealing with dates and times. It is recommend
 
 ## Date and Time Formatting
 
-You may define custom formatting for date and times. For detailed instructions on writing format strings, please see [the Django documentation](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/dev/ref/templates/builtins/#date).
+You may define custom formatting for date and times. For detailed instructions on writing format strings, please see [the Django documentation](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/templates/builtins/#date).
 
 Defaults:
 

docs/configuration/required-settings.md

@@ -0,0 +1,141 @@
+# Required Configuration Settings
+
+## ALLOWED_HOSTS
+
+This is a list of valid fully-qualified domain names (FQDNs) that is used to reach the NetBox service. Usually this is the same as the hostname for the NetBox server, but can also be different (e.g. when using a reverse proxy serving the NetBox website under a different FQDN than the hostname of the NetBox server). NetBox will not permit access to the server via any other hostnames (or IPs). The value of this option is also used to set `CSRF_TRUSTED_ORIGINS`, which restricts `HTTP POST` to the same set of hosts (more about this [here](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/settings/#std:setting-CSRF_TRUSTED_ORIGINS)). Keep in mind that NetBox, by default, has `USE_X_FORWARDED_HOST = True` (in `netbox/netbox/settings.py`) which means that if you're using a reverse proxy, it's the FQDN used to reach that reverse proxy which needs to be in this list (more about this [here](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/settings/#allowed-hosts)).
+
+Example:
+
+```
+ALLOWED_HOSTS = ['netbox.example.com', '192.0.2.123']
+```
+
+---
+
+## DATABASE
+
+NetBox requires access to a PostgreSQL database service to store data. This service can run locally or on a remote system. The following parameters must be defined within the `DATABASE` dictionary:
+
+* `NAME` - Database name
+* `USER` - PostgreSQL username
+* `PASSWORD` - PostgreSQL password
+* `HOST` - Name or IP address of the database server (use `localhost` if running locally)
+* `PORT` - TCP port of the PostgreSQL service; leave blank for default port (5432)
+* `CONN_MAX_AGE` - Lifetime of a [persistent database connection](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/databases/#persistent-connections), in seconds (150-300 is recommended)
+
+Example:
+
+```python
+DATABASE = {
+    'NAME': 'netbox',               # Database name
+    'USER': 'netbox',               # PostgreSQL username
+    'PASSWORD': 'J5brHrAXFLQSif0K', # PostgreSQL password
+    'HOST': 'localhost',            # Database server
+    'PORT': '',                     # Database port (leave blank for default)
+    'CONN_MAX_AGE': 300,            # Max database connection age
+}
+```
+
+!!! note
+    NetBox supports all PostgreSQL database options supported by the underlying Django framework. For a complete list of available parameters, please see [the Django documentation](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/ref/settings/#databases).
+
+---
+
+## REDIS
+
+[Redis](https://redis.io/) is an in-memory data store similar to memcached. While Redis has been an optional component of
+NetBox since the introduction of webhooks in version 2.4, it is required starting in 2.6 to support NetBox's caching
+functionality (as well as other planned features). In 2.7, the connection settings were broken down into two sections for
+webhooks and caching, allowing the user to connect to different Redis instances/databases per feature.
+
+Redis is configured using a configuration setting similar to `DATABASE` and these settings are the same for both of the `webhooks` and `caching` subsections:
+
+* `HOST` - Name or IP address of the Redis server (use `localhost` if running locally)
+* `PORT` - TCP port of the Redis service; leave blank for default port (6379)
+* `PASSWORD` - Redis password (if set)
+* `DATABASE` - Numeric database ID
+* `DEFAULT_TIMEOUT` - Connection timeout in seconds
+* `SSL` - Use SSL connection to Redis
+
+Example:
+
+```python
+REDIS = {
+    'webhooks': {
+        'HOST': 'redis.example.com',
+        'PORT': 1234,
+        'PASSWORD': 'foobar',
+        'DATABASE': 0,
+        'DEFAULT_TIMEOUT': 300,
+        'SSL': False,
+    },
+    'caching': {
+        'HOST': 'localhost',
+        'PORT': 6379,
+        'PASSWORD': '',
+        'DATABASE': 1,
+        'DEFAULT_TIMEOUT': 300,
+        'SSL': False,
+    }
+}
+```
+
+!!! note
+    If you are upgrading from a version prior to v2.7, please note that the Redis connection configuration settings have
+    changed. Manual modification to bring the `REDIS` section inline with the above specification is necessary
+
+!!! note
+    It is highly recommended to keep the webhook and cache databases separate. Using the same database number on the
+    same Redis instance for both may result in webhook processing data being lost during cache flushing events.
+
+### Using Redis Sentinel
+
+If you are using [Redis Sentinel](https://redis.io/topics/sentinel) for high-availability purposes, there is minimal 
+configuration necessary to convert NetBox to recognize it. It requires the removal of the `HOST` and `PORT` keys from 
+above and the addition of two new keys.
+
+* `SENTINELS`: List of tuples or tuple of tuples with each inner tuple containing the name or IP address 
+of the Redis server and port for each sentinel instance to connect to
+* `SENTINEL_SERVICE`: Name of the master / service to connect to
+
+Example:
+
+```python
+REDIS = {
+    'webhooks': {
+        'SENTINELS': [('mysentinel.redis.example.com', 6379)],
+        'SENTINEL_SERVICE': 'netbox',
+        'PASSWORD': '',
+        'DATABASE': 0,
+        'DEFAULT_TIMEOUT': 300,
+        'SSL': False,
+    },
+    'caching': {
+        'SENTINELS': [
+            ('mysentinel.redis.example.com', 6379),
+            ('othersentinel.redis.example.com', 6379)
+        ],
+        'SENTINEL_SERVICE': 'netbox',
+        'PASSWORD': '',
+        'DATABASE': 1,
+        'DEFAULT_TIMEOUT': 300,
+        'SSL': False,
+    }
+}
+```
+
+!!! note
+    It is possible to have only one or the other Redis configurations to use Sentinel functionality. It is possible
+    for example to have the webhook use sentinel via `HOST`/`PORT` and for caching to use Sentinel via 
+    `SENTINELS`/`SENTINEL_SERVICE`.
+
+
+---
+
+## SECRET_KEY
+
+This is a secret cryptographic key is used to improve the security of cookies and password resets. The key defined here should not be shared outside of the configuration file. `SECRET_KEY` can be changed at any time, however be aware that doing so will invalidate all existing sessions.
+
+Please note that this key is **not** used for hashing user passwords or for the encrypted storage of secret data in NetBox.
+
+`SECRET_KEY` should be at least 50 characters in length and contain a random mix of letters, digits, and symbols. The script located at `netbox/generate_secret_key.py` may be used to generate a suitable key.

docs/core-functionality/circuits.md

@@ -1,18 +1,16 @@
-The circuits component of NetBox deals with the management of long-haul Internet and private transit links and providers.
-
 # Providers
 
 A provider is any entity which provides some form of connectivity. While this obviously includes carriers which offer Internet and private transit service, it might also include Internet exchange (IX) points and even organizations with whom you peer directly.
 
-Each provider may be assigned an autonomous system number (ASN), an account number, and contact information.
+Each provider may be assigned an autonomous system number (ASN), an account number, and relevant contact information.
 
 ---
 
 # Circuits
 
-A circuit represents a single physical data link connecting two endpoints. Each circuit belongs to a provider and must be assigned a circuit ID which is unique to that provider.
+A circuit represents a single _physical_ link connecting exactly two endpoints. (A circuit with more than two endpoints is a virtual circuit, which is not currently supported by NetBox.) Each circuit belongs to a provider and must be assigned a circuit ID which is unique to that provider.
 
-### Circuit Types
+## Circuit Types
 
 Circuits are classified by type. For example, you might define circuit types for:
 
@@ -23,11 +21,14 @@ Circuits are classified by type. For example, you might define circuit types for
 
 Circuit types are fully customizable.
 
-### Circuit Terminations
+## Circuit Terminations
 
 A circuit may have one or two terminations, annotated as the "A" and "Z" sides of the circuit. A single-termination circuit can be used when you don't know (or care) about the far end of a circuit (for example, an Internet access circuit which connects to a transit provider). A dual-termination circuit is useful for tracking circuits which connect two sites.
 
-Each circuit termination is tied to a site, and optionally to a specific device and interface within that site. Each termination can be assigned a separate downstream and upstream speed independent from one another. Fields are also available to track cross-connect and patch panel details.
+Each circuit termination is tied to a site, and may optionally be connected via a cable to a specific device interface or pass-through port. Each termination can be assigned a separate downstream and upstream speed independent from one another. Fields are also available to track cross-connect and patch panel details.
 
 !!! note
     A circuit represents a physical link, and cannot have more than two endpoints. When modeling a multi-point topology, each leg of the topology must be defined as a discrete circuit.
+
+!!! note
+    A circuit may terminate only to a physical interface. Circuits may not terminate to LAG interfaces, which are virtual interfaces: You must define each physical circuit within a service bundle separately and terminate it to its actual physical interface.

docs/core-functionality/devices.md

@@ -0,0 +1,152 @@
+# Device Types
+
+A device type represents a particular make and model of hardware that exists in the real world. Device types define the physical attributes of a device (rack height and depth) and its individual components (console, power, and network interfaces).
+
+Device types are instantiated as devices installed within racks. For example, you might define a device type to represent a Juniper EX4300-48T network switch with 48 Ethernet interfaces. You can then create multiple devices of this type named "switch1," "switch2," and so on. Each device will inherit the components (such as interfaces) of its device type at the time of creation. (However, changes made to a device type will **not** apply to instances of that device type retroactively.)
+
+Some devices house child devices which share physical resources, like space and power, but which functional independently from one another. A common example of this is blade server chassis. Each device type is designated as one of the following:
+
+* A parent device (which has device bays)
+* A child device (which must be installed in a device bay)
+* Neither
+
+!!! note
+    This parent/child relationship is **not** suitable for modeling chassis-based devices, wherein child members share a common control plane.
+
+    For that application you should create a single Device for the chassis, and add Interfaces directly to it.  Interfaces can be created in bulk using range patterns, e.g. "Gi1/[1-24]".
+
+    Add Inventory Items if you want to record the line cards themselves as separate entities.  There is no explicit relationship between each interface and its line card, but it may be implied by the naming (e.g. interfaces "Gi1/x" are on line card 1)
+
+## Manufacturers
+
+Each device type must be assigned to a manufacturer. The model number of a device type must be unique to its manufacturer.
+
+## Component Templates
+
+Each device type is assigned a number of component templates which define the physical components within a device. These are:
+
+* Console ports
+* Console server ports
+* Power ports
+* Power outlets
+* Network interfaces
+* Front ports
+* Rear ports
+* Device bays (which house child devices)
+
+Whenever a new device is created, its components are automatically created per the templates assigned to its device type. For example, a Juniper EX4300-48T device type might have the following component templates defined:
+
+* One template for a console port ("Console")
+* Two templates for power ports ("PSU0" and "PSU1")
+* 48 templates for 1GE interfaces ("ge-0/0/0" through "ge-0/0/47")
+* Four templates for 10GE interfaces ("xe-0/2/0" through "xe-0/2/3")
+
+Once component templates have been created, every new device that you create as an instance of this type will automatically be assigned each of the components listed above.
+
+!!! note
+    Assignment of components from templates occurs only at the time of device creation. If you modify the templates of a device type, it will not affect devices which have already been created. However, you always have the option of adding, modifying, or deleting components on existing devices.
+
+---
+
+# Devices
+
+Every piece of hardware which is installed within a rack exists in NetBox as a device. Devices are measured in rack units (U) and can be half depth or full depth. A device may have a height of 0U: These devices do not consume vertical rack space and cannot be assigned to a particular rack unit. A common example of a 0U device is a vertically-mounted PDU.
+
+When assigning a multi-U device to a rack, it is considered to be mounted in the lowest-numbered rack unit which it occupies. For example, a 3U device which occupies U8 through U10 is said to be mounted in U8. This logic applies to racks with both ascending and descending unit numbering.
+
+A device is said to be full depth if its installation on one rack face prevents the installation of any other device on the opposite face within the same rack unit(s). This could be either because the device is physically too deep to allow a device behind it, or because the installation of an opposing device would impede airflow.
+
+## Device Components
+
+There are eight types of device components which comprise all of the interconnection logic with NetBox:
+
+* Console ports
+* Console server ports
+* Power ports
+* Power outlets
+* Network interfaces
+* Front ports
+* Rear ports
+* Device bays
+
+### Console
+
+Console ports connect only to console server ports. Console connections can be marked as either *planned* or *connected*.
+
+### Power
+
+Power ports connect only to power outlets. Power connections can be marked as either *planned* or *connected*.
+
+### Interfaces
+
+Interfaces connect to one another in a symmetric manner: If interface A connects to interface B, interface B therefore connects to interface A. Each type of connection can be classified as either *planned* or *connected*.
+
+Each interface is a assigned a type denoting its physical properties. Two special types exist: the "virtual" type can be used to designate logical interfaces (such as SVIs), and the "LAG" type can be used to desinate link aggregation groups to which physical interfaces can be assigned.
+
+Each interface can also be enabled or disabled, and optionally designated as management-only (for out-of-band management). Fields are also provided to store an interface's MTU and MAC address.
+
+VLANs can be assigned to each interface as either tagged or untagged. (An interface may have only one untagged VLAN.)
+
+### Pass-through Ports
+
+Pass-through ports are used to model physical terminations which comprise part of a longer path, such as a cable terminated to a patch panel. Each front port maps to a position on a rear port. A 24-port UTP patch panel, for instance, would have 24 front ports and 24 rear ports. Although this relationship is typically one-to-one, a rear port may have multiple front ports mapped to it. This can be useful for modeling instances where multiple paths share a common cable (for example, six different fiber connections sharing a 12-strand MPO cable).
+
+Pass-through ports can also be used to model "bump in the wire" devices, such as a media convertor or passive tap.
+
+### Device Bays
+
+Device bays represent the ability of a device to house child devices. For example, you might install four blade servers into a 2U chassis. The chassis would appear in the rack elevation as a 2U device with four device bays. Each server within it would be defined as a 0U device installed in one of the device bays. Child devices do not appear within rack elevations or the "Non-Racked Devices" list within the rack view.
+
+Child devices are first-class Devices in their own right: that is, fully independent managed entities which don't share any control plane with the parent.  Just like normal devices, child devices have their own platform (OS), role, tags, and interfaces.  You cannot create a LAG between interfaces in different child devices.
+
+Therefore, Device bays are **not** suitable for modeling chassis-based switches and routers.  These should instead be modeled as a single Device, with the line cards as Inventory Items.
+
+## Device Roles
+
+Devices can be organized by functional roles. These roles are fully customizable. For example, you might create roles for core switches, distribution switches, and access switches.
+
+---
+
+# Platforms
+
+A platform defines the type of software running on a device or virtual machine. This can be helpful when it is necessary to distinguish between, for instance, different feature sets. Note that two devices of the same type may be assigned different platforms: for example, one Juniper MX240 running Junos 14 and another running Junos 15.
+
+The platform model is also used to indicate which [NAPALM](https://napalm-automation.net/) driver NetBox should use when connecting to a remote device. The name of the driver along with optional parameters are stored with the platform.
+
+The assignment of platforms to devices is an optional feature, and may be disregarded if not desired.
+
+---
+
+# Inventory Items
+
+Inventory items represent hardware components installed within a device, such as a power supply or CPU or line card. Currently, these are used merely for inventory tracking, although future development might see their functionality expand. Like device types, each item can optionally be assigned a manufacturer.
+
+---
+
+# Virtual Chassis
+
+A virtual chassis represents a set of devices which share a single control plane: a stack of switches which are managed as a single device, for example. Each device in the virtual chassis is assigned a position and (optionally) a priority. Exactly one device is designated the virtual chassis master: This device will typically be assigned a name, secrets, services, and other attributes related to its management.
+
+It's important to recognize the distinction between a virtual chassis and a chassis-based device. For instance, a virtual chassis is not used to model a chassis switch with removable line cards such as the Juniper EX9208, as its line cards are _not_ physically separate devices capable of operating independently.
+
+---
+
+# Cables
+
+A cable represents a physical connection between two termination points, such as between a console port and a patch panel port, or between two network interfaces. Cables can be traced through pass-through ports to form a complete path between two endpoints. In the example below, three individual cables comprise a path between the two connected endpoints.
+
+```
+|<------------------------------------------ Cable Path ------------------------------------------->|
+
+  Device A                   Patch Panel A                 Patch Panel B                  Device B
++-----------+               +-------------+               +-------------+               +-----------+
+| Interface | --- Cable --- | Front Port  |               | Front Port  | --- Cable --- | Interface |
++-----------+               +-------------+               +-------------+               +-----------+
+                            +-------------+               +-------------+
+                            |  Rear Port  | --- Cable --- |  Rear Port  |
+                            +-------------+               +-------------+
+```
+
+All connections between device components in NetBox are represented using cables. However, defining the actual cable plant is optional: Components can be be directly connected using cables with no type or other attributes assigned.
+
+Cables are also used to associated ports and interfaces with circuit terminations. To do this, first create the circuit termination, then navigate the desired component and connect a cable between the two.

docs/core-functionality/ipam.md

@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+# Aggregates
+
+The first step to documenting your IP space is to define its scope by creating aggregates. Aggregates establish the root of your IP address hierarchy by defining the top-level allocations that you're interested in managing. Most organizations will want to track some commonly-used private IP spaces, such as:
+
+* 10.0.0.0/8 (RFC 1918)
+* 100.64.0.0/10 (RFC 6598)
+* 172.16.0.0/12 (RFC 1918)
+* 192.168.0.0/16 (RFC 1918)
+* One or more /48s within fd00::/8 (IPv6 unique local addressing)
+
+In addition to one or more of these, you'll want to create an aggregate for each globally-routable space your organization has been allocated. These aggregates should match the allocations recorded in public WHOIS databases.
+
+Each IP prefix will be automatically arranged under its parent aggregate if one exists. Note that it's advised to create aggregates only for IP ranges actually allocated to your organization (or marked for private use): There is no need to define aggregates for provider-assigned space which is only used on Internet circuits, for example.
+
+Aggregates cannot overlap with one another: They can only exist side-by-side. For instance, you cannot define both 10.0.0.0/8 and 10.16.0.0/16 as aggregates, because they overlap. 10.16.0.0/16 in this example would be created as a prefix and automatically grouped under 10.0.0.0/8. Remember, the purpose of aggregates is to establish the root of your IP addressing hierarchy.
+
+## Regional Internet Registries (RIRs)
+
+[Regional Internet registries](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regional_Internet_registry) are responsible for the allocation of globally-routable address space. The five RIRs are ARIN, RIPE, APNIC, LACNIC, and AFRINIC. However, some address space has been set aside for internal use, such as defined in RFCs 1918 and 6598. NetBox considers these RFCs as a sort of RIR as well; that is, an authority which "owns" certain address space. There also exist lower-tier registries which serve a particular geographic area.
+
+Each aggregate must be assigned to one RIR. You are free to define whichever RIRs you choose (or create your own). The RIR model includes a boolean flag which indicates whether the RIR allocates only private IP space.
+
+For example, suppose your organization has been allocated 104.131.0.0/16 by ARIN. It also makes use of RFC 1918 addressing internally. You would first create RIRs named ARIN and RFC 1918, then create an aggregate for each of these top-level prefixes, assigning it to its respective RIR.
+
+---
+
+# Prefixes
+
+A prefix is an IPv4 or IPv6 network and mask expressed in CIDR notation (e.g. 192.0.2.0/24). A prefix entails only the "network portion" of an IP address: All bits in the address not covered by the mask must be zero. (In other words, a prefix cannot be a specific IP address.)
+
+Prefixes are automatically arranged by their parent aggregates. Additionally, each prefix can be assigned to a particular site and VRF (routing table). All prefixes not assigned to a VRF will appear in the "global" table.
+
+Each prefix can be assigned a status and a role. These terms are often used interchangeably so it's important to recognize the difference between them. The **status** defines a prefix's operational state. Statuses are hard-coded in NetBox and can be one of the following:
+
+* Container - A summary of child prefixes
+* Active - Provisioned and in use
+* Reserved - Designated for future use
+* Deprecated - No longer in use
+
+On the other hand, a prefix's **role** defines its function. Role assignment is optional and roles are fully customizable. For example, you might create roles to differentiate between production and development infrastructure.
+
+A prefix may also be assigned to a VLAN. This association is helpful for identifying which prefixes are included when reviewing a list of VLANs.
+
+The prefix model include a "pool" flag. If enabled, NetBox will treat this prefix as a range (such as a NAT pool) wherein every IP address is valid and assignable. This logic is used for identifying available IP addresses within a prefix. If this flag is disabled, NetBox will assume that the first and last (broadcast) address within the prefix are unusable.
+
+---
+
+# IP Addresses
+
+An IP address comprises a single host address (either IPv4 or IPv6) and its subnet mask. Its mask should match exactly how the IP address is configured on an interface in the real world.
+
+Like prefixes, an IP address can optionally be assigned to a VRF (otherwise, it will appear in the "global" table). IP addresses are automatically organized under parent prefixes within their respective VRFs.
+
+Also like prefixes, each IP address can be assigned a status and a role. Statuses are hard-coded in NetBox and include the following:
+
+* Active
+* Reserved
+* Deprecated
+* DHCP
+
+Each IP address can optionally be assigned a special role. Roles are used to indicate some special attribute of an IP address: for example, it is used as a loopback, or is a virtual IP maintained using VRRP. (Note that this differs in purpose from a _functional_ role, and thus cannot be customized.) Available roles include:
+
+* Loopback
+* Secondary
+* Anycast
+* VIP
+* VRRP
+* HSRP
+* GLBP
+
+An IP address can be assigned to a device or virtual machine interface, and an interface may have multiple IP addresses assigned to it. Further, each device and virtual machine may have one of its interface IPs designated as its primary IP address (one for IPv4 and one for IPv6).
+
+## Network Address Translation (NAT)
+
+An IP address can be designated as the network address translation (NAT) inside IP address for exactly one other IP address. This is useful primarily to denote a translation between public and private IP addresses. This relationship is followed in both directions: For example, if 10.0.0.1 is assigned as the inside IP for 192.0.2.1, 192.0.2.1 will be displayed as the outside IP for 10.0.0.1.
+
+!!! note
+    NetBox does not support tracking one-to-many NAT relationships (also called port address translation). This type of policy requires additional logic to model and cannot be fully represented by IP address alone.
+
+---
+
+# Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF)
+
+A VRF object in NetBox represents a virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) domain. Each VRF is essentially a separate routing table. VRFs are commonly used to isolate customers or organizations from one another within a network, or to route overlapping address space (e.g. multiple instances of the 10.0.0.0/8 space).
+
+Each VRF is assigned a unique name and an optional route distinguisher (RD). The RD is expected to take one of the forms prescribed in [RFC 4364](https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc4364#section-4.2), however its formatting is not strictly enforced.
+
+Each prefix and IP address may be assigned to one (and only one) VRF. If you have a prefix or IP address which exists in multiple VRFs, you will need to create a separate instance of it in NetBox for each VRF. Any IP prefix or address not assigned to a VRF is said to belong to the "global" table.
+
+By default, NetBox will allow duplicate prefixes to be assigned to a VRF. This behavior can be disabled by setting the "enforce unique" flag on the VRF model.
+
+!!! note
+    Enforcement of unique IP space can be toggled for global table (non-VRF prefixes) using the `ENFORCE_GLOBAL_UNIQUE` configuration setting.

docs/core-functionality/power.md

@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+# Power Panel
+
+A power panel represents the distribution board where power circuits – and their circuit breakers – terminate on. If you have multiple power panels in your data center, you should model them as such in NetBox to assist you in determining the redundancy of your power allocation.
+
+# Power Feed
+
+A power feed identifies the power outlet/drop that goes to a rack and is terminated to a power panel. Power feeds have a supply type (AC/DC), voltage, amperage, and phase type (single/three).
+
+Power feeds are optionally assigned to a rack. In addition, a power port – and only one – can connect to a power feed; in the context of a PDU, the power feed is analogous to the power outlet that a PDU's power port/inlet connects to.
+
+!!! info
+    The power usage of a rack is calculated when a power feed (or multiple) is assigned to that rack and connected to a power port.
+
+# Power Outlet
+
+Power outlets represent the ports on a PDU that supply power to other devices. Power outlets are downstream-facing towards power ports. A power outlet can be associated with a power port on the same device and a feed leg (i.e. in a case of a three-phase supply). This indicates which power port supplies power to a power outlet.
+
+# Power Port
+
+A power port is the inlet of a device where it draws its power. Power ports are upstream-facing towards power outlets. Alternatively, a power port can connect to a power feed – as mentioned in the power feed section – to indicate the power source of a PDU's inlet.
+
+!!! info
+    If the draw of a power port is left empty, it will be dynamically calculated based on the power outlets associated with that power port. This is usually the case on the power ports of devices that supply power, like a PDU.
+
+
+# Example
+
+Below is a simple diagram demonstrating how power is modelled in NetBox.
+
+!!! note
+    The power feeds are connected to the same power panel for illustrative purposes; usually, you would have such feeds diversely connected to panels to avoid the single point of failure.
+
+```
+          +---------------+
+          | Power panel 1 |
+          +---------------+
+            |           |
+            |           |
++--------------+     +--------------+
+| Power feed 1 |     | Power feed 2 |
++--------------+     +--------------+
+       |                     |
+       |                     |
+       |                     |    <-- Power ports
+     +---------+     +---------+
+     |  PDU 1  |     |  PDU 2  |
+     +---------+     +---------+
+       |       \     /       |    <-- Power outlets
+       |        \   /        |
+       |         \ /         |
+       |          X          |
+       |         / \         |
+       |        /   \        |
+       |       /     \       |    <-- Power ports
+      +--------+     +--------+
+      | Server |     | Router |
+      +--------+     +--------+
+```

docs/core-functionality/secrets.md

@@ -1,14 +1,12 @@
-"Secrets" are small amounts of data that must be kept confidential; for example, passwords and SNMP community strings. NetBox provides encrypted storage of secret data.
-
 # Secrets
 
-A secret represents a single credential or other string which must be stored securely. Each secret is assigned to a device within NetBox. The plaintext value of a secret is encrypted to a ciphertext immediately prior to storage within the database using a 256-bit AES master key. A SHA256 hash of the plaintext is also stored along with each ciphertext to validate the decrypted plaintext.
+A secret represents a single credential or other sensitive string of characters which must be stored securely. Each secret is assigned to a device within NetBox. The plaintext value of a secret is encrypted to a ciphertext immediately prior to storage within the database using a 256-bit AES master key. A SHA256 hash of the plaintext is also stored along with each ciphertext to validate the decrypted plaintext.
 
 Each secret can also store an optional name parameter, which is not encrypted. This may be useful for storing user names.
 
-### Roles
+## Roles
 
-Each secret is assigned a functional role which indicates what it is used for. Typical roles might include:
+Each secret is assigned a functional role which indicates what it is used for. Secret roles are customizable. Typical roles might include:
 
 * Login credentials
 * SNMP community strings
@@ -26,6 +24,20 @@ Each user within NetBox can associate his or her account with an RSA public key.
 
 User keys may be created by users individually, however they are of no use until they have been activated by a user who already possesses an active user key.
 
+## Supported Key Format
+
+Public key formats supported
+
+- PKCS#1 RSAPublicKey* (PEM header: BEGIN RSA PUBLIC KEY)
+- X.509 SubjectPublicKeyInfo** (PEM header: BEGIN PUBLIC KEY)
+- **OpenSSH line format is not supported.**
+
+Private key formats supported (unencrypted)
+
+- PKCS#1 RSAPrivateKey** (PEM header: BEGIN RSA PRIVATE KEY)
+- PKCS#8 PrivateKeyInfo* (PEM header: BEGIN PRIVATE KEY)
+
+
 ## Creating the First User Key
 
 When NetBox is first installed, it contains no encryption keys. Before it can store secrets, a user (typically the superuser) must create a user key. This can be done by navigating to Profile > User Key.

docs/core-functionality/services.md

@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+# Services
+
+A service represents a layer four TCP or UDP service available on a device or virtual machine. For example, you might want to document that an HTTP service is running on a device. Each service includes a name, protocol, and port number; for example, "SSH (TCP/22)" or "DNS (UDP/53)."
+
+A service may optionally be bound to one or more specific IP addresses belonging to its parent device or VM. (If no IP addresses are bound, the service is assumed to be reachable via any assigned IP address.)

docs/core-functionality/sites-and-racks.md

@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+# Sites
+
+How you choose to use sites will depend on the nature of your organization, but typically a site will equate to a building or campus. For example, a chain of banks might create a site to represent each of its branches, a site for its corporate headquarters, and two additional sites for its presence in two colocation facilities.
+
+Each site must be assigned one of the following operational statuses:
+
+* Active
+* Planned
+* Retired
+
+The site model provides a facility ID field which can be used to annotate a facility ID (such as a datacenter name) associated with the site. Each site may also have an autonomous system (AS) number and time zone associated with it. (Time zones are provided by the [pytz](https://pypi.org/project/pytz/) package.)
+
+The site model also includes several fields for storing contact and address information.
+
+## Regions
+
+Sites can be arranged geographically using regions. A region might represent a continent, country, city, campus, or other area depending on your use case. Regions can be nested recursively to construct a hierarchy. For example, you might define several country regions, and within each of those several state or city regions to which sites are assigned.
+
+---
+
+# Racks
+
+The rack model represents a physical two- or four-post equipment rack in which equipment is mounted. Each rack must be assigned to a site. Rack height is measured in *rack units* (U); racks are commonly between 42U and 48U tall, but NetBox allows you to define racks of arbitrary height. A toggle is provided to indicate whether rack units are in ascending or descending order.
+
+Each rack is assigned a name and (optionally) a separate facility ID. This is helpful when leasing space in a data center your organization does not own: The facility will often assign a seemingly arbitrary ID to a rack (for example, "M204.313") whereas internally you refer to is simply as "R113." A unique serial number may also be associated with each rack.
+
+A rack must be designated as one of the following types:
+
+* 2-post frame
+* 4-post frame
+* 4-post cabinet
+* Wall-mounted frame
+* Wall-mounted cabinet
+
+Each rack has two faces (front and rear) on which devices can be mounted. Rail-to-rail width may be 19 or 23 inches.
+
+## Rack Groups
+
+Racks can be arranged into groups. As with sites, how you choose to designate rack groups will depend on the nature of your organization. For example, if each site represents a campus, each group might represent a building within a campus. If each site represents a building, each rack group might equate to a floor or room.
+
+Each rack group must be assigned to a parent site. Hierarchical recursion of rack groups is not currently supported.
+
+The name and facility ID of each rack within a group must be unique. (Racks not assigned to the same rack group may have identical names and/or facility IDs.)
+
+## Rack Roles
+
+Each rack can optionally be assigned a functional role. For example, you might designate a rack for compute or storage resources, or to house colocated customer devices. Rack roles are fully customizable.
+
+## Rack Space Reservations
+
+Users can reserve units within a rack for future use. Multiple non-contiguous rack units can be associated with a single reservation (but reservations cannot span multiple racks). A rack reservation may optionally designate a specific tenant.

docs/core-functionality/tenancy.md

@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+# Tenants
+
+A tenant represents a discrete entity for administrative purposes. Typically, tenants are used to represent individual customers or internal departments within an organization. The following objects can be assigned to tenants:
+
+* Sites
+* Racks
+* Rack reservations
+* Devices
+* VRFs
+* Prefixes
+* IP addresses
+* VLANs
+* Circuits
+* Virtual machines
+
+Tenant assignment is used to signify ownership of an object in NetBox. As such, each object may only be owned by a single tenant. For example, if you have a firewall dedicated to a particular customer, you would assign it to the tenant which represents that customer. However, if the firewall serves multiple customers, it doesn't *belong* to any particular customer, so tenant assignment would not be appropriate.
+
+### Tenant Groups
+
+Tenants can be organized by custom groups. For instance, you might create one group called "Customers" and one called "Acquisitions." The assignment of tenants to groups is optional.

docs/core-functionality/virtual-machines.md

@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+# Clusters
+
+A cluster is a logical grouping of physical resources within which virtual machines run. A cluster must be assigned a type, and may optionally be assigned to a group and/or site.
+
+Physical devices may be associated with clusters as hosts. This allows users to track on which host(s) a particular VM may reside. However, NetBox does not support pinning a specific VM within a cluster to a particular host device.
+
+## Cluster Types
+
+A cluster type represents a technology or mechanism by which a cluster is formed. For example, you might create a cluster type named "VMware vSphere" for a locally hosted cluster or "DigitalOcean NYC3" for one hosted by a cloud provider.
+
+## Cluster Groups
+
+Cluster groups may be created for the purpose of organizing clusters. The assignment of clusters to groups is optional.
+
+---
+
+# Virtual Machines
+
+A virtual machine represents a virtual compute instance hosted within a cluster. Each VM must be associated with exactly one cluster.
+
+Like devices, each VM can be assigned a platform and have interfaces created on it. VM interfaces behave similarly to device interfaces, and can be assigned IP addresses, VLANs, and services. However, given their virtual nature, they cannot be connected to other interfaces. Unlike physical devices, VMs cannot be assigned console or power ports, device bays, or inventory items.
+
+The following resources can be defined for each VM:
+
+* vCPU count
+* Memory (MB)
+* Disk space (GB)

docs/core-functionality/vlans.md

@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+# VLANs
+
+A VLAN represents an isolated layer two domain, identified by a name and a numeric ID (1-4094) as defined in [IEEE 802.1Q](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IEEE_802.1Q). Each VLAN may be assigned to a site and/or VLAN group.
+
+Each VLAN must be assigned one of the following operational statuses:
+
+* Active
+* Reserved
+* Deprecated
+
+Each VLAN may also be assigned a functional role. Prefixes and VLANs share the same set of customizable roles.
+
+## VLAN Groups
+
+VLAN groups can be used to organize VLANs within NetBox. Groups can also be used to enforce uniqueness: Each VLAN within a group must have a unique ID and name. VLANs which are not assigned to a group may have overlapping names and IDs (including VLANs which belong to a common site). For example, you can create two VLANs with ID 123, but they cannot both be assigned to the same group.

docs/data-model/dcim.md

@@ -1,114 +0,0 @@
-Data center infrastructure management (DCIM) entails all physical assets: sites, racks, devices, cabling, etc.
-
-# Sites
-
-How you choose to use sites will depend on the nature of your organization, but typically a site will equate to a building or campus. For example, a chain of banks might create a site to represent each of its branches, a site for its corporate headquarters, and two additional sites for its presence in two colocation facilities.
-
-Sites can be assigned an optional facility ID to identify the actual facility housing colocated equipment, and an Autonomous System (AS) number.
-
-### Regions
-
-Sites can be arranged geographically using regions. A region might represent a continent, country, city, campus, or other area depending on your use case. Regions can be nested recursively to construct a hierarchy. For example, you might define several country regions, and within each of those several state or city regions to which sites are assigned.
-
----
-
-# Racks
-
-The rack model represents a physical two- or four-post equipment rack in which equipment is mounted. Each rack is assigned to a site. Rack height is measured in *rack units* (U); racks are commonly between 42U and 48U, but NetBox allows you to define racks of arbitrary height. Each rack has two faces (front and rear) on which devices can be mounted.
-
-Each rack is assigned a name and (optionally) a separate facility ID. This is helpful when leasing space in a data center your organization does not own: The facility will often assign a seemingly arbitrary ID to a rack (for example, "M204.313") whereas internally you refer to is simply as "R113." The facility ID can alternatively be used to store a rack's serial number.
-
-The available rack types include 2- and 4-post frames, 4-post cabinet, and wall-mounted frame and cabinet. Rail-to-rail width may be 19 or 23 inches.
-
-### Rack Groups
-
-Racks can be arranged into groups. As with sites, how you choose to designate rack groups will depend on the nature of your organization. For example, if each site represents a campus, each group might represent a building within a campus. If each site represents a building, each rack group might equate to a floor or room.
-
-Each group is assigned to a parent site for easy navigation. Hierarchical recursion of rack groups is not supported.
-
-### Rack Roles
-
-Each rack can optionally be assigned a functional role. For example, you might designate a rack for compute or storage resources, or to house colocated customer devices. Rack roles are fully customizable.
-
-### Rack Space Reservations
-
-Users can reserve units within a rack for future use. Multiple non-contiguous rack units can be associated with a single reservation (but reservations cannot span multiple racks).
-
----
-
-# Device Types
-
-A device type represents a particular hardware model that exists in the real world. Device types describe the physical attributes of a device (rack height and depth), its class (e.g. console server, PDU, etc.), and its individual components (console, power, and data).
-
-Device types are instantiated as devices installed within racks. For example, you might define a device type to represent a Juniper EX4300-48T network switch with 48 Ethernet interfaces. You can then create multiple devices of this type named "switch1," "switch2," and so on. Each device will inherit the components (such as interfaces) of its device type.
-
-### Manufacturers
-
-Each device type belongs to one manufacturer; e.g. Cisco, Opengear, or APC. The model number of a device type must be unique to its manufacturer.
-
-### Component Templates
-
-Each device type is assigned a number of component templates which define the physical interfaces a device has. These are:
-
-* Console ports
-* Console server ports
-* Power ports
-* Power outlets
-* Interfaces
-* Device bays
-
-Whenever a new device is created, it is automatically assigned components per the templates assigned to its device type. For example, a Juniper EX4300-48T device type might have the following component templates:
-
-* One template for a console port ("Console")
-* Two templates for power ports ("PSU0" and "PSU1")
-* 48 templates for 1GE interfaces ("ge-0/0/0" through "ge-0/0/47")
-* Four templates for 10GE interfaces ("xe-0/2/0" through "xe-0/2/3")
-
-Once component templates have been created, every new device that you create as an instance of this type will automatically be assigned each of the components listed above.
-
-!!! note
-    Assignment of components from templates occurs only at the time of device creation. If you modify the templates of a device type, it will not affect devices which have already been created. However, you always have the option of adding, modifying, or deleting components of existing devices individually.
-
----
-
-# Devices
-
-Every piece of hardware which is installed within a rack exists in NetBox as a device. Devices are measured in rack units (U) and depth. 0U devices which can be installed in a rack but don't consume vertical rack space (such as a vertically-mounted power distribution unit) can also be defined.
-
-When assigning a multi-U device to a rack, it is considered to be mounted in the lowest-numbered rack unit which it occupies. For example, a 3U device which occupies U8 through U10 shows as being mounted in U8. This logic applies to racks with both ascending and descending unit numbering.
-
-A device is said to be "full depth" if its installation on one rack face prevents the installation of any other device on the opposite face within the same rack unit(s). This could be either because the device is physically too deep to allow a device behind it, or because the installation of an opposing device would impede air flow.
-
-### Roles
-
-NetBox allows for the definition of arbitrary device roles by which devices can be organized. For example, you might create roles for core switches, distribution switches, and access switches. In the interest of simplicity, a device can belong to only one role.
-
-### Platforms
-
-A device's platform is used to denote the type of software running on it. This can be helpful when it is necessary to distinguish between, for instance, different feature sets. Note that two devices of same type may be assigned different platforms: for example, one Juniper MX240 running Junos 14 and another running Junos 15.
-
-The assignment of platforms to devices is an optional feature, and may be disregarded if not desired.
-
-### Inventory Items
-
-Inventory items represent hardware components installed within a device, such as a power supply or CPU. Currently, these are used merely for inventory tracking, although future development might see their functionality expand. Each item can optionally be assigned a manufacturer.
-
-!!! note
-    Prior to version 2.0, inventory items were called modules.
-
-### Components
-
-There are six types of device components which comprise all of the interconnection logic with NetBox:
-
-* Console ports
-* Console server ports
-* Power ports
-* Power outlets
-* Interfaces
-* Device bays
-
-Console ports connect only to console server ports, and power ports connect only to power outlets. Interfaces connect to one another in a symmetric manner: If interface A connects to interface B, interface B therefore connects to interface A. (The relationship between two interfaces is actually represented in the database by an InterfaceConnection object, but this is transparent to the user.) Each type of connection can be classified as either *planned* or *connected*. This allows for easily denoting connections which have not yet been installed.
-
-Each interface is a assigned a form factor denoting its physical properties. Two special form factors exist: the "virtual" form factor can be used to designate logical interfaces (such as SVIs), and the "LAG" form factor can be used to desinate link aggregation groups to which physical interfaces can be assigned. Each interface can also be designated as management-only (for out-of-band management) and assigned a short description.
-
-Device bays represent the ability of a device to house child devices. For example, you might install four blade servers into a 2U chassis. The chassis would appear in the rack elevation as a 2U device with four device bays. Each server within it would be defined as a 0U device installed in one of the device bays. Child devices do not appear on rack elevations, but they are included in the "Non-Racked Devices" list within the rack view.

docs/data-model/extras.md

@@ -1,132 +0,0 @@
-This section entails features of NetBox which are not crucial to its primary functions, but provide additional value.
-
-# Custom Fields
-
-Each object in NetBox is represented in the database as a discrete table, and each attribute of an object exists as a column within its table. For example, sites are stored in the `dcim_site` table, which has columns named `name`, `facility`, `physical_address`, and so on. As new attributes are added to objects throughout the development of NetBox, tables are expanded to include new rows.
-
-However, some users might want to associate with objects attributes that are somewhat esoteric in nature, and that would not make sense to include in the core NetBox database schema. For instance, suppose your organization needs to associate each device with a ticket number pointing to the support ticket that was opened to have it installed. This is certainly a legitimate use for NetBox, but it's perhaps not a common enough need to warrant expanding the internal data schema. Instead, you can create a custom field to hold this data.
-
-Custom fields must be created through the admin UI under Extras > Custom Fields. To create a new custom field, select the object(s) to which you want it to apply, and the type of field it will be. NetBox supports six field types:
-
-* Free-form text (up to 255 characters)
-* Integer
-* Boolean (true/false)
-* Date
-* URL
-* Selection
-
-Assign the field a name. This should be a simple database-friendly string, e.g. `tps_report`. You may optionally assign the field a human-friendly label (e.g. "TPS report") as well; the label will be displayed on forms. If a description is provided, it will appear beneath the field in a form.
-
-Marking the field as required will require the user to provide a value for the field when creating a new object or when saving an existing object. A default value for the field may also be provided. Use "true" or "false" for boolean fields. (The default value has no effect for selection fields.)
-
-When creating a selection field, you should create at least two choices. These choices will be arranged first by weight, with lower weights appearing higher in the list, and then alphabetically.
-
-## Using Custom Fields
-
-When a single object is edited, the form will include any custom fields which have been defined for the object type. These fields are included in the "Custom Fields" panel. On the backend, each custom field value is saved separately from the core object as an independent database call, so it's best to avoid adding too many custom fields per object.
-
-When editing multiple objects, custom field values are saved in bulk. There is no significant difference in overhead when saving a custom field value for 100 objects versus one object. However, the bulk operation must be performed separately for each custom field.
-
-# Export Templates
-
-NetBox allows users to define custom templates that can be used when exporting objects. To create an export template, navigate to Extras > Export Templates under the admin interface.
-
-Each export template is associated with a certain type of object. For instance, if you create an export template for VLANs, your custom template will appear under the "Export" button on the VLANs list.
-
-Export templates are written in [Django's template language](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/1.9/ref/templates/language/), which is very similar to Jinja2. The list of objects returned from the database is stored in the `queryset` variable, which you'll typically want to iterate through using a `for` loop. Object properties can be access by name. For example:
-
-```
-{% for rack in queryset %}
-Rack: {{ rack.name }}
-Site: {{ rack.site.name }}
-Height: {{ rack.u_height }}U
-{% endfor %}
-```
-
-To access custom fields of an object within a template, use the `cf` attribute. For example, `{{ obj.cf.color }}` will return the value (if any) for a custom field named `color` on `obj`.
-
-A MIME type and file extension can optionally be defined for each export template. The default MIME type is `text/plain`.
-
-## Example
-
-Here's an example device export template that will generate a simple Nagios configuration from a list of devices.
-
-```
-{% for device in queryset %}{% if device.status and device.primary_ip %}define host{
-        use                     generic-switch
-        host_name               {{ device.name }}
-        address                 {{ device.primary_ip.address.ip }}
-}
-{% endif %}{% endfor %}
-```
-
-The generated output will look something like this:
-
-```
-define host{
-        use                     generic-switch
-        host_name               switch1
-        address                 192.0.2.1
-}
-define host{
-        use                     generic-switch
-        host_name               switch2
-        address                 192.0.2.2
-}
-define host{
-        use                     generic-switch
-        host_name               switch3
-        address                 192.0.2.3
-}
-```
-
-# Graphs
-
-NetBox does not have the ability to generate graphs natively, but this feature allows you to embed contextual graphs from an external resources (such as a monitoring system) inside the site, provider, and interface views. Each embedded graph must be defined with the following parameters:
-
-* **Type:** Site, provider, or interface. This determines in which view the graph will be displayed.
-* **Weight:** Determines the order in which graphs are displayed (lower weights are displayed first). Graphs with equal weights will be ordered alphabetically by name.
-* **Name:** The title to display above the graph.
-* **Source URL:** The source of the image to be embedded. The associated object will be available as a template variable named `obj`.
-* **Link URL (optional):** A URL to which the graph will be linked. The associated object will be available as a template variable named `obj`.
-
-## Examples
-
-You only need to define one graph object for each graph you want to include when viewing an object. For example, if you want to include a graph of traffic through an interface over the past five minutes, your graph source might looks like this:
-
-```
-https://my.nms.local/graphs/?node={{ obj.device.name }}&interface={{ obj.name }}&duration=5m
-```
-
-You can define several graphs to provide multiple contexts when viewing an object. For example:
-
-```
-https://my.nms.local/graphs/?type=throughput&node={{ obj.device.name }}&interface={{ obj.name }}&duration=60m
-https://my.nms.local/graphs/?type=throughput&node={{ obj.device.name }}&interface={{ obj.name }}&duration=24h
-https://my.nms.local/graphs/?type=errors&node={{ obj.device.name }}&interface={{ obj.name }}&duration=60m
-```
-
-# Topology Maps
-
-NetBox can generate simple topology maps from the physical network connections recorded in its database. First, you'll need to create a topology map definition under the admin UI at Extras > Topology Maps.
-
-Each topology map is associated with a site. A site can have multiple topology maps, which might each illustrate a different aspect of its infrastructure (for example, production versus backend infrastructure).
-
-To define the scope of a topology map, decide which devices you want to include. The map will only include interface connections with both points terminated on an included device. Specify the devices to include in the **device patterns** field by entering a list of [regular expressions](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression) matching device names. For example, if you wanted to include "mgmt-switch1" through "mgmt-switch99", you might use the regex `mgmt-switch\d+`.
-
-Each line of the **device patterns** field represents a hierarchical layer within the topology map. For example, you might map a traditional network with core, distribution, and access tiers like this:
-
-```
-core-switch-[abcd]
-dist-switch\d
-access-switch\d+,oob-switch\d+
-```
-
-Note that you can combine multiple regexes onto one line using semicolons. The order in which regexes are listed on a line is significant: devices matching the first regex will be rendered first, and subsequent groups will be rendered to the right of those.
-
-# Image Attachments
-
-Certain objects within NetBox (namely sites, racks, and devices) can have photos or other images attached to them. (Note that _only_ image files are supported.) Each attachment may optionally be assigned a name; if omitted, the attachment will be represented by its file name.
-
-!!! note
-    If you experience a server error while attempting to upload an image attachment, verify that the system user NetBox runs as has write permission to the media root directory (`netbox/media/`).

docs/data-model/ipam.md

@@ -1,99 +0,0 @@
-IP address management (IPAM) entails the allocation of IP networks, addresses, and related numeric resources.
-
-# VRFs
-
-A VRF object in NetBox represents a virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) domain within a network. Each VRF is essentially a separate routing table: the same IP prefix or address can exist in multiple VRFs. VRFs are commonly used to isolate customers or organizations from one another within a network.
-
-Each VRF is assigned a name and a unique route distinguisher (RD). VRFs are an optional feature of NetBox: Any IP prefix or address not assigned to a VRF is said to belong to the "global" table.
-
-!!! note
-    By default, NetBox allows for overlapping IP space both in the global table and within each VRF. Unique space enforcement can be toggled per-VRF as well as in the global table using the `ENFORCE_GLOBAL_UNIQUE` configuration setting.
-
----
-
-# Aggregates
-
-IP address space is organized as a hierarchy, with more-specific (smaller) prefixes arranged as child nodes under less-specific (larger) prefixes. For example:
-
-* 10.0.0.0/8
-    * 10.1.0.0/16
-        * 10.1.2.0/24
-
-The root of the IPv4 hierarchy is 0.0.0.0/0, which encompasses all possible IPv4 addresses (and similarly, ::/0 for IPv6). However, even the largest organizations use only a small fraction of the global address space. Therefore, it makes sense to track in NetBox only the address space which is of interest to your organization.
-
-Aggregates serve as arbitrary top-level nodes in the IP space hierarchy. They allow you to easily construct your IP scheme without any clutter of unused address space. For instance, most organizations utilize some portion of the private IPv4 space set aside in RFC 1918. So, you might define three aggregates for this space:
-
-* 10.0.0.0/8
-* 172.16.0.0/12
-* 192.168.0.0/16
-
-Additionally, you might define an aggregate for each large swath of public IPv4 space your organization uses. You'd also create aggregates for both globally routable and unique local IPv6 space. (Most organizations will not have a need to track IPv6 link local space.)
-
-Prefixes you create in NetBox (discussed below) will be automatically organized under their respective aggregates. Any space within an aggregate which is not covered by an existing prefix will be annotated as available for allocation. Total utilization for each aggregate is displayed in the aggregates list.
-
-Aggregates cannot overlap with one another; they can only exist in parallel. For instance, you cannot define both 10.0.0.0/8 and 10.16.0.0/16 as aggregates, because they overlap. 10.16.0.0/16 in this example would be created as a prefix and automatically grouped under 10.0.0.0/8.
-
-### RIRs
-
-Regional Internet Registries (RIRs) are responsible for the allocation of global address space. The five RIRs are ARIN, RIPE, APNIC, LACNIC, and AFRINIC. However, some address space has been set aside for private or internal use only, such as defined in RFCs 1918 and 6598. NetBox considers these RFCs as a sort of RIR as well; that is, an authority which "owns" certain address space.
-
-Each aggregate must be assigned to one RIR. You are free to define whichever RIRs you choose (or create your own). Each RIR can be annotated as representing only private space.
-
----
-
-# Prefixes
-
-A prefix is an IPv4 or IPv6 network and mask expressed in CIDR notation (e.g. 192.0.2.0/24). A prefix entails only the "network portion" of an IP address; all bits in the address not covered by the mask must be zero.
-
-Each prefix may be assigned to one VRF; prefixes not assigned to a VRF are assigned to the "global" table. Prefixes are also organized under their respective aggregates, irrespective of VRF assignment.
-
-A prefix may optionally be assigned to one VLAN; a VLAN may have multiple prefixes assigned to it. Each prefix may also be assigned a short description.
-
-### Statuses
-
-Each prefix is assigned an operational status. This is one of the following:
-
-* Container - A summary of child prefixes
-* Active - Provisioned and in use
-* Reserved - Designated for future use
-* Deprecated - No longer in use
-
-### Roles
-
-Whereas a status describes a prefix's operational state, a role describes its function. For example, roles might include:
-
-* Access segment
-* Infrastructure
-* NAT
-* Lab
-* Out-of-band
-
-Role assignment is optional and roles are fully customizable.
-
----
-
-# IP Addresses
-
-An IP address comprises a single address (either IPv4 or IPv6) and its subnet mask. Its mask should match exactly how the IP address is configured on an interface in the real world.
-
-Like prefixes, an IP address can optionally be assigned to a VRF (or it will appear in the "global" table). IP addresses are automatically organized under parent prefixes within their respective VRFs. Each IP address can also be assigned a short description.
-
-An IP address can be assigned to a device's interface; an interface may have multiple IP addresses assigned to it. Further, each device may have one of its interface IPs designated as its primary IP address (for both IPv4 and IPv6).
-
-One IP address can be designated as the network address translation (NAT) IP address for exactly one other IP address. This is useful primarily to denote the public address for a private internal IP. Tracking one-to-many NAT (or PAT) assignments is not supported.
-
----
-
-# VLANs
-
-A VLAN represents an isolated layer two domain, identified by a name and a numeric ID (1-4094) as defined in [IEEE 802.1Q](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IEEE_802.1Q). Each VLAN may be assigned to a site and/or VLAN group. Like prefixes, each VLAN is assigned an operational status and (optionally) a functional role, and may include a short description.
-
-### VLAN Groups
-
-VLAN groups can be employed for administrative organization within NetBox. Each VLAN within a group must have a unique ID and name. VLANs which are not assigned to a group may have overlapping names and IDs, including within a site.
-
----
-
-# Services
-
-A service represents a TCP or UDP service available on a device. Each service must be defined with a name, protocol, and port number; for example, "SSH (TCP/22)." A service may optionally be bound to one or more specific IP addresses belonging to a device. (If no IP addresses are bound, the service is assumed to be reachable via any assigned IP address.)

docs/data-model/tenancy.md

@@ -1,20 +0,0 @@
-NetBox supports the assignment of resources to tenant organizations. Typically, these are used to represent individual customers of or internal departments within the organization using NetBox.
-
-# Tenants
-
-A tenant represents a discrete organization. The following objects can be assigned to tenants:
-
-* Sites
-* Racks
-* Devices
-* VRFs
-* Prefixes
-* IP addresses
-* VLANs
-* Circuits
-
-If a prefix or IP address is not assigned to a tenant, it will appear to inherit the tenant to which its parent VRF is assigned, if any.
-
-### Tenant Groups
-
-Tenants can be grouped by type. For instance, you might create one group called "Customers" and one called "Acquisitions." The assignment of tenants to groups is optional.

docs/development/extending-models.md

@@ -0,0 +1,82 @@
+# Extending Models
+
+Below is a list of items to consider when adding a new field to a model:
+
+### 1. Generate and run database migration
+
+Django migrations are used to express changes to the database schema. In most cases, Django can generate these automatically, however very complex changes may require manual intervention. Always remember to specify a short but descriptive name when generating a new migration.
+
+```
+./manage.py makemigrations <app> -n <name>
+./manage.py migrate
+```
+
+Where possible, try to merge related changes into a single migration. For example, if three new fields are being added to different models within an app, these can be expressed in the same migration. You can merge a new migration with an existing one by combining their `operations` lists.
+
+!!! note
+    Migrations can only be merged within a release. Once a new release has been published, its migrations cannot be altered.
+
+### 2. Add validation logic to `clean()`
+
+If the new field introduces additional validation requirements (beyond what's included with the field itself), implement them in the model's `clean()` method. Remember to call the model's original method using `super()` before or agter your custom validation as appropriate:
+
+```
+class Foo(models.Model):
+
+    def clean(self):
+
+        super(DeviceCSVForm, self).clean()
+
+        # Custom validation goes here
+        if self.bar is None:
+            raise ValidationError()
+```
+
+### 3. Add CSV helpers
+
+Add the name of the new field to `csv_headers` and included a CSV-friendly representation of its data in the model's `to_csv()` method. These will be used when exporting objects in CSV format.
+
+### 4. Update relevant querysets
+
+If you're adding a relational field (e.g. `ForeignKey`) and intend to include the data when retreiving a list of objects, be sure to include the field using `prefetch_related()` as appropriate. This will optimize the view and avoid excessive database lookups.
+
+### 5. Update API serializer
+
+Extend the model's API serializer in `<app>.api.serializers` to include the new field. In most cases, it will not be necessary to also extend the nested serializer, which produces a minimal represenation of the model.
+
+### 6. Add choices to API view
+
+If the new field has static choices, add it to the `FieldChoicesViewSet` for the app.
+
+### 7. Add field to forms
+
+Extend any forms to include the new field as appropriate. Common forms include:
+
+* **Credit/edit** - Manipulating a single object
+* **Bulk edit** - Performing a change on mnay objects at once
+* **CSV import** - The form used when bulk importing objects in CSV format
+* **Filter** - Displays the options available for filtering a list of objects (both UI and API)
+
+### 8. Extend object filter set
+
+If the new field should be filterable, add it to the `FilterSet` for the model. If the field should be searchable, remember to reference it in the FilterSet's `search()` method.
+
+### 9. Add column to object table
+
+If the new field will be included in the object list view, add a column to the model's table. For simple fields, adding the field name to `Meta.fields` will be sufficient. More complex fields may require explicitly declaring a new column.
+
+### 10. Update the UI templates
+
+Edit the object's view template to display the new field. There may also be a custom add/edit form template that needs to be updated.
+
+### 11. Create/extend test cases
+
+Create or extend the relevant test cases to verify that the new field and any accompanying validation logic perform as expected. This is especially important for relational fields. NetBox incorporates various test suites, including:
+
+* API serializer/view tests
+* Filter tests
+* Form tests
+* Model tests
+* View tests
+
+Be diligent to ensure all of the relevant test suites are adapted or extended as necessary to test any new functionality.

docs/development/index.md

@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+# NetBox Development
+
+NetBox is maintained as a [GitHub project](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox) under the Apache 2 license. Users are encouraged to submit GitHub issues for feature requests and bug reports, however we are very selective about pull requests. Please see the `CONTRIBUTING` guide for more direction on contributing to NetBox.
+
+## Communication
+
+Communication among developers should always occur via public channels:
+
+* [GitHub issues](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues) - All feature requests, bug reports, and other substantial changes to the code base **must** be documented in an issue.
+* [The mailing list](https://groups.google.com/forum/#!forum/netbox-discuss) - The preferred forum for general discussion and support issues. Ideal for shaping a feature request prior to submitting an issue.
+* [#netbox on NetworkToCode](http://slack.networktocode.com/) - Good for quick chats. Avoid any discussion that might need to be referenced later on, as the chat history is not retained long.
+
+## Governance
+
+NetBox follows the [benevolent dictator](http://oss-watch.ac.uk/resources/benevolentdictatorgovernancemodel) model of governance, with [Jeremy Stretch](https://github.com/jeremystretch) ultimately responsible for all changes to the code base. While community contributions are welcomed and encouraged, the lead maintainer's primary role is to ensure the project's long-term maintainability and continued focus on its primary functions (in other words, avoid scope creep).
+
+## Project Structure
+
+All development of the current NetBox release occurs in the `develop` branch; releases are packaged from the `master` branch. The `master` branch should _always_ represent the current stable release in its entirety, such that installing NetBox by either downloading a packaged release or cloning the `master` branch provides the same code base.
+
+NetBox components are arranged into functional subsections called _apps_ (a carryover from Django verancular). Each app holds the models, views, and templates relevant to a particular function:
+
+* `circuits`: Communications circuits and providers (not to be confused with power circuits)
+* `dcim`: Datacenter infrastructure management (sites, racks, and devices)
+* `extras`: Additional features not considered part of the core data model
+* `ipam`: IP address management (VRFs, prefixes, IP addresses, and VLANs)
+* `secrets`: Encrypted storage of sensitive data (e.g. login credentials)
+* `tenancy`: Tenants (such as customers) to which NetBox objects may be assigned
+* `utilities`: Resources which are not user-facing (extendable classes, etc.)
+* `virtualization`: Virtual machines and clusters

docs/development/release-checklist.md

@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+# Minor Version Bumps
+
+## Update Requirements
+
+Required Python packages are maintained in two files. `base_requirements.txt` contains a list of all the packages required by NetBox. Some of them may be pinned to a specific version of the package due to a known issue. For example:
+
+```
+# https://github.com/encode/django-rest-framework/issues/6053
+djangorestframework==3.8.1
+```
+
+The other file is `requirements.txt`, which lists each of the required packages pinned to its current stable version. When NetBox is installed, the Python environment is configured to match this file. This helps ensure that a new release of a dependency doesn't break NetBox.
+
+Every minor version release should refresh `requirements.txt` so that it lists the most recent stable release of each package. To do this:
+
+1. Create a new virtual environment.
+2. Install the latest version of all required packages via pip:
+
+```
+pip install -U -r base_requirements.txt
+```
+
+3. Run all tests and check that the UI and API function as expected.
+4. Update the package versions in `requirements.txt` as appropriate.
+
+## Update Static Libraries
+
+Update the following static libraries to their most recent stable release:
+
+* Bootstrap 3
+* Font Awesome 4
+* Select2
+* jQuery
+* jQuery UI
+
+## Squash Schema Migrations
+
+Database schema migrations should be squashed for each new minor release. See the [squashing guide](squashing-migrations.md) for the detailed process.
+
+## Create a new Release Notes Page
+
+Create a file at `/docs/release-notes/X.Y.md` to establish the release notes for the new release. Add the file to the table of contents within `mkdocs.yml`.
+
+## Manually Perform a New Install
+
+Create a new installation of NetBox by following [the current documentation](http://netbox.readthedocs.io/en/latest/). This should be a manual process, so that issues with the documentation can be identified and corrected.
+
+## Close the Release Milestone
+
+Close the release milestone on GitHub. Ensure that there are no remaining open issues associated with it.
+
+---
+
+# All Releases
+
+## Verify CI Build Status
+
+Ensure that continuous integration testing on the `develop` branch is completing successfully.
+
+## Update Version and Changelog
+
+Update the `VERSION` constant in `settings.py` to the new release version and annotate the current data in the release notes for the new version.
+
+## Submit a Pull Request
+
+Submit a pull request title **"Release vX.Y.X"** to merge the `develop` branch into `master`. Include a brief change log listing the features, improvements, and/or bugs addressed in the release.
+
+Once CI has completed on the PR, merge it.
+
+## Create a New Release
+
+Draft a [new release](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/releases/new) with the following parameters.
+
+* **Tag:** Current version (e.g. `v2.3.4`)
+* **Target:** `master`
+* **Title:** Version and date (e.g. `v2.3.4 - 2018-08-02`)
+
+Copy the description from the pull request into the release notes.
+
+## Update the Development Version
+
+On the `develop` branch, update `VERSION` in `settings.py` to point to the next release. For example, if you just released v2.3.4, set:
+
+```
+VERSION = 'v2.3.5-dev'
+```
+
+## Announce the Release
+
+Announce the release on the [mailing list](https://groups.google.com/forum/#!forum/netbox-discuss). Include a link to the release and the (HTML-formatted) release notes.

docs/development/squashing-migrations.md

@@ -0,0 +1,168 @@
+# Squashing Database Schema Migrations
+
+## What are Squashed Migrations?
+
+The Django framework on which NetBox is built utilizes [migration files](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/topics/migrations/) to keep track of changes to the PostgreSQL database schema. Each time a model is altered, the resulting schema change is captured in a migration file, which can then be applied to effect the new schema.
+
+As changes are made over time, more and more migration files are created. Although not necessarily problematic, it can be beneficial to merge and compress these files occasionally to reduce the total number of migrations that need to be applied upon installation of NetBox. This merging process is called _squashing_ in Django vernacular, and results in two parallel migration paths: individual and squashed.
+
+Below is an example showing both individual and squashed migration files within an app:
+
+| Individual | Squashed |
+|------------|----------|
+| 0001_initial       | 0001_initial_squashed_0004_add_field |
+| 0002_alter_field   |                   .                  |
+| 0003_remove_field  |                   .                  |
+| 0004_add_field     |                   .                  |
+| 0005_another_field | 0005_another_field                   |
+
+In the example above, a new installation can leverage the squashed migrations to apply only two migrations:
+
+* `0001_initial_squashed_0004_add_field`
+* `0005_another_field`
+
+This is because the squash file contains all of the operations performed by files `0001` through `0004`.
+
+However, an existing installation that has already applied some of the individual migrations contained within the squash file must continue applying individual migrations. For instance, an installation which currently has up to `0002_alter_field` applied must apply the following migrations to become current:
+
+* `0003_remove_field`
+* `0004_add_field`
+* `0005_another_field`
+
+Squashed migrations are opportunistic: They are used only if applicable to the current environment. Django will fall back to using individual migrations if the squashed migrations do not agree with the current database schema at any point.
+
+## Squashing Migrations
+
+During every minor (i.e. 2.x) release, migrations should be squashed to help simplify the migration process for new installations. The process below describes how to squash migrations efficiently and with minimal room for error.
+
+### 1. Create a New Branch
+
+Create a new branch off of the `develop-2.x` branch. (Migrations should be squashed _only_ in preparation for a new minor release.)
+
+```
+git checkout -B squash-migrations
+```
+
+### 2. Delete Existing Squash Files
+
+Delete the most recent squash file within each NetBox app. This allows us to extend squash files where the opportunity exists. For example, we might be able to replace `0005_to_0008` with `0005_to_0011`.
+
+### 3. Generate the Current Migration Plan
+
+Use Django's `showmigrations` utility to display the order in which all migrations would be applied for a new installation.
+
+```
+manage.py showmigrations --plan
+```
+
+From the resulting output, delete all lines which reference an external migration. Any migrations imposed by Django itself on an external package are not relevant.
+
+### 4. Create Squash Files
+
+Begin iterating through the migration plan, looking for successive sets of migrations within an app. These are candidates for squashing. For example:
+
+```
+[X]  extras.0014_configcontexts
+[X]  extras.0015_remove_useraction
+[X]  extras.0016_exporttemplate_add_cable
+[X]  extras.0017_exporttemplate_mime_type_length
+[ ]  extras.0018_exporttemplate_add_jinja2
+[ ]  extras.0019_tag_taggeditem
+[X]  dcim.0062_interface_mtu
+[X]  dcim.0063_device_local_context_data
+[X]  dcim.0064_remove_platform_rpc_client
+[ ]  dcim.0065_front_rear_ports
+[X]  circuits.0001_initial_squashed_0010_circuit_status
+[ ]  dcim.0066_cables
+...
+```
+
+Migrations `0014` through `0019` in `extras` can be squashed, as can migrations `0062` through `0065` in `dcim`. Migration `0066` cannot be included in the same squash file, because the `circuits` migration must be applied before it. (Note that whether or not each migration is currently applied to the database does not matter.)
+
+Squash files are created using Django's `squashmigrations` utility:
+
+```
+manage.py squashmigrations <app> <start> <end>
+```
+
+For example, our first step in the example would be to run `manage.py squashmigrations extras 0014 0019`.
+
+!!! note
+    Specifying a migration file's numeric index is enough to uniquely identify it within an app. There is no need to specify the full filename.
+
+This will create a new squash file within the app's `migrations` directory, named as a concatenation of its beginning and ending migration. Some manual editing is necessary for each new squash file for housekeeping purposes:
+
+* Remove the "automatically generated" comment at top (to indicate that a human has reviewed the file).
+* Reorder `import` statements as necessary per PEP8.
+* It may be necessary to copy over custom functions from the original migration files (this will be indicated by a comment near the top of the squash file). It is safe to remove any functions that exist solely to accomodate reverse migrations (which we no longer support).
+
+Repeat this process for each candidate set of migrations until you reach the end of the migration plan.
+
+### 5. Check for Missing Migrations
+
+If everything went well, at this point we should have a completed squashed path. Perform a dry run to check for any missing migrations:
+
+```
+manage.py migrate --dry-run
+```
+
+### 5. Run Migrations
+
+Next, we'll apply the entire migration path to an empty database. Begin by dropping and creating your development database.
+
+!!! warning
+    Obviously, first back up any data you don't want to lose.
+
+```
+sudo -u postgres psql -c 'drop database netbox'
+sudo -u postgres psql -c 'create database netbox'
+```
+
+Apply the migrations with the `migrate` management command. It is not necessary to specify a particular migration path; Django will detect and use the squashed migrations automatically. You can verify the exact migrations being applied by enabling verboes output with `-v 2`.
+
+```
+manage.py migrate -v 2
+```
+
+### 6. Commit the New Migrations
+
+If everything is successful to this point, commit your changes to the `squash-migrations` branch.
+
+### 7. Validate Resulting Schema
+
+To ensure our new squashed migrations do not result in a deviation from the original schema, we'll compare the two. With the new migration file safely commit, check out the `develop-2.x` branch, which still contains only the individual migrations.
+
+```
+git checkout develop-2.x
+```
+
+Temporarily install the [django-extensions](https://django-extensions.readthedocs.io/) package, which provides the `sqldiff utility`:
+
+```
+pip install django-extensions
+```
+
+Also add `django_extensions` to `INSTALLED_APPS` in `netbox/netbox/settings.py`.
+
+At this point, our database schema has been defined by using the squashed migrations. We can run `sqldiff` to see if it differs any from what the current (non-squashed) migrations would generate. `sqldiff` accepts a list of apps against which to run:
+
+```
+manage.py sqldiff circuits dcim extras ipam secrets tenancy users virtualization
+```
+
+It is safe to ignore errors indicating an "unknown database type" for the following fields:
+
+* `dcim_interface.mac_address`
+* `ipam_aggregate.prefix`
+* `ipam_prefix.prefix`
+
+It is also safe to ignore the message "Table missing: extras_script".
+
+Resolve any differences by correcting migration files in the `squash-migrations` branch.
+
+!!! warning
+    Don't forget to remove `django_extension` from `INSTALLED_APPS` before committing your changes.
+
+### 8. Merge the Squashed Migrations
+
+Once all squashed migrations have been validated and all tests run successfully, merge the `squash-migrations` branch into `develop-2.x`. This completes the squashing process.

docs/development/style-guide.md

@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+# Style Guide
+
+NetBox generally follows the [Django style guide](https://docs.djangoproject.com/en/stable/internals/contributing/writing-code/coding-style/), which is itself based on [PEP 8](https://www.python.org/dev/peps/pep-0008/). [Pycodestyle](https://github.com/pycqa/pycodestyle) is used to validate code formatting, ignoring certain violations. See `scripts/cibuild.sh`.
+
+## PEP 8 Exceptions
+
+* Wildcard imports (for example, `from .constants import *`) are acceptable under any of the following conditions:
+    * The library being import contains only constant declarations (`constants.py`)
+    * The library being imported explicitly defines `__all__` (e.g. `<app>.api.nested_serializers`)
+
+* Maximum line length is 120 characters (E501)
+    * This does not apply to HTML templates or to automatically generated code (e.g. database migrations).
+
+* Line breaks are permitted following binary operators (W504)
+
+## Enforcing Code Style
+
+The `pycodestyle` utility (previously `pep8`) is used by the CI process to enforce code style. It is strongly recommended to include as part of your commit process. A git commit hook is provided in the source at `scripts/git-hooks/pre-commit`. Linking to this script from `.git/hooks/` will invoke `pycodestyle` prior to every commit attempt and abort if the validation fails.
+
+```
+$ cd .git/hooks/
+$ ln -s ../../scripts/git-hooks/pre-commit
+```
+
+To invoke `pycodestyle` manually, run:
+
+```
+pycodestyle --ignore=W504,E501 netbox/
+```
+
+## Introducing New Dependencies
+
+The introduction of a new dependency is best avoided unless it is absolutely necessary. For small features, it's generally preferable to replicate functionality within the NetBox code base rather than to introduce reliance on an external project. This reduces both the burden of tracking new releases and our exposure to outside bugs and attacks.
+
+If there's a strong case for introducing a new dependency, it must meet the following criteria:
+
+* Its complete source code must be published and freely accessible without registration.
+* Its license must be conducive to inclusion in an open source project.
+* It must be actively maintained, with no longer than one year between releases.
+* It must be available via the [Python Package Index](https://pypi.org/) (PyPI).
+
+When adding a new dependency, a short description of the package and the URL of its code repository must be added to `base_requirements.txt`. Additionally, a line specifying the package name pinned to the current stable release must be added to `requirements.txt`. This ensures that NetBox will install only the known-good release and simplify support efforts.
+
+## General Guidance
+
+* When in doubt, remain consistent: It is better to be consistently incorrect than inconsistently correct. If you notice in the course of unrelated work a pattern that should be corrected, continue to follow the pattern for now and open a bug so that the entire code base can be evaluated at a later point.
+
+* Prioritize readability over concision. Python is a very flexible language that typically gives us several options for expressing a given piece of logic, but some may be more friendly to the reader than others. (List comprehensions are particularly vulnerable to over-optimization.) Always remain considerate of the future reader who may need to interpret your code without the benefit of the context within which you are writing it.
+
+* No easter eggs. While they can be fun, NetBox must be considered as a business-critical tool. The potential, however minor, for introducing a bug caused by unnecessary logic is best avoided entirely.
+
+* Constants (variables which generally do not change) should be declared in `constants.py` within each app. Wildcard imports from the file are acceptable.
+
+* Every model should have a docstring. Every custom method should include an explanation of its function.
+
+* Nested API serializers generate minimal representations of an object. These are stored separately from the primary serializers to avoid circular dependencies. Always import nested serializers from other apps directly. For example, from within the DCIM app you would write `from ipam.api.nested_serializers import NestedIPAddressSerializer`.
+
+## Branding
+
+* When referring to NetBox in writing, use the proper form "NetBox," with the letters N and B capitalized. The lowercase form "netbox" should be used in code, filenames, etc. But never "Netbox" or any other deviation.
+
+* There is an SVG form of the NetBox logo at [docs/netbox_logo.svg](../netbox_logo.svg). It is preferred to use this logo for all purposes as it scales to arbitrary sizes without loss of resolution. If a raster image is required, the SVG logo should be converted to a PNG image of the prescribed size.

docs/development/utility-views.md

@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+# Utility Views
+
+Utility views are reusable views that handle common CRUD tasks, such as listing and updating objects. Some views operate on individual objects, whereas others (referred to as "bulk" views) operate on multiple objects at once.
+
+## Individual Views
+
+### ObjectListView
+
+Generates a paginated table of objects from a given queryset, which may optionally be filtered.
+
+### ObjectEditView
+
+Updates an object identified by a primary key (PK) or slug. If no existing object is specified, a new object will be created.
+
+### ObjectDeleteView
+
+Deletes an object. The user is redirected to a confirmation page before the deletion is executed.
+
+## Bulk Views
+
+### BulkCreateView
+
+Creates multiple objects at once based on a given pattern. Currently used only for IP addresses.
+
+### BulkImportView
+
+Accepts CSV-formatted data and creates a new object for each line. Creation is all-or-none.
+
+### BulkEditView
+
+Applies changes to multiple objects at once in a two-step operation. First, the list of PKs for selected objects is POSTed and an edit form is presented to the user. On submission of that form, the specified changes are made to all selected objects.
+
+### BulkDeleteView
+
+Deletes multiple objects. The user selects the objects to be deleted and confirms the deletion.
+
+## Component Views
+
+### ComponentCreateView
+
+Create one or more component objects beloning to a parent object (e.g. interfaces attached to a device).
+
+### ComponentEditView
+
+A subclass of `ObjectEditView`: Updates an individual component object.
+
+### ComponentDeleteView
+
+A subclass of `ObjectDeleteView`: Deletes an individual component object.
+
+### BulkComponentCreateView
+
+Create a set of components objects for each of a selected set of parent objects. This view can be used e.g. to create multiple interfaces on multiple devices at once.

docs/index.md

@@ -1,3 +1,5 @@
+![NetBox](netbox_logo.svg "NetBox logo")
+
 # What is NetBox?
 
 NetBox is an open source web application designed to help manage and document computer networks. Initially conceived by the network engineering team at [DigitalOcean](https://www.digitalocean.com/), NetBox was developed specifically to address the needs of network and infrastructure engineers. It encompasses the following aspects of network management:
@@ -6,10 +8,11 @@ NetBox is an open source web application designed to help manage and document co
 * **Equipment racks** - Organized by group and site
 * **Devices** - Types of devices and where they are installed
 * **Connections** - Network, console, and power connections among devices
+* **Virtualization** - Virtual machines and clusters
 * **Data circuits** - Long-haul communications circuits and providers
 * **Secrets** - Encrypted storage of sensitive credentials
 
-# What NetBox Isn't
+# What NetBox Is Not
 
 While NetBox strives to cover many areas of network management, the scope of its feature set is necessarily limited. This ensures that development focuses on core functionality and that scope creep is reasonably contained. To that end, it might help to provide some examples of functionality that NetBox **does not** provide:
 
@@ -41,13 +44,15 @@ When given a choice between a relatively simple [80% solution](https://en.wikipe
 
 NetBox is built on the [Django](https://djangoproject.com/) Python framework and utilizes a [PostgreSQL](https://www.postgresql.org/) database. It runs as a WSGI service behind your choice of HTTP server.
 
-| Function     | Component         |
-|--------------|-------------------|
-| HTTP Service | nginx or Apache   |
-| WSGI Service | gunicorn or uWSGI |
-| Application  | Django/Python     |
-| Database     | PostgreSQL        |
+| Function           | Component         |
+|--------------------|-------------------|
+| HTTP service       | nginx or Apache   |
+| WSGI service       | gunicorn or uWSGI |
+| Application        | Django/Python     |
+| Database           | PostgreSQL 9.4+   |
+| Task queuing       | Redis/django-rq   |
+| Live device access | NAPALM            |
 
 # Getting Started
 
-See the [installation guide](installation/postgresql.md) for help getting NetBox up and running quickly.
+See the [installation guide](installation/index.md) for help getting NetBox up and running quickly.

docs/installation/1-postgresql.md

@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+NetBox requires a PostgreSQL database to store data. This can be hosted locally or on a remote server. (Please note that MySQL is not supported, as NetBox leverages PostgreSQL's built-in [network address types](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/current/static/datatype-net-types.html).)
+
+!!! note
+    The installation instructions provided here have been tested to work on Ubuntu 18.04 and CentOS 7.5. The particular commands needed to install dependencies on other distributions may vary significantly. Unfortunately, this is outside the control of the NetBox maintainers. Please consult your distribution's documentation for assistance with any errors.
+
+!!! warning
+    NetBox requires PostgreSQL 9.4 or higher.
+
+# Installation
+
+**Ubuntu**
+
+If a recent enough version of PostgreSQL is not available through your distribution's package manager, you'll need to install it from an official [PostgreSQL repository](https://wiki.postgresql.org/wiki/Apt).
+
+```no-highlight
+# apt-get update
+# apt-get install -y postgresql libpq-dev
+```
+
+**CentOS**
+
+CentOS 7.5 does not ship with a recent enough version of PostgreSQL, so it will need to be installed from an external repository. The instructions below show the installation of PostgreSQL 9.6.
+
+```no-highlight
+# yum install https://download.postgresql.org/pub/repos/yum/9.6/redhat/rhel-7-x86_64/pgdg-centos96-9.6-3.noarch.rpm
+# yum install postgresql96 postgresql96-server postgresql96-devel
+# /usr/pgsql-9.6/bin/postgresql96-setup initdb
+```
+
+CentOS users should modify the PostgreSQL configuration to accept password-based authentication by replacing `ident` with `md5` for all host entries within `/var/lib/pgsql/9.6/data/pg_hba.conf`. For example:
+
+```no-highlight
+host    all             all             127.0.0.1/32            md5
+host    all             all             ::1/128                 md5
+```
+
+Then, start the service and enable it to run at boot:
+
+```no-highlight
+# systemctl start postgresql-9.6
+# systemctl enable postgresql-9.6
+```
+
+# Database Creation
+
+At a minimum, we need to create a database for NetBox and assign it a username and password for authentication. This is done with the following commands.
+
+!!! danger
+    DO NOT USE THE PASSWORD FROM THE EXAMPLE.
+
+```no-highlight
+# sudo -u postgres psql
+psql (9.4.5)
+Type "help" for help.
+
+postgres=# CREATE DATABASE netbox;
+CREATE DATABASE
+postgres=# CREATE USER netbox WITH PASSWORD 'J5brHrAXFLQSif0K';
+CREATE ROLE
+postgres=# GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON DATABASE netbox TO netbox;
+GRANT
+postgres=# \q
+```
+
+You can verify that authentication works issuing the following command and providing the configured password. (Replace `localhost` with your database server if using a remote database.)
+
+```no-highlight
+# psql -U netbox -W -h localhost netbox
+```
+
+If successful, you will enter a `netbox` prompt. Type `\q` to exit.

docs/installation/2-netbox.md

@@ -1,46 +1,30 @@
 # Installation
 
-**Debian/Ubuntu**
+This section of the documentation discusses installing and configuring the NetBox application. Begin by installing all system packages required by NetBox and its dependencies:
 
-Python 3:
+**Ubuntu**
 
 ```no-highlight
-# apt-get install -y python3 python3-dev python3-pip libxml2-dev libxslt1-dev libffi-dev graphviz libpq-dev libssl-dev zlib1g-dev
-# update-alternatives --install /usr/bin/python python /usr/bin/python3 1
+# apt-get install -y python3 python3-pip python3-dev build-essential libxml2-dev libxslt1-dev libffi-dev libpq-dev libssl-dev redis-server zlib1g-dev
 ```
 
-Python 2:
-
-```no-highlight
-# apt-get install -y python2.7 python-dev python-pip libxml2-dev libxslt1-dev libffi-dev graphviz libpq-dev libssl-dev zlib1g-dev
-```
-
-**CentOS/RHEL**
-
-Python 3:
+**CentOS**
 
 ```no-highlight
 # yum install -y epel-release
-# yum install -y gcc python34 python34-devel python34-setuptools libxml2-devel libxslt-devel libffi-devel graphviz openssl-devel
-# easy_install-3.4 pip
-# ln -s -f python3.4 /usr/bin/python
-```
-
-Python 2:
-
-```no-highlight
-# yum install -y epel-release
-# yum install -y gcc python2 python-devel python-pip libxml2-devel libxslt-devel libffi-devel graphviz openssl-devel
+# yum install -y gcc python36 python36-devel python36-setuptools libxml2-devel libxslt-devel libffi-devel openssl-devel redhat-rpm-config redis
+# easy_install-3.6 pip
+# ln -s /usr/bin/python3.6 /usr/bin/python3
 ```
 
 You may opt to install NetBox either from a numbered release or by cloning the master branch of its repository on GitHub.
 
 ## Option A: Download a Release
 
-Download the [latest stable release](https://github.com/digitalocean/netbox/releases) from GitHub as a tarball or ZIP archive and extract it to your desired path. In this example, we'll use `/opt/netbox`.
+Download the [latest stable release](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/releases) from GitHub as a tarball or ZIP archive and extract it to your desired path. In this example, we'll use `/opt/netbox`.
 
 ```no-highlight
-# wget https://github.com/digitalocean/netbox/archive/vX.Y.Z.tar.gz
+# wget https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/archive/vX.Y.Z.tar.gz
 # tar -xzf vX.Y.Z.tar.gz -C /opt
 # cd /opt/
 # ln -s netbox-X.Y.Z/ netbox
@@ -57,13 +41,13 @@ Create the base directory for the NetBox installation. For this guide, we'll use
 
 If `git` is not already installed, install it:
 
-**Debian/Ubuntu**
+**Ubuntu**
 
 ```no-highlight
 # apt-get install -y git
 ```
 
-**CentOS/RHEL**
+**CentOS**
 
 ```no-highlight
 # yum install -y git
@@ -72,7 +56,7 @@ If `git` is not already installed, install it:
 Next, clone the **master** branch of the NetBox GitHub repository into the current directory:
 
 ```no-highlight
-# git clone -b master https://github.com/digitalocean/netbox.git .
+# git clone -b master https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox.git .
 Cloning into '.'...
 remote: Counting objects: 1994, done.
 remote: Compressing objects: 100% (150/150), done.
@@ -82,20 +66,36 @@ Resolving deltas: 100% (1495/1495), done.
 Checking connectivity... done.
 ```
 
-## Install Python Packages
+!!! warning
+    Ensure that the media directory (`/opt/netbox/netbox/media/` in this example) and all its subdirectories are writable by the user account as which NetBox runs. If the NetBox process does not have permission to write to this directory, attempts to upload files (e.g. image attachments) will fail. (The appropriate user account will vary by platform.)
+
+    `# chown -R netbox:netbox /opt/netbox/netbox/media/`
+
+# Install Python Packages
 
 Install the required Python packages using pip. (If you encounter any compilation errors during this step, ensure that you've installed all of the system dependencies listed above.)
 
-Python 3:
-
 ```no-highlight
 # pip3 install -r requirements.txt
 ```
 
-Python 2:
+!!! note
+    If you encounter errors while installing the required packages, check that you're running a recent version of pip (v9.0.1 or higher) with the command `pip3 -V`.
+
+## NAPALM Automation (Optional)
+
+NetBox supports integration with the [NAPALM automation](https://napalm-automation.net/) library. NAPALM allows NetBox to fetch live data from devices and return it to a requester via its REST API. Installation of NAPALM is optional. To enable it, install the `napalm` package using pip or pip3:
 
 ```no-highlight
-# pip install -r requirements.txt
+# pip3 install napalm
+```
+
+## Remote File Storage (Optional)
+
+By default, NetBox will use the local filesystem to storage uploaded files. To use a remote filesystem, install the [`django-storages`](https://django-storages.readthedocs.io/en/stable/) library and configure your [desired backend](../../configuration/optional-settings/#storage_backend) in `configuration.py`.
+
+```no-highlight
+# pip3 install django-storages
 ```
 
 # Configuration
@@ -109,9 +109,10 @@ Move into the NetBox configuration directory and make a copy of `configuration.e
 
 Open `configuration.py` with your preferred editor and set the following variables:
 
-* ALLOWED_HOSTS
-* DATABASE
-* SECRET_KEY
+* `ALLOWED_HOSTS`
+* `DATABASE`
+* `REDIS`
+* `SECRET_KEY`
 
 ## ALLOWED_HOSTS
 
@@ -125,7 +126,7 @@ ALLOWED_HOSTS = ['netbox.example.com', '192.0.2.123']
 
 ## DATABASE
 
-This parameter holds the database configuration details. You must define the username and password used when you configured PostgreSQL. If the service is running on a remote host, replace `localhost` with its address.
+This parameter holds the database configuration details. You must define the username and password used when you configured PostgreSQL. If the service is running on a remote host, replace `localhost` with its address. See the [configuration documentation](../../configuration/required-settings/#database) for more detail on individual parameters.
 
 Example:
 
@@ -136,6 +137,32 @@ DATABASE = {
     'PASSWORD': 'J5brHrAXFLQSif0K', # PostgreSQL password
     'HOST': 'localhost',            # Database server
     'PORT': '',                     # Database port (leave blank for default)
+    'CONN_MAX_AGE': 300,            # Max database connection age
+}
+```
+
+## REDIS
+
+Redis is a in-memory key-value store required as part of the NetBox installation. It is used for features such as webhooks and caching. Redis typically requires minimal configuration; the values below should suffice for most installations. See the [configuration documentation](../../configuration/required-settings/#redis) for more detail on individual parameters.
+
+```python
+REDIS = {
+    'webhooks': {
+        'HOST': 'redis.example.com',
+        'PORT': 1234,
+        'PASSWORD': 'foobar',
+        'DATABASE': 0,
+        'DEFAULT_TIMEOUT': 300,
+        'SSL': False,
+    },
+    'caching': {
+        'HOST': 'localhost',
+        'PORT': 6379,
+        'PASSWORD': '',
+        'DATABASE': 1,
+        'DEFAULT_TIMEOUT': 300,
+        'SSL': False,
+    }
 }
 ```
 
@@ -150,11 +177,11 @@ You may use the script located at `netbox/generate_secret_key.py` to generate a
 
 # Run Database Migrations
 
-Before NetBox can run, we need to install the database schema. This is done by running `./manage.py migrate` from the `netbox` directory (`/opt/netbox/netbox/` in our example):
+Before NetBox can run, we need to install the database schema. This is done by running `python3 manage.py migrate` from the `netbox` directory (`/opt/netbox/netbox/` in our example):
 
 ```no-highlight
 # cd /opt/netbox/netbox/
-# ./manage.py migrate
+# python3 manage.py migrate
 Operations to perform:
   Apply all migrations: dcim, sessions, admin, ipam, utilities, auth, circuits, contenttypes, extras, secrets, users
 Running migrations:
@@ -172,7 +199,7 @@ If this step results in a PostgreSQL authentication error, ensure that the usern
 NetBox does not come with any predefined user accounts. You'll need to create a super user to be able to log into NetBox:
 
 ```no-highlight
-# ./manage.py createsuperuser
+# python3 manage.py createsuperuser
 Username: admin
 Email address: admin@example.com
 Password:
@@ -183,29 +210,9 @@ Superuser created successfully.
 # Collect Static Files
 
 ```no-highlight
-# ./manage.py collectstatic --no-input
+# python3 manage.py collectstatic --no-input
 
-You have requested to collect static files at the destination
-location as specified in your settings:
-
-    /opt/netbox/netbox/static
-
-This will overwrite existing files!
-Are you sure you want to do this?
-
-Type 'yes' to continue, or 'no' to cancel: yes
-```
-
-# Load Initial Data (Optional)
-
-NetBox ships with some initial data to help you get started: RIR definitions, common devices roles, etc. You can delete any seed data that you don't want to keep.
-
-!!! note
-    This step is optional. It's perfectly fine to start using NetBox without using this initial data if you'd rather create everything from scratch.
-
-```no-highlight
-# ./manage.py loaddata initial_data
-Installed 43 object(s) from 4 fixture(s)
+959 static files copied to '/opt/netbox/netbox/static'.
 ```
 
 # Test the Application
@@ -213,17 +220,25 @@ Installed 43 object(s) from 4 fixture(s)
 At this point, NetBox should be able to run. We can verify this by starting a development instance:
 
 ```no-highlight
-# ./manage.py runserver 0.0.0.0:8000 --insecure
+# python3 manage.py runserver 0.0.0.0:8000 --insecure
 Performing system checks...
 
 System check identified no issues (0 silenced).
-June 17, 2016 - 16:17:36
-Django version 1.9.7, using settings 'netbox.settings'
+November 28, 2018 - 09:33:45
+Django version 2.0.9, using settings 'netbox.settings'
 Starting development server at http://0.0.0.0:8000/
 Quit the server with CONTROL-C.
 ```
 
-Now if we navigate to the name or IP of the server (as defined in `ALLOWED_HOSTS`) we should be greeted with the NetBox home page. Note that this built-in web service is for development and testing purposes only. **It is not suited for production use.**
+Next, connect to the name or IP of the server (as defined in `ALLOWED_HOSTS`) on port 8000; for example, <http://127.0.0.1:8000/>. You should be greeted with the NetBox home page. Note that this built-in web service is for development and testing purposes only. **It is not suited for production use.**
 
 !!! warning
     If the test service does not run, or you cannot reach the NetBox home page, something has gone wrong. Do not proceed with the rest of this guide until the installation has been corrected.
+
+Note that the initial UI will be locked down for non-authenticated users.
+
+![NetBox UI as seen by a non-authenticated user](../media/installation/netbox_ui_guest.png)
+
+After logging in as the superuser you created earlier, all areas of the UI will be available.
+
+![NetBox UI as seen by an administrator](../media/installation/netbox_ui_admin.png)

docs/installation/3-http-daemon.md

@@ -0,0 +1,163 @@
+We'll set up a simple WSGI front end using [gunicorn](http://gunicorn.org/) for the purposes of this guide. For web servers, we provide example configurations for both [nginx](https://www.nginx.com/resources/wiki/) and [Apache](http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.4). (You are of course free to use whichever combination of HTTP and WSGI services you'd like.) We'll use systemd to enable service persistence.
+
+!!! info
+    For the sake of brevity, only Ubuntu 18.04 instructions are provided here, but this sort of web server and WSGI configuration is not unique to NetBox. Please consult your distribution's documentation for assistance if needed.
+
+# Web Server Installation
+
+## Option A: nginx
+
+The following will serve as a minimal nginx configuration. Be sure to modify your server name and installation path appropriately.
+
+```no-highlight
+# apt-get install -y nginx
+```
+
+Once nginx is installed, save the following configuration to `/etc/nginx/sites-available/netbox`. Be sure to replace `netbox.example.com` with the domain name or IP address of your installation. (This should match the value configured for `ALLOWED_HOSTS` in `configuration.py`.)
+
+```nginx
+server {
+    listen 80;
+
+    server_name netbox.example.com;
+
+    client_max_body_size 25m;
+
+    location /static/ {
+        alias /opt/netbox/netbox/static/;
+    }
+
+    location / {
+        proxy_pass http://127.0.0.1:8001;
+        proxy_set_header X-Forwarded-Host $http_host;
+        proxy_set_header X-Real-IP $remote_addr;
+        proxy_set_header X-Forwarded-Proto $scheme;
+    }
+}
+```
+
+Then, delete `/etc/nginx/sites-enabled/default` and create a symlink in the `sites-enabled` directory to the configuration file you just created.
+
+```no-highlight
+# cd /etc/nginx/sites-enabled/
+# rm default
+# ln -s /etc/nginx/sites-available/netbox
+```
+
+Restart the nginx service to use the new configuration.
+
+```no-highlight
+# service nginx restart
+```
+
+To enable SSL, consider this guide on [securing nginx with Let's Encrypt](https://www.digitalocean.com/community/tutorials/how-to-secure-nginx-with-let-s-encrypt-on-ubuntu-16-04).
+
+## Option B: Apache
+
+```no-highlight
+# apt-get install -y apache2 libapache2-mod-wsgi-py3
+```
+
+Once Apache is installed, proceed with the following configuration (Be sure to modify the `ServerName` appropriately):
+
+```apache
+<VirtualHost *:80>
+    ProxyPreserveHost On
+
+    ServerName netbox.example.com
+
+    Alias /static /opt/netbox/netbox/static
+
+    # Needed to allow token-based API authentication
+    WSGIPassAuthorization on
+
+    <Directory /opt/netbox/netbox/static>
+        Options Indexes FollowSymLinks MultiViews
+        AllowOverride None
+        Require all granted
+    </Directory>
+
+    <Location /static>
+        ProxyPass !
+    </Location>
+
+    RequestHeader set "X-Forwarded-Proto" expr=%{REQUEST_SCHEME}
+    ProxyPass / http://127.0.0.1:8001/
+    ProxyPassReverse / http://127.0.0.1:8001/
+</VirtualHost>
+```
+
+Save the contents of the above example in `/etc/apache2/sites-available/netbox.conf`, enable the `proxy` and `proxy_http` modules, and reload Apache:
+
+```no-highlight
+# a2enmod proxy
+# a2enmod proxy_http
+# a2enmod headers
+# a2ensite netbox
+# service apache2 restart
+```
+
+To enable SSL, consider this guide on [securing Apache with Let's Encrypt](https://www.digitalocean.com/community/tutorials/how-to-secure-apache-with-let-s-encrypt-on-ubuntu-16-04).
+
+!!! note
+    Certain components of NetBox (such as the display of rack elevation diagrams) rely on the use of embedded objects. Ensure that your HTTP server configuration does not override the `X-Frame-Options` response header set by NetBox.
+
+# gunicorn Installation
+
+Install gunicorn:
+
+```no-highlight
+# pip3 install gunicorn
+```
+
+Copy `/opt/netbox/contrib/gunicorn.py` to `/opt/netbox/gunicorn.py`. We make a copy of this file to ensure that any changes to it do not get overwritten by a future upgrade.
+
+```no-highlight
+# cd /opt/netbox
+# cp contrib/gunicorn.py /opt/netbox/gunicorn.py
+```
+
+You may wish to edit this file to change the bound IP address or port number, or to make performance-related adjustments.
+
+# systemd configuration
+
+We'll use systemd to control the daemonization of NetBox services. First, copy `contrib/netbox.service` and `contrib/netbox-rq.service` to the `/etc/systemd/system/` directory:
+
+```no-highlight
+# cp contrib/*.service /etc/systemd/system/
+```
+
+!!! note
+    These service files assume that gunicorn is installed at `/usr/local/bin/gunicorn`. If the output of `which gunicorn` indicates a different path, you'll need to correct the `ExecStart` path in both files.
+
+Then, start the `netbox` and `netbox-rq` services and enable them to initiate at boot time:
+
+```no-highlight
+# systemctl daemon-reload
+# systemctl start netbox.service
+# systemctl start netbox-rq.service
+# systemctl enable netbox.service
+# systemctl enable netbox-rq.service
+```
+
+You can use the command `systemctl status netbox` to verify that the WSGI service is running:
+
+```
+# systemctl status netbox.service
+● netbox.service - NetBox WSGI Service
+   Loaded: loaded (/etc/systemd/system/netbox.service; enabled; vendor preset: enabled)
+   Active: active (running) since Thu 2019-12-12 19:23:40 UTC; 25s ago
+     Docs: https://netbox.readthedocs.io/en/stable/
+ Main PID: 11993 (gunicorn)
+    Tasks: 6 (limit: 2362)
+   CGroup: /system.slice/netbox.service
+           ├─11993 /usr/bin/python3 /usr/local/bin/gunicorn --pid /var/tmp/netbox.pid --pythonpath /opt/netbox/...
+           ├─12015 /usr/bin/python3 /usr/local/bin/gunicorn --pid /var/tmp/netbox.pid --pythonpath /opt/netbox/...
+           ├─12016 /usr/bin/python3 /usr/local/bin/gunicorn --pid /var/tmp/netbox.pid --pythonpath /opt/netbox/...
+...
+```
+
+At this point, you should be able to connect to the HTTP service at the server name or IP address you provided. If you are unable to connect, check that the nginx service is running and properly configured. If you receive a 502 (bad gateway) error, this indicates that gunicorn is misconfigured or not running.
+
+!!! info
+    Please keep in mind that the configurations provided here are bare minimums required to get NetBox up and running. You may want to make adjustments to better suit your production environment.

docs/installation/4-ldap.md

@@ -0,0 +1,140 @@
+This guide explains how to implement LDAP authentication using an external server. User authentication will fall back to built-in Django users in the event of a failure.
+
+# Requirements
+
+## Install openldap-devel
+
+On Ubuntu:
+
+```no-highlight
+sudo apt-get install -y libldap2-dev libsasl2-dev libssl-dev
+```
+
+On CentOS:
+
+```no-highlight
+sudo yum install -y openldap-devel
+```
+
+## Install django-auth-ldap
+
+```no-highlight
+pip3 install django-auth-ldap
+```
+
+# Configuration
+
+Create a file in the same directory as `configuration.py` (typically `netbox/netbox/`) named `ldap_config.py`. Define all of the parameters required below in `ldap_config.py`. Complete documentation of all `django-auth-ldap` configuration options is included in the project's [official documentation](http://django-auth-ldap.readthedocs.io/).
+
+## General Server Configuration
+
+!!! info
+    When using Windows Server 2012 you may need to specify a port on `AUTH_LDAP_SERVER_URI`. Use `3269` for secure, or `3268` for non-secure.
+
+```python
+import ldap
+
+# Server URI
+AUTH_LDAP_SERVER_URI = "ldaps://ad.example.com"
+
+# The following may be needed if you are binding to Active Directory.
+AUTH_LDAP_CONNECTION_OPTIONS = {
+    ldap.OPT_REFERRALS: 0
+}
+
+# Set the DN and password for the NetBox service account.
+AUTH_LDAP_BIND_DN = "CN=NETBOXSA, OU=Service Accounts,DC=example,DC=com"
+AUTH_LDAP_BIND_PASSWORD = "demo"
+
+# Include this setting if you want to ignore certificate errors. This might be needed to accept a self-signed cert.
+# Note that this is a NetBox-specific setting which sets:
+#     ldap.set_option(ldap.OPT_X_TLS_REQUIRE_CERT, ldap.OPT_X_TLS_NEVER)
+LDAP_IGNORE_CERT_ERRORS = True
+```
+
+STARTTLS can be configured by setting `AUTH_LDAP_START_TLS = True` and using the `ldap://` URI scheme.
+
+## User Authentication
+
+!!! info
+    When using Windows Server 2012, `AUTH_LDAP_USER_DN_TEMPLATE` should be set to None.
+
+```python
+from django_auth_ldap.config import LDAPSearch
+
+# This search matches users with the sAMAccountName equal to the provided username. This is required if the user's
+# username is not in their DN (Active Directory).
+AUTH_LDAP_USER_SEARCH = LDAPSearch("ou=Users,dc=example,dc=com",
+                                    ldap.SCOPE_SUBTREE,
+                                    "(sAMAccountName=%(user)s)")
+
+# If a user's DN is producible from their username, we don't need to search.
+AUTH_LDAP_USER_DN_TEMPLATE = "uid=%(user)s,ou=users,dc=example,dc=com"
+
+# You can map user attributes to Django attributes as so.
+AUTH_LDAP_USER_ATTR_MAP = {
+    "first_name": "givenName",
+    "last_name": "sn",
+    "email": "mail"
+}
+```
+
+# User Groups for Permissions
+
+!!! info
+    When using Microsoft Active Directory, support for nested groups can be activated by using `NestedGroupOfNamesType()` instead of `GroupOfNamesType()` for `AUTH_LDAP_GROUP_TYPE`. You will also need to modify the import line to use `NestedGroupOfNamesType` instead of `GroupOfNamesType` .
+
+```python
+from django_auth_ldap.config import LDAPSearch, GroupOfNamesType
+
+# This search ought to return all groups to which the user belongs. django_auth_ldap uses this to determine group
+# hierarchy.
+AUTH_LDAP_GROUP_SEARCH = LDAPSearch("dc=example,dc=com", ldap.SCOPE_SUBTREE,
+                                    "(objectClass=group)")
+AUTH_LDAP_GROUP_TYPE = GroupOfNamesType()
+
+# Define a group required to login.
+AUTH_LDAP_REQUIRE_GROUP = "CN=NETBOX_USERS,DC=example,DC=com"
+
+# Mirror LDAP group assignments.
+AUTH_LDAP_MIRROR_GROUPS = True
+
+# Define special user types using groups. Exercise great caution when assigning superuser status.
+AUTH_LDAP_USER_FLAGS_BY_GROUP = {
+    "is_active": "cn=active,ou=groups,dc=example,dc=com",
+    "is_staff": "cn=staff,ou=groups,dc=example,dc=com",
+    "is_superuser": "cn=superuser,ou=groups,dc=example,dc=com"
+}
+
+# For more granular permissions, we can map LDAP groups to Django groups.
+AUTH_LDAP_FIND_GROUP_PERMS = True
+
+# Cache groups for one hour to reduce LDAP traffic
+AUTH_LDAP_CACHE_TIMEOUT = 3600
+
+```
+
+* `is_active` - All users must be mapped to at least this group to enable authentication. Without this, users cannot log in.
+* `is_staff` - Users mapped to this group are enabled for access to the administration tools; this is the equivalent of checking the "staff status" box on a manually created user. This doesn't grant any specific permissions.
+* `is_superuser` - Users mapped to this group will be granted superuser status. Superusers are implicitly granted all permissions.
+
+!!! warning
+    Authentication will fail if the groups (the distinguished names) do not exist in the LDAP directory.
+
+# Troubleshooting LDAP
+
+`supervisorctl restart netbox` restarts the Netbox service, and initiates any changes made to `ldap_config.py`. If there are syntax errors present, the NetBox process will not spawn an instance, and errors should be logged to `/var/log/supervisor/`.
+
+For troubleshooting LDAP user/group queries, add the following lines to the start of `ldap_config.py` after `import ldap`.
+
+```python
+import logging, logging.handlers
+logfile = "/opt/netbox/logs/django-ldap-debug.log"
+my_logger = logging.getLogger('django_auth_ldap')
+my_logger.setLevel(logging.DEBUG)
+handler = logging.handlers.RotatingFileHandler(
+   logfile, maxBytes=1024 * 500, backupCount=5)
+my_logger.addHandler(handler)
+```
+
+Ensure the file and path specified in logfile exist and are writable and executable by the application service account. Restart the netbox service and attempt to log into the site to trigger log entries to this file.

docs/installation/index.md

@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+# Installation
+
+The following sections detail how to set up a new instance of NetBox:
+
+1. [PostgreSQL database](1-postgresql.md)
+2. [NetBox components](2-netbox.md)
+3. [HTTP daemon](3-http-daemon.md)
+4. [LDAP authentication](4-ldap.md) (optional)
+
+# Upgrading
+
+If you are upgrading from an existing installation, please consult the [upgrading guide](upgrading.md).
+
+NetBox v2.5 and later requires Python 3.5 or higher. Please see the instructions for [migrating to Python 3](migrating-to-python3.md) if you are still using Python 2.
+
+Netbox v2.5.9 and later moved to using systemd instead of supervisord.  Please see the instructions for [migrating to systemd](migrating-to-systemd.md) if you are still using supervisord.

docs/installation/ldap.md

@@ -1,101 +0,0 @@
-This guide explains how to implement LDAP authentication using an external server. User authentication will fall back to
-built-in Django users in the event of a failure.
-
-# Requirements
-
-## Install openldap-devel
-
-On Ubuntu:
-
-```no-highlight
-sudo apt-get install -y python-dev libldap2-dev libsasl2-dev libssl-dev
-```
-
-On CentOS:
-
-```no-highlight
-sudo yum install -y python-devel openldap-devel
-```
-
-## Install django-auth-ldap
-
-```no-highlight
-sudo pip install django-auth-ldap
-```
-
-# Configuration
-
-Create a file in the same directory as `configuration.py` (typically `netbox/netbox/`) named `ldap_config.py`. Define all of the parameters required below in `ldap_config.py`.
-
-## General Server Configuration
-
-```python
-import ldap
-
-# Server URI
-AUTH_LDAP_SERVER_URI = "ldaps://ad.example.com"
-
-# The following may be needed if you are binding to Active Directory.
-AUTH_LDAP_CONNECTION_OPTIONS = {
-    ldap.OPT_REFERRALS: 0
-}
-
-# Set the DN and password for the NetBox service account.
-AUTH_LDAP_BIND_DN = "CN=NETBOXSA, OU=Service Accounts,DC=example,DC=com"
-AUTH_LDAP_BIND_PASSWORD = "demo"
-
-# Include this setting if you want to ignore certificate errors. This might be needed to accept a self-signed cert.
-# Note that this is a NetBox-specific setting which sets:
-#     ldap.set_option(ldap.OPT_X_TLS_REQUIRE_CERT, ldap.OPT_X_TLS_NEVER)
-LDAP_IGNORE_CERT_ERRORS = True
-```
-
-## User Authentication
-
-```python
-from django_auth_ldap.config import LDAPSearch
-
-# This search matches users with the sAMAccountName equal to the provided username. This is required if the user's
-# username is not in their DN (Active Directory).
-AUTH_LDAP_USER_SEARCH = LDAPSearch("ou=Users,dc=example,dc=com",
-                                    ldap.SCOPE_SUBTREE,
-                                    "(sAMAccountName=%(user)s)")
-
-# If a user's DN is producible from their username, we don't need to search.
-AUTH_LDAP_USER_DN_TEMPLATE = "uid=%(user)s,ou=users,dc=example,dc=com"
-
-# You can map user attributes to Django attributes as so.
-AUTH_LDAP_USER_ATTR_MAP = {
-    "first_name": "givenName",
-    "last_name": "sn"
-}
-```
-
-# User Groups for Permissions
-
-```python
-from django_auth_ldap.config import LDAPSearch, GroupOfNamesType
-
-# This search ought to return all groups to which the user belongs. django_auth_ldap uses this to determine group
-# heirarchy.
-AUTH_LDAP_GROUP_SEARCH = LDAPSearch("dc=example,dc=com", ldap.SCOPE_SUBTREE,
-                                    "(objectClass=group)")
-AUTH_LDAP_GROUP_TYPE = GroupOfNamesType()
-
-# Define a group required to login.
-AUTH_LDAP_REQUIRE_GROUP = "CN=NETBOX_USERS,DC=example,DC=com"
-
-# Define special user types using groups. Exercise great caution when assigning superuser status.
-AUTH_LDAP_USER_FLAGS_BY_GROUP = {
-    "is_active": "cn=active,ou=groups,dc=example,dc=com",
-    "is_staff": "cn=staff,ou=groups,dc=example,dc=com",
-    "is_superuser": "cn=superuser,ou=groups,dc=example,dc=com"
-}
-
-# For more granular permissions, we can map LDAP groups to Django groups.
-AUTH_LDAP_FIND_GROUP_PERMS = True
-
-# Cache groups for one hour to reduce LDAP traffic
-AUTH_LDAP_CACHE_GROUPS = True
-AUTH_LDAP_GROUP_CACHE_TIMEOUT = 3600
-```

docs/installation/migrating-to-python3.md

@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+# Migration
+
+!!! warning
+    As of version 2.5, NetBox no longer supports Python 2. Python 3 is required to run any 2.5 release or later.
+
+## Ubuntu
+
+Remove the Python2 version of gunicorn:
+
+```no-highlight
+# pip uninstall -y gunicorn
+```
+
+Install Python3 and pip3, Python's package management tool:
+
+```no-highlight
+# apt-get update
+# apt-get install -y python3 python3-dev python3-setuptools
+# easy_install3 pip
+```
+
+Install the Python3 packages required by NetBox:
+
+```no-highlight
+# pip3 install -r requirements.txt
+```
+
+Replace gunicorn with the Python3 version:
+
+```no-highlight
+# pip3 install gunicorn
+```
+
+If using LDAP authentication, install the `django-auth-ldap` package:
+
+```no-highlight
+# pip3 install django-auth-ldap
+```

docs/installation/migrating-to-systemd.md

@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+# Migration
+
+Migration is not required, as supervisord will still continue to function.
+
+## Ubuntu
+
+### Remove supervisord:
+
+```no-highlight
+# apt-get remove -y supervisord
+```
+
+### systemd configuration:
+
+We'll use systemd to control the daemonization of NetBox services. First, copy `contrib/netbox.service` and `contrib/netbox-rq.service` to the `/etc/systemd/system/` directory:
+
+```no-highlight
+# cp contrib/*.service /etc/systemd/system/
+```
+
+!!! note
+    These service files assume that gunicorn is installed at `/usr/local/bin/gunicorn`. If the output of `which gunicorn` indicates a different path, you'll need to correct the `ExecStart` path in both files.
+
+!!! note
+    You may need to modify the user that the systemd service runs as.  Please verify the user for httpd on your specific release and edit both files to match your httpd service under user and group.  The username could be "nobody", "nginx", "apache", "www-data" or any number of other usernames.
+
+Then, start the `netbox` and `netbox-rq` services and enable them to initiate at boot time:
+
+```no-highlight
+# systemctl daemon-reload
+# systemctl start netbox.service
+# systemctl start netbox-rq.service
+# systemctl enable netbox.service
+# systemctl enable netbox-rq.service
+```
+
+You can use the command `systemctl status netbox` to verify that the WSGI service is running:
+
+```
+# systemctl status netbox.service
+● netbox.service - NetBox WSGI Service
+   Loaded: loaded (/etc/systemd/system/netbox.service; enabled; vendor preset: enabled)
+   Active: active (running) since Thu 2019-12-12 19:23:40 UTC; 25s ago
+     Docs: https://netbox.readthedocs.io/en/stable/
+ Main PID: 11993 (gunicorn)
+    Tasks: 6 (limit: 2362)
+   CGroup: /system.slice/netbox.service
+           ├─11993 /usr/bin/python3 /usr/local/bin/gunicorn --pid /var/tmp/netbox.pid --pythonpath /opt/netbox/...
+           ├─12015 /usr/bin/python3 /usr/local/bin/gunicorn --pid /var/tmp/netbox.pid --pythonpath /opt/netbox/...
+           ├─12016 /usr/bin/python3 /usr/local/bin/gunicorn --pid /var/tmp/netbox.pid --pythonpath /opt/netbox/...
+...
+```
+
+At this point, you should be able to connect to the HTTP service at the server name or IP address you provided. If you are unable to connect, check that the nginx service is running and properly configured. If you receive a 502 (bad gateway) error, this indicates that gunicorn is misconfigured or not running.
+
+!!! info
+    Please keep in mind that the configurations provided here are bare minimums required to get NetBox up and running. You may want to make adjustments to better suit your production environment.

docs/installation/postgresql.md

@@ -1,59 +0,0 @@
-NetBox requires a PostgreSQL database to store data. (Please note that MySQL is not supported, as NetBox leverages PostgreSQL's built-in [network address types](https://www.postgresql.org/docs/9.1/static/datatype-net-types.html).)
-
-# Installation
-
-**Debian/Ubuntu**
-
-```no-highlight
-# apt-get update
-# apt-get install -y postgresql libpq-dev
-```
-
-**CentOS/RHEL**
-
-```no-highlight
-# yum install -y postgresql postgresql-server postgresql-devel
-# postgresql-setup initdb
-```
-
-CentOS users should modify the PostgreSQL configuration to accept password-based authentication by replacing `ident` with `md5` for all host entries within `/var/lib/pgsql/data/pg_hba.conf`. For example:
-
-```no-highlight
-host    all             all             127.0.0.1/32            md5
-host    all             all             ::1/128                 md5
-```
-
-Then, start the service:
-
-```no-highlight
-# systemctl start postgresql
-```
-
-# Database Creation
-
-At a minimum, we need to create a database for NetBox and assign it a username and password for authentication. This is done with the following commands.
-
-!!! danger
-    DO NOT USE THE PASSWORD FROM THE EXAMPLE.
-
-```no-highlight
-# sudo -u postgres psql
-psql (9.3.13)
-Type "help" for help.
-
-postgres=# CREATE DATABASE netbox;
-CREATE DATABASE
-postgres=# CREATE USER netbox WITH PASSWORD 'J5brHrAXFLQSif0K';
-CREATE ROLE
-postgres=# GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON DATABASE netbox TO netbox;
-GRANT
-postgres=# \q
-```
-
-You can verify that authentication works issuing the following command and providing the configured password:
-
-```no-highlight
-# psql -U netbox -h localhost -W
-```
-
-If successful, you will enter a `postgres` prompt. Type `\q` to exit.

docs/installation/upgrading.md

@@ -1,36 +1,52 @@
+# Review the Release Notes
+
+Prior to upgrading your NetBox instance, be sure to carefully review all [release notes](../../release-notes/) that have been published since your current version was released. Although the upgrade process typically does not involve additional work, certain releases may introduce breaking or backward-incompatible changes. These are called out in the release notes under the version in which the change went into effect.
+
 # Install the Latest Code
 
 As with the initial installation, you can upgrade NetBox by either downloading the latest release package or by cloning the `master` branch of the git repository. 
 
 ## Option A: Download a Release
 
-Download the [latest stable release](https://github.com/digitalocean/netbox/releases) from GitHub as a tarball or ZIP archive. Extract it to your desired path. In this example, we'll use `/opt/netbox`.
+Download the [latest stable release](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/releases) from GitHub as a tarball or ZIP archive. Extract it to your desired path. In this example, we'll use `/opt/netbox`.
 
 Download and extract the latest version:
 
 ```no-highlight
-# wget https://github.com/digitalocean/netbox/archive/vX.Y.Z.tar.gz
+# wget https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/archive/vX.Y.Z.tar.gz
 # tar -xzf vX.Y.Z.tar.gz -C /opt
 # cd /opt/
-# ln -sf netbox-X.Y.Z/ netbox
+# ln -sfn netbox-X.Y.Z/ netbox
 ```
 
 Copy the 'configuration.py' you created when first installing to the new version:
 
 ```no-highlight
-# cp /opt/netbox-X.Y.Z/netbox/netbox/configuration.py /opt/netbox/netbox/netbox/configuration.py
+# cp netbox-X.Y.Z/netbox/netbox/configuration.py netbox/netbox/netbox/configuration.py
+```
+
+Be sure to replicate your uploaded media as well. (The exact action necessary will depend on where you choose to store your media, but in general moving or copying the media directory will suffice.)
+
+```no-highlight
+# cp -pr netbox-X.Y.Z/netbox/media/ netbox/netbox/
+```
+
+Also make sure to copy over any reports that you've made. Note that if you made them in a separate directory (`/opt/netbox-reports` for example), then you will not need to copy them - the config file that you copied earlier will point to the correct location.
+
+```no-highlight
+# cp -r /opt/netbox-X.Y.X/netbox/reports /opt/netbox/netbox/reports/
 ```
 
 If you followed the original installation guide to set up gunicorn, be sure to copy its configuration as well:
 
 ```no-highlight
-# cp /opt/netbox-X.Y.Z/gunicorn_config.py /opt/netbox/gunicorn_config.py
+# cp netbox-X.Y.Z/gunicorn_config.py netbox/gunicorn_config.py
 ```
 
 Copy the LDAP configuration if using LDAP:
 
 ```no-highlight
-# cp /opt/netbox-X.Y.Z/netbox/netbox/ldap_config.py /opt/netbox/netbox/netbox/ldap_config.py
+# cp netbox-X.Y.Z/netbox/netbox/ldap_config.py netbox/netbox/netbox/ldap_config.py
 ```
 
 ## Option B: Clone the Git Repository (latest master release)
@@ -58,10 +74,22 @@ This script:
 * Applies any database migrations that were included in the release
 * Collects all static files to be served by the HTTP service
 
+!!! note
+    It's possible that the upgrade script will display a notice warning of unreflected database migrations:
+
+        Your models have changes that are not yet reflected in a migration, and so won't be applied.
+        Run 'manage.py makemigrations' to make new migrations, and then re-run 'manage.py migrate' to apply them.
+
+    This may occur due to semantic differences in environment, and can be safely ignored. Never attempt to create new migrations unless you are intentionally modifying the database schema.
+
 # Restart the WSGI Service
 
-Finally, restart the WSGI service to run the new code. If you followed this guide for the initial installation, this is done using `supervisorctl`:
+Finally, restart the WSGI services to run the new code. If you followed this guide for the initial installation, this is done using `systemctl:
 
 ```no-highlight
-# sudo supervisorctl restart netbox
+# sudo systemctl restart netbox
+# sudo systemctl restart netbox-rq
 ```
+
+!!! note
+    It's possible you are still using supervisord instead of the linux native systemd.  If you are still using supervisord you can restart the services by either restarting supervisord or by using supervisorctl to restart netbox.

docs/installation/web-server.md

@@ -1,137 +0,0 @@
-# Web Server Installation
-
-We'll set up a simple WSGI front end using [gunicorn](http://gunicorn.org/) for the purposes of this guide. For web servers, we provide example configurations for both [nginx](https://www.nginx.com/resources/wiki/) and [Apache](http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.4). (You are of course free to use whichever combination of HTTP and WSGI services you'd like.) We'll also use [supervisord](http://supervisord.org/) to enable service persistence.
-
-!!! info
-    Only Debian/Ubuntu instructions are provided here, but the installation process for CentOS/RHEL does not differ much. Please consult the documentation for those distributions for details.
-
-```no-highlight
-# apt-get install -y gunicorn supervisor
-```
-
-## Option A: nginx
-
-The following will serve as a minimal nginx configuration. Be sure to modify your server name and installation path appropriately.
-
-```no-highlight
-# apt-get install -y nginx
-```
-
-Once nginx is installed, save the following configuration to `/etc/nginx/sites-available/netbox`. Be sure to replace `netbox.example.com` with the domain name or IP address of your installation. (This should match the value configured for `ALLOWED_HOSTS` in `configuration.py`.)
-
-```nginx
-server {
-    listen 80;
-
-    server_name netbox.example.com;
-
-    client_max_body_size 25m;
-
-    location /static/ {
-        alias /opt/netbox/netbox/static/;
-    }
-
-    location / {
-        proxy_pass http://127.0.0.1:8001;
-        proxy_set_header X-Forwarded-Host $server_name;
-        proxy_set_header X-Real-IP $remote_addr;
-        proxy_set_header X-Forwarded-Proto $scheme;
-        add_header P3P 'CP="ALL DSP COR PSAa PSDa OUR NOR ONL UNI COM NAV"';
-    }
-}
-```
-
-Then, delete `/etc/nginx/sites-enabled/default` and create a symlink in the `sites-enabled` directory to the configuration file you just created.
-
-```no-highlight
-# cd /etc/nginx/sites-enabled/
-# rm default
-# ln -s /etc/nginx/sites-available/netbox
-```
-
-Restart the nginx service to use the new configuration.
-
-```no-highlight
-# service nginx restart
-```
-
-To enable SSL, consider this guide on [securing nginx with Let's Encrypt](https://www.digitalocean.com/community/tutorials/how-to-secure-nginx-with-let-s-encrypt-on-ubuntu-14-04).
-
-## Option B: Apache
-
-```no-highlight
-# apt-get install -y apache2
-```
-
-Once Apache is installed, proceed with the following configuration (Be sure to modify the `ServerName` appropriately):
-
-```apache
-<VirtualHost *:80>
-    ProxyPreserveHost On
-
-    ServerName netbox.example.com
-
-    Alias /static /opt/netbox/netbox/static
-
-    # Needed to allow token-based API authentication
-    WSGIPassAuthorization on
-
-    <Directory /opt/netbox/netbox/static>
-        Options Indexes FollowSymLinks MultiViews
-        AllowOverride None
-        Require all granted
-    </Directory>
-
-    <Location /static>
-        ProxyPass !
-    </Location>
-
-    ProxyPass / http://127.0.0.1:8001/
-    ProxyPassReverse / http://127.0.0.1:8001/
-</VirtualHost>
-```
-
-Save the contents of the above example in `/etc/apache2/sites-available/netbox.conf`, enable the `proxy` and `proxy_http` modules, and reload Apache:
-
-```no-highlight
-# a2enmod proxy
-# a2enmod proxy_http
-# a2ensite netbox
-# service apache2 restart
-```
-
-To enable SSL, consider this guide on [securing Apache with Let's Encrypt](https://www.digitalocean.com/community/tutorials/how-to-secure-apache-with-let-s-encrypt-on-ubuntu-14-04).
-
-# gunicorn Installation
-
-Save the following configuration in the root netbox installation path as `gunicorn_config.py` (e.g. `/opt/netbox/gunicorn_config.py` per our example installation). Be sure to verify the location of the gunicorn executable on your server (e.g. `which gunicorn`) and to update the `pythonpath` variable if needed. If using CentOS/RHEL, change the username from `www-data` to `nginx` or `apache`.
-
-```no-highlight
-command = '/usr/bin/gunicorn'
-pythonpath = '/opt/netbox/netbox'
-bind = '127.0.0.1:8001'
-workers = 3
-user = 'www-data'
-```
-
-# supervisord Installation
-
-Save the following as `/etc/supervisor/conf.d/netbox.conf`. Update the `command` and `directory` paths as needed. If using CentOS/RHEL, change the username from `www-data` to `nginx` or `apache`.
-
-```no-highlight
-[program:netbox]
-command = gunicorn -c /opt/netbox/gunicorn_config.py netbox.wsgi
-directory = /opt/netbox/netbox/
-user = www-data
-```
-
-Then, restart the supervisor service to detect and run the gunicorn service:
-
-```no-highlight
-# service supervisor restart
-```
-
-At this point, you should be able to connect to the nginx HTTP service at the server name or IP address you provided. If you are unable to connect, check that the nginx service is running and properly configured. If you receive a 502 (bad gateway) error, this indicates that gunicorn is misconfigured or not running.
-
-!!! info
-    Please keep in mind that the configurations provided here are bare minimums required to get NetBox up and running. You will almost certainly want to make some changes to better suit your production environment.

docs/netbox_logo.svg

@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+<svg xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" viewBox="0 0 1100 320">
+  <g fill="#9cc8f8" stroke="#9cc8f8">
+    <circle cx="37" cy="284" r="23"/>
+    <circle cx="101" cy="37" r="23"/>
+    <circle cx="101" cy="220" r="23"/>
+    <circle cx="284" cy="220" r="23"/>
+    <rect x="93" y="37" width="16" height="180"/>
+    <rect x="101" y="212" width="180" height="16"/>
+    <rect x="93" y="212" width="16" height="90" transform="rotate(45 101 220)"/>
+  </g>
+  <g fill="#1685fc" stroke="#1685fc">
+    <circle cx="284" cy="37" r="23"/>
+    <circle cx="37" cy="101" r="23"/>
+    <circle cx="220" cy="101" r="23"/>
+    <circle cx="220" cy="284" r="23"/>
+    <rect x="37" y="93" width="180" height="16"/>
+    <rect x="212" y="101" width="16" height="180"/>
+    <rect x="212" y="93" width="16" height="90" transform="rotate(225 220 101)"/>
+    <path transform="translate(380, 8)" d="M13.60 200L13.60 104L36.40 104L36.40 119.40L36.80 119.40Q40.20 112.20 47.20 106.90Q54.20 101.60 66.20 101.60L66.20 101.60Q75.80 101.60 82.50 104.80Q89.20 108 93.40 113.20Q97.60 118.40 99.40 125.20Q101.20 132 101.20 139.40L101.20 139.40L101.20 200L77.20 200L77.20 151.40Q77.20 147.40 76.80 142.50Q76.40 137.60 74.70 133.30Q73 129 69.40 126.10Q65.80 123.20 59.60 123.20L59.60 123.20Q53.60 123.20 49.50 125.20Q45.40 127.20 42.70 130.60Q40 134 38.80 138.40Q37.60 142.80 37.60 147.60L37.60 147.60L37.60 200L13.60 200ZM224.80 160.40L151.60 160.40Q152.80 171.20 160 177.20Q167.20 183.20 177.40 183.20L177.40 183.20Q186.40 183.20 192.50 179.50Q198.60 175.80 203.20 170.20L203.20 170.20L220.40 183.20Q212 193.60 201.60 198Q191.20 202.40 179.80 202.40L179.80 202.40Q169 202.40 159.40 198.80Q149.80 195.20 142.80 188.60Q135.80 182 131.70 172.70Q127.60 163.40 127.60 152L127.60 152Q127.60 140.60 131.70 131.30Q135.80 122 142.80 115.40Q149.80 108.80 159.40 105.20Q169 101.60 179.80 101.60L179.80 101.60Q189.80 101.60 198.10 105.10Q206.40 108.60 212.30 115.20Q218.20 121.80 221.50 131.50Q224.80 141.20 224.80 153.80L224.80 153.80L224.80 160.40ZM151.60 142.40L200.80 142.40Q200.60 131.80 194.20 125.70Q187.80 119.60 176.40 119.60L176.40 119.60Q165.60 119.60 159.30 125.80Q153 132 151.60 142.40L151.60 142.40ZM259.80 124.40L240.00 124.40L240.00 104L259.80 104L259.80 76.20L283.80 76.20L283.80 104L310.20 104L310.20 124.40L283.80 124.40L283.80 166.40Q283.80 173.60 286.50 177.80Q289.20 182 297.20 182L297.20 182Q300.40 182 304.20 181.30Q308 180.60 310.20 179L310.20 179L310.20 199.20Q306.40 201 300.90 201.70Q295.40 202.40 291.20 202.40L291.20 202.40Q281.60 202.40 275.50 200.30Q269.40 198.20 265.90 193.90Q262.40 189.60 261.10 183.20Q259.80 176.80 259.80 168.40L259.80 168.40L259.80 124.40ZM333.20 200L333.20 48.80L357.20 48.80L357.20 116.20L357.80 116.20Q359.60 113.80 362.40 111.30Q365.20 108.80 369.20 106.60Q373.20 104.40 378.40 103Q383.60 101.60 390.40 101.60L390.40 101.60Q400.60 101.60 409.20 105.50Q417.80 109.40 423.90 116.20Q430 123 433.40 132.20Q436.80 141.40 436.80 152L436.80 152Q436.80 162.60 433.60 171.80Q430.40 181 424.20 187.80Q418 194.60 409.20 198.50Q400.40 202.40 389.40 202.40L389.40 202.40Q379.20 202.40 370.40 198.40Q361.60 194.40 356.40 185.60L356.40 185.60L356 185.60L356 200L333.20 200ZM412.80 152L412.80 152Q412.80 146.40 410.90 141.20Q409 136 405.30 132Q401.60 128 396.40 125.60Q391.20 123.20 384.60 123.20L384.60 123.20Q378 123.20 372.80 125.60Q367.60 128 363.90 132Q360.20 136 358.30 141.20Q356.40 146.40 356.40 152L356.40 152Q356.40 157.60 358.30 162.80Q360.20 168 363.90 172Q367.60 176 372.80 178.40Q378 180.80 384.60 180.80L384.60 180.80Q391.20 180.80 396.40 178.40Q401.60 176 405.30 172Q409 168 410.90 162.80Q412.80 157.60 412.80 152ZM458.40 152L458.40 152Q458.40 140.60 462.50 131.30Q466.60 122 473.60 115.40Q480.60 108.80 490.20 105.20Q499.80 101.60 510.60 101.60L510.60 101.60Q521.40 101.60 531 105.20Q540.60 108.80 547.60 115.40Q554.60 122 558.70 131.30Q562.80 140.60 562.80 152L562.80 152Q562.80 163.40 558.70 172.70Q554.60 182 547.60 188.60Q540.60 195.20 531 198.80Q521.40 202.40 510.60 202.40L510.60 202.40Q499.80 202.40 490.20 198.80Q480.60 195.20 473.60 188.60Q466.60 182 462.50 172.70Q458.40 163.40 458.40 152ZM482.40 152L482.40 152Q482.40 157.60 484.30 162.80Q486.20 168 489.90 172Q493.60 176 498.80 178.40Q504 180.80 510.60 180.80L510.60 180.80Q517.20 180.80 522.40 178.40Q527.60 176 531.30 172Q535 168 536.90 162.80Q538.80 157.60 538.80 152L538.80 152Q538.80 146.40 536.90 141.20Q535 136 531.30 132Q527.60 128 522.40 125.60Q517.20 123.20 510.60 123.20L510.60 123.20Q504 123.20 498.80 125.60Q493.60 128 489.90 132Q486.20 136 484.30 141.20Q482.40 146.40 482.40 152ZM575.40 200L614 148.40L580.80 104L610 104L629.20 132.80L650 104L677.40 104L644.60 148.40L683.20 200L654 200L629 165.60L603.80 200L575.40 200Z"/>
+  </g>
+</svg>

docs/release-notes/index.md

@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+version-2.7.md

docs/release-notes/version-1.0.md

@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+# v1.0.7-r1 (2016-07-05)
+
+* [#199](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/199) - Correct IP address validation
+
+---
+
+# v1.0.7 (2016-06-30)
+
+**Note:** If upgrading from a previous release, be sure to run ./upgrade.sh after downloading the new code.
+* [#135](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/135) - Fixed display of navigation menu on mobile screens
+* [#141](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/141) - Fixed rendering of "getting started" guide
+* Modified upgrade.sh to use sudo for pip installations
+* [#109](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/109) - Hide the navigation menu from anonymous users if login is required
+* [#143](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/143) - Add help_text to Device.position
+* [#136](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/136) - Prefixes which have host bits set will trigger an error instead of being silently corrected
+* [#140](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/140) - Improved support for Unicode in object names
+
+---
+
+# v1.0.0 (2016-06-27)
+
+NetBox was originally developed internally at DigitalOcean by the network development team. This release marks the debut of NetBox as an open source project.

docs/release-notes/version-1.1.md

@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+# v1.1.0 (2016-07-07)
+
+## New Features
+
+* [#107](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/pull/107) - Docker support
+* [#91](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/91) - Support for subdevices within a device
+* [#170](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/pull/170) - Added MAC address field to interfaces
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#169](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/169) - Fix rendering of cancellation URL when editing objects
+* [#183](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/183) - Ignore vi swap files
+* [#209](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/209) - Corrected error when not confirming component template deletions
+* [#214](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/214) - Fixed redundant message on bulk interface creation
+* [#68](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/68) - Improved permissions-related error reporting for secrets

docs/release-notes/version-1.2.md

@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+# v1.2.2 (2016-07-14)
+
+## Improvements
+
+* [#174](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/174) - Added search and site filter to provider list
+* [#270](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/270) - Added the ability to filter devices by rack group
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#115](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/115) - Fix deprecated django.core.context_processors reference
+* [#268](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/268) - Added support for entire 32-bit ASN space
+* [#282](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/282) - De-select "all" checkbox if one or more objects are deselected
+* [#290](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/290) - Always display management interfaces for a device type (even if `is_network_device` is not set)
+
+---
+
+# v1.2.1 (2016-07-13)
+
+**Note:** This release introduces a new dependency ([natsort](https://pypi.python.org/pypi/natsort)). Be sure to run `upgrade.sh` if upgrading from a previous release.
+
+## Improvements
+
+* [#285](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/285) - Added the ability to prefer IPv4 over IPv6 for primary device IPs
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#243](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/243) - Improved ordering of device object lists
+* [#271](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/271) - Fixed primary_ip bug in secrets API
+* [#274](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/274) - Fixed primary_ip bug in DCIM admin UI
+* [#275](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/275) - Fixed bug preventing the expansion of an existing aggregate
+
+---
+
+# v1.2.0 (2016-07-12)
+
+## New Features
+
+* [#73](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/73) - Added optional persistent banner
+* [#93](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/73) - Ability to set both IPv4 and IPv6 primary IPs for devices
+* [#203](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/203) - Introduced support for LDAP
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#162](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/228) - Fixed support for Unicode characters in rack/device/VLAN names
+* [#228](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/228) - Corrected conditional inclusion of device bay templates
+* [#246](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/246) - Corrected Docker build instructions
+* [#260](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/260) - Fixed error on admin UI device type list
+* Miscellaneous layout improvements for mobile devices

docs/release-notes/version-1.3.md

@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+# v1.3.2 (2016-07-26)
+
+## Improvements
+
+* [#292](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/292) - Added part_number field to DeviceType
+* [#363](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/363) - Added a description field to the VLAN model
+* [#374](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/374) - Increased VLAN name length to 64 characters
+* Enabled bulk deletion of interfaces from devices
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#359](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/359) - Corrected the DCIM API endpoint for finding related connections
+* [#370](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/370) - Notify user when secret decryption fails
+* [#381](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/381) - Fix 'u_consumed' error on rack import
+* [#384](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/384) - Fixed description field's maximum length on IPAM bulk edit forms
+* [#385](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/385) - Fixed error when deleting a user with one or more associated UserActions
+
+---
+
+# v1.3.1 (2016-07-21)
+
+## Improvements
+
+* [#258](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/258) - Add an API endpoint to list interface connections
+* [#303](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/303) - Improved numeric ordering of sites, racks, and devices
+* [#304](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/304) - Display utilization percentage on rack list
+* [#327](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/327) - Disable rack assignment for installed child devices
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#331](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/331) - Add group field to VLAN bulk edit form
+* Miscellaneous improvements to Unicode handling
+
+---
+
+# v1.3.0 (2016-07-18)
+
+## New Features
+
+* [#42](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/42) - Allow assignment of VLAN on prefix import
+* [#43](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/43) - Toggling of IP space uniqueness within a VRF
+* [#111](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/111) - Introduces VLAN groups
+* [#227](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/227) - Support for bulk import of child devices
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#301](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/301) - Prevent deletion of DeviceBay when installed device is deleted
+* [#306](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/306) - Fixed device import to allow an unspecified rack face
+* [#307](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/307) - Catch `RelatedObjectDoesNotExist` when an invalid device type is defined during device import
+* [#308](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/308) - Update rack assignment for all child devices when moving a parent device
+* [#311](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/311) - Fix assignment of primary_ip on IP address import
+* [#317](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/317) - Rack elevation display fix for device types greater than 42U in height
+* [#320](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/320) - Disallow import of prefixes with host masks
+* [#322](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/320) - Corrected VLAN import behavior

docs/release-notes/version-1.4.md

@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+# v1.4.2 (2016-08-06)
+
+## Improvements
+
+* [#167](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/167) - Added new interface form factors
+* [#253](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/253) - Added new interface form factors
+* [#434](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/434) - Restored admin UI access to user action history (however bulk deletion is disabled)
+* [#435](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/435) - Added an "add prefix" button to the VLAN view
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#425](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/425) - Ignore leading and trailing periods when generating a slug
+* [#427](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/427) - Prevent error when duplicate IPs are present in a prefix's IP list
+* [#429](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/429) - Correct redirection of user when adding a secret to a device
+
+---
+
+# v1.4.1 (2016-08-03)
+
+## Improvements
+
+* [#289](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/289) - Annotate available ranges in prefix IP list
+* [#412](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/412) - Tenant group assignment is no longer mandatory
+* [#422](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/422) - CSV import now supports double-quoting values which contain commas
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#395](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/395) - Show child prefixes from all VRFs if the parent belongs to the global table
+* [#406](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/406) - Fixed circuit list rendring when filtering on port speed or commit rate
+* [#409](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/409) - Filter IPs and prefixes by tenant slug rather than by its PK
+* [#411](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/411) - Corrected title of secret roles view
+* [#419](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/419) - Fixed a potential database performance issue when gathering tenant statistics
+
+---
+
+# v1.4.0 (2016-08-01)
+
+## New Features
+
+### Multitenancy ([#16](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/16))
+
+NetBox now supports tenants and tenant groups. Sites, racks, devices, VRFs, prefixes, IP addresses, VLANs, and circuits can be assigned to tenants to track the allocation of these resources among customers or internal departments. If a prefix or IP address does not have a tenant assigned, it will fall back to the tenant assigned to its parent VRF (where applicable).
+
+## Improvements
+
+* [#176](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/176) - Introduced seed data for new installs
+* [#358](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/358) - Improved search for all objects
+* [#394](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/394) - Improved VRF selection during bulk editing of prefixes and IP addresses
+* Miscellaneous cosmetic improvements to the UI
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#392](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/392) - Don't include child devices in non-racked devices table
+* [#397](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/397) - Only include child IPs which belong to the same VRF as the parent prefix

docs/release-notes/version-1.5.md

@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+# v1.5.2 (2016-08-16)
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#460](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/460) - Corrected ordering of IP addresses with differing prefix lengths
+* [#463](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/463) - Prevent pre-population of livesearch field with '---------'
+* [#467](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/467) - Include prefixes and IPs which inherit tenancy from their VRF in tenant stats
+* [#468](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/468) - Don't allow connected interfaces to be changed to the "virtual" form factor
+* [#469](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/469) - Added missing import buttons to list views
+* [#472](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/472) - Hide the connection button for interfaces which have a circuit terminated to them
+
+---
+
+# v1.5.1 (2016-08-11)
+
+## Improvements
+
+* [#421](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/421) - Added an asset tag field to devices
+* [#456](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/456) - Added IP search box to home page
+* Colorized rack and device roles
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#454](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/454) - Corrected error on rack export
+* [#457](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/457) - Added role field to rack edit form
+
+---
+
+# v1.5.0 (2016-08-10)
+
+## New Features
+
+### Rack Enhancements ([#180](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/180), [#241](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/241))
+
+Like devices, racks can now be assigned to functional roles. This allows users to group racks by designated function as well as by physical location (rack groups). Additionally, rack can now have a defined rail-to-rail width (19 or 23 inches) and a type (two-post-rack, cabinet, etc.).
+
+## Improvements
+
+* [#149](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/149) - Added discrete upstream speed field for circuits
+* [#157](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/157) - Added manufacturer field for device modules
+* We have a logo!
+* Upgraded to Django 1.10
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#433](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/433) - Corrected form validation when editing child devices
+* [#442](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/442) - Corrected child device import instructions
+* [#443](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/443) - Correctly display and initialize VRF for creation of new IP addresses
+* [#444](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/444) - Corrected prefix model validation
+* [#445](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/445) - Limit rack height to between 1U and 100U (inclusive)

docs/release-notes/version-1.6.md

@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+# v1.6.3 (2016-10-19)
+
+## Improvements
+
+* [#353](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/353) - Bulk editing of device and device type interfaces
+* [#527](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/527) - Support for nullification of fields when bulk editing
+* [#592](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/592) - Allow space-delimited lists of ALLOWED_HOSTS in Docker
+* [#608](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/608) - Added "select all" button for device and device type components
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#602](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/602) - Correct display of custom integer fields with value of 0 or 1
+* [#604](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/604) - Correct display of unnamed devices in form selection fields
+* [#611](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/611) - Power/console/interface connection import: status field should be case-insensitive
+* [#615](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/615) - Account for BASE_PATH in static URLs and during login
+* [#616](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/616) - Correct display of custom URL fields
+
+---
+
+# v1.6.2-r1 (2016-10-04)
+
+## Improvements
+
+* [#212](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/212) - Introduced the `BASE_PATH` configuration setting to allow running NetBox in a URL subdirectory
+* [#345](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/345) - Bulk edit: allow user to select all objects on page or all matching query
+* [#475](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/475) - Display "add" buttons at top and bottom of all device/device type panels
+* [#480](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/480) - Improved layout on mobile devices
+* [#481](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/481) - Require interface creation before trying to assign an IP to a device
+* [#575](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/575) - Allow all valid URL schemes in custom fields
+* [#579](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/579) - Add a description field to export templates
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#466](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/466) - Validate available free space for all instances when increasing the U height of a device type
+* [#571](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/571) - Correct rack group filter on device list
+* [#576](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/576) - Delete all relevant CustomFieldValues when deleting a CustomFieldChoice
+* [#581](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/581) - Correct initialization of custom boolean and select fields
+* [#591](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/591) - Correct display of component creation buttons in device type view
+
+---
+
+# v1.6.1-r1 (2016-09-21)
+
+## Improvements
+* [#415](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/415) - Add an expand/collapse toggle button to the prefix list
+* [#552](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/552) - Allow filtering on custom select fields by "none"
+* [#561](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/561) - Make custom fields accessible from within export templates
+
+## Bug Fixes
+* [#493](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/493) - CSV import support for UTF-8
+* [#531](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/531) - Order prefix list by VRF assignment
+* [#542](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/542) - Add LDAP support in Docker
+* [#557](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/557) - Add 'global' choice to VRF filter for prefixes and IP addresses
+* [#558](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/558) - Update slug field when name is populated without a key press
+* [#562](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/562) - Fixed bulk interface creation
+* [#564](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/564) - Display custom fields for all applicable objects
+
+---
+
+# v1.6.0 (2016-09-13)
+
+## New Features
+
+### Custom Fields ([#129](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/129))
+
+Users can now create custom fields to associate arbitrary data with core NetBox objects. For example, you might want to add a geolocation tag to IP prefixes, or a ticket number to each device. Text, integer, boolean, date, URL, and selection fields are supported.
+
+## Improvements
+
+* [#489](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/489) - Docker file now builds from a `python:2.7-wheezy` base instead of `ubuntu:14.04`
+* [#540](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/540) - Add links for VLAN roles under VLAN navigation menu
+* Added new interface form factors
+* Added address family filters to aggregate and prefix lists
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#476](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/476) - Corrected rack import instructions
+* [#484](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/484) - Allow bulk deletion of >1K objects
+* [#486](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/486) - Prompt for secret key only if updating a secret's value
+* [#490](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/490) - Corrected display of circuit commit rate
+* [#495](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/495) - Include tenant in prefix and IP CSV export
+* [#507](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/507) - Corrected rendering of nav menu on screens narrower than 1200px
+* [#515](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/515) - Clarified instructions for the "face" field when importing devices
+* [#522](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/522) - Remove obsolete check for staff status when bulk deleting objects
+* [#544](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/544) - Strip CRLF-style line terminators from rendered export templates

docs/release-notes/version-1.7.md

@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+# v1.7.3 (2016-12-08)
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#724](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/724) - Exempt API views from LoginRequiredMiddleware to enable basic HTTP authentication when LOGIN_REQUIRED is true
+* [#729](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/729) - Corrected cancellation links when editing secondary objects
+* [#732](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/732) - Allow custom select field values to be deselected if the field is not required
+* [#733](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/733) - Fixed MAC address filter on device list
+* [#734](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/734) - Corrected display of device type when editing a device
+
+---
+
+# v1.7.2-r1 (2016-12-06)
+
+## Improvements
+
+* [#663](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/663) - Added MAC address search field to device list
+* [#672](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/672) - Increased the selection of available colors for rack and device roles
+* [#695](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/695) - Added is_private field to RIR
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#677](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/677) - Fix setuptools installation error on Debian 8.6
+* [#696](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/696) - Corrected link to VRF in prefix and IP address breadcrumbs
+* [#702](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/702) - Improved Unicode support for custom fields
+* [#712](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/712) - Corrected export of tenants which are not assigned to a group
+* [#713](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/713) - Include a label for the comments field when editing circuits, providers, or racks in bulk
+* [#718](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/718) - Restore is_primary field on IP assignment form
+* [#723](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/723) - API documentation is now accessible when using BASE_PATH
+* [#727](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/727) - Corrected error in rack elevation display (v1.7.2)
+
+---
+
+# v1.7.1 (2016-11-15)
+
+## Improvements
+
+* [#667](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/667) - Added prefix utilization statistics to the RIR list view
+* [#685](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/685) - When assigning an IP to a device, automatically select the interface if only one exists
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#674](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/674) - Fix assignment of status to imported IP addresses
+* [#676](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/676) - Server error when bulk editing device types
+* [#678](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/678) - Server error on device import specifying an invalid device type
+* [#691](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/691) - Allow the assignment of power ports to PDUs
+* [#692](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/692) - Form errors are not displayed on checkbox fields
+
+---
+
+# v1.7.0 (2016-11-03)
+
+## New Features
+
+### IP address statuses ([#87](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/87))
+
+An IP address can now be designated as active, reserved, or DHCP. The DHCP status implies that the IP address is part of a DHCP pool and may or may not be assigned to a DHCP client.
+
+### Top-to-bottom rack numbering ([#191](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/191))
+
+Racks can now be set to have descending rack units, with U1 at the top of the rack. When adding a device to a rack with descending units, be sure to position it in the **lowest-numbered** unit which it occupies (this will be physically the topmost unit).
+
+## Improvements
+* [#211](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/211) - Allow device assignment and removal from IP address view
+* [#630](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/630) - Added a custom 404 page
+* [#652](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/652) - Use password input controls when editing secrets
+* [#654](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/654) - Added Cisco FlexStack and FlexStack Plus form factors
+* [#661](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/661) - Display relevant IP addressing when viewing a circuit
+
+## Bug Fixes
+* [#632](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/632) - Use semicolons instead of commas to separate regexes in topology maps
+* [#647](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/647) - Extend form used when assigning an IP to a device
+* [#657](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/657) - Unicode error when adding device modules
+* [#660](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/660) - Corrected calculation of utilized space in rack list
+* [#664](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/664) - Fixed bulk creation of interfaces across multiple devices

docs/release-notes/version-1.8.md

@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+# v1.8.4 (2017-02-03)
+
+## Improvements
+
+* [#856](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/856) - Strip whitespace from fields during CSV import
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#851](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/851) - Resolve encoding issues during import/export (Python 3)
+* [#854](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/854) - Correct processing of get_return_url() in ObjectDeleteView
+* [#859](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/859) - Fix Javascript for connection status toggle button on device view
+* [#861](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/861) - Avoid overwriting device primary IP assignment from alternate family during bulk import of IP addresses
+* [#865](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/865) - Fix server error when attempting to delete a protected object parent (Python 3)
+
+---
+
+# v1.8.3 (2017-01-26)
+
+## Improvements
+
+* [#782](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/782) - Allow filtering devices list by manufacturer
+* [#820](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/820) - Add VLAN column to parent prefixes table on IP address view
+* [#821](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/821) - Support for comma separation in bulk IP/interface creation
+* [#827](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/827) - **Introduced support for Python 3**
+* [#836](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/836) - Add "deprecated" status for IP addresses
+* [#841](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/841) - Merged search and filter forms on all object lists
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#816](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/816) - Redirect back to parent prefix view after deleting child prefixes termination
+* [#817](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/817) - Update last_updated time of a circuit when editing a child termination
+* [#830](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/830) - Redirect user to device view after editing a device component
+* [#840](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/840) - Correct API path resolution for secrets when BASE_PATH is configured
+* [#844](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/844) - Apply order_naturally() to API interfaces list
+* [#845](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/845) - Fix missing edit/delete buttons on object tables for non-superusers
+
+---
+
+# v1.8.2 (2017-01-18)
+
+## Improvements
+
+* [#284](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/284) - Enabled toggling of interface display order per device type
+* [#760](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/760) - Redirect user back to device view after deleting an assigned IP address
+* [#783](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/783) - Add a description field to the Circuit model
+* [#797](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/797) - Add description column to VLANs table
+* [#803](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/803) - Clarify that no child objects are deleted when deleting a prefix
+* [#805](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/805) - Linkify site column in device table
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#776](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/776) - Prevent circuits from appearing twice while searching
+* [#778](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/778) - Corrected an issue preventing multiple interfaces with the same position ID from appearing in a device's interface list
+* [#785](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/785) - Trigger validation error when importing a prefix assigned to a nonexistent VLAN
+* [#802](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/802) - Fixed enforcement of ENFORCE_GLOBAL_UNIQUE for prefixes
+* [#807](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/807) - Redirect user back to form when adding IP addresses in bulk and "create and add another" is clicked
+* [#810](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/810) - Suppress unique IP validation on invalid IP addresses and prefixes
+
+---
+
+# v1.8.1 (2017-01-04)
+
+## Improvements
+
+* [#771](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/771) - Don't automatically redirect user when only one object is returned in a list
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#764](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/764) - Encapsulate in double quotes values containing commas when exporting to CSV
+* [#767](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/767) - Fixes xconnect_id error when searching for circuits
+* [#769](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/769) - Show default value for boolean custom fields
+* [#772](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/772) - Fixes TypeError in API RackUnitListView when no device is excluded
+
+---
+
+# v1.8.0 (2017-01-03)
+
+## New Features
+
+### Point-to-Point Circuits ([#49](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/49))
+
+Until now, NetBox has supported tracking only one end of a data circuit. This is fine for Internet connections where you don't care (or know) much about the provider side of the circuit, but many users need the ability to track inter-site circuits as well. This release expands circuit modeling so that each circuit can have an A and/or Z side. Each endpoint must be terminated to a site, and may optionally be terminated to a specific device and interface within that site.
+
+### L4 Services ([#539](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/539))
+
+Our first major community contribution introduces the ability to track discrete TCP and UDP services associated with a device (for example, SSH or HTTP). Each service can optionally be assigned to one or more specific IP addresses belonging to the device. Thanks to [@if-fi](https://github.com/if-fi) for the addition!
+
+## Improvements
+
+* [#122](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/122) - Added comments field to device types
+* [#181](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/181) - Implemented support for bulk IP address creation
+* [#613](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/613) - Added prefixes column to VLAN list; added VLAN column to prefix list
+* [#716](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/716) - Add ASN field to site bulk edit form
+* [#722](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/722) - Enabled custom fields for device types
+* [#743](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/743) - Enabled bulk creation of all device components
+* [#756](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/756) - Added contact details to site model
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#563](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/563) - Allow a device to be flipped from one rack face to the other without moving it
+* [#658](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/658) - Enabled conditional treatment of network/broadcast IPs for a prefix by defining it as a pool
+* [#741](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/741) - Hide "select all" button for users without edit permissions
+* [#744](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/744) - Fixed export of sites without an AS number
+* [#747](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/747) - Fixed natural_order_by integer cast error on large numbers
+* [#751](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/751) - Fixed python-cryptography installation issue on Debian
+* [#763](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/763) - Added missing fields to CSV exports for racks and prefixes

docs/release-notes/version-1.9.md

@@ -0,0 +1,136 @@
+# v1.9.6 (2017-04-21)
+
+## Improvements
+
+* [#878](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/878) - Merged IP addresses with interfaces list on device view
+* [#1001](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1001) - Interface assignment can be modified when editing an IP address
+* [#1084](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1084) - Include custom fields when creating IP addresses in bulk
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1057](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1057) - Corrected VLAN validation during prefix import
+* [#1061](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1061) - Fixed potential for script injection via create/edit/delete messages
+* [#1070](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1070) - Corrected installation instructions for Python3 on CentOS/RHEL
+* [#1071](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1071) - Protect assigned circuit termination when an interface is deleted
+* [#1072](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1072) - Order LAG interfaces naturally on bulk interface edit form
+* [#1074](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1074) - Require ncclient 0.5.3 (Python 3 fix)
+* [#1090](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1090) - Improved installation documentation for Python 3
+* [#1092](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1092) - Increase randomness in SECRET_KEY generation tool
+
+---
+
+# v1.9.5 (2017-04-06)
+
+## Improvements
+
+* [#1052](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1052) - Added rack reservation list and bulk delete views
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1038](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1038) - Suppress upgrading to Django 1.11 (will be supported in v2.0)
+* [#1037](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1037) - Fixed error on VLAN import with duplicate VLAN group names
+* [#1047](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1047) - Correct ordering of numbered subinterfaces
+* [#1051](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1051) - Upgraded django-rest-swagger
+
+---
+
+# v1.9.4-r1 (2017-04-04)
+
+## Improvements
+
+* [#362](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/362) - Added per_page query parameter to control pagination page length
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#991](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/991) - Correct server error on "create and connect another" interface connection
+* [#1022](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1022) - Record user actions when creating IP addresses in bulk
+* [#1027](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1027) - Fixed nav menu highlighting when BASE_PATH is set
+* [#1034](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1034) - Added migration missing from v1.9.4 release
+
+---
+
+# v1.9.3 (2017-03-23)
+
+## Improvements
+
+* [#972](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/972) - Add ability to filter connections list by device name
+* [#974](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/974) - Added MAC address filter to API interfaces list
+* [#978](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/978) - Allow filtering device types by function and subdevice role
+* [#981](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/981) - Allow filtering primary objects by a given set of IDs
+* [#983](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/983) - Include peer device names when listing circuits in device view
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#967](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/967) - Fix error when assigning a new interface to a LAG
+
+---
+
+# v1.9.2 (2017-03-14)
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#950](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/950) - Fix site_id error on child device import
+* [#956](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/956) - Correct bug affecting unnamed rackless devices
+* [#957](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/957) - Correct device site filter count to include unracked devices
+* [#963](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/963) - Fix bug in IPv6 address range expansion
+* [#964](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/964) - Fix bug when bulk editing/deleting filtered set of objects
+
+---
+
+# v1.9.1 (2017-03-08)
+
+## Improvements
+
+* [#945](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/945) - Display the current user in the navigation menu
+* [#946](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/946) - Disregard mask length when filtering IP addresses by a parent prefix
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#941](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/941) - Corrected old references to rack.site on Device
+* [#943](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/943) - Child prefixes missing on Python 3
+* [#944](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/944) - Corrected console and power connection form behavior
+* [#948](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/948) - Region name should be hyperlinked to site list
+
+---
+
+# v1.9.0-r1 (2017-03-03)
+
+## New Features
+
+### Rack Reservations ([#36](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/36))
+
+Users can now reserve an arbitrary number of units within a rack, adding a comment noting their intentions. Reservations do not interfere with installed devices: It is possible to reserve a unit for future use even if it is currently occupied by a device.
+
+### Interface Groups ([#105](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/105))
+
+A new Link Aggregation Group (LAG) virtual form factor has been added. Physical interfaces can be assigned to a parent LAG interface to represent a port-channel or similar logical bundling of links.
+
+### Regions ([#164](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/164))
+
+A new region model has been introduced to allow for the geographic organization of sites. Regions can be nested recursively to form a hierarchy.
+
+### Rackless Devices ([#198](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/198))
+
+Previous releases required each device to be assigned to a particular rack within a site. This requirement has been relaxed so that devices must only be assigned to a site, and may optionally be assigned to a rack.
+
+### Global VLANs ([#235](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/235))
+
+Assignment of VLANs and VLAN groups to sites is now optional, allowing for the representation of a VLAN spanning multiple sites.
+
+## Improvements
+
+* [#862](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/862) - Show both IPv6 and IPv4 primary IPs in device list
+* [#894](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/894) - Expand device name max length to 64 characters
+* [#898](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/898) - Expanded circuits list in provider view rack face
+* [#901](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/901) - Support for filtering prefixes and IP addresses by mask length
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#872](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/872) - Fixed TypeError on bulk IP address creation (Python 3)
+* [#884](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/884) - Preserve selected rack unit when changing a device's rack face
+* [#892](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/892) - Restored missing edit/delete buttons when viewing child prefixes and IP addresses from a parent object
+* [#897](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/897) - Fixed power connections CSV export
+* [#903](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/903) - Only alert on missing critical connections if present in the parent device type
+* [#935](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/935) - Fix form validation error when connecting an interface using live search
+* [#937](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/937) - Region assignment should be optional when creating a site
+* [#938](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/938) - Provider view yields an error if one or more circuits is assigned to a tenant

docs/release-notes/version-2.0.md

@@ -0,0 +1,230 @@
+# v2.0.10 (2017-07-14)
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1312](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1312) - Catch error when attempting to activate a user key with an invalid private key
+* [#1333](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1333) - Corrected label on is_console_server field of DeviceType bulk edit form
+* [#1338](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1338) - Allow importing prefixes with "container" status
+* [#1339](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1339) - Fixed disappearing checkbox column under django-tables2 v1.7+
+* [#1342](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1342) - Allow designation of users and groups when creating/editing a secret role
+
+---
+
+# v2.0.9 (2017-07-10)
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1319](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1319) - Fixed server error when attempting to create console/power connections
+* [#1325](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1325) - Retain interface attachment when editing a circuit termination
+
+---
+
+# v2.0.8 (2017-07-05)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#1298](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1298) - Calculate prefix utilization based on its status (container or non-container)
+* [#1303](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1303) - Highlight installed interface connections in green on device view
+* [#1315](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1315) - Enforce lowercase file extensions for image attachments
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1279](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1279) - Fix primary_ip assignment during IP address import
+* [#1281](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1281) - Show LLDP neighbors tab on device view only if necessary conditions are met
+* [#1282](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1282) - Fixed tooltips on "mark connected/planned" toggle buttons for device connections
+* [#1288](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1288) - Corrected permission name for deleting image attachments
+* [#1289](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1289) - Retain inside NAT assignment when editing an IP address
+* [#1297](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1297) - Allow passing custom field choice selection PKs to API as string-quoted integers
+* [#1299](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1299) - Corrected permission name for adding services to devices
+
+---
+
+# v2.0.7 (2017-06-15)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#626](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/626) - Added bulk disconnect function for console/power/interface connections on device view
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1238](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1238) - Fix error when editing an IP with a NAT assignment which has no assigned device
+* [#1263](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1263) - Differentiate add and edit permissions for objects
+* [#1265](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1265) - Fix console/power/interface connection validation when selecting a device via live search
+* [#1266](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1266) - Prevent terminating a circuit to an already-connected interface
+* [#1268](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1268) - Fix CSV import error under Python 3
+* [#1273](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1273) - Corrected status choices in IP address import form
+* [#1274](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1274) - Exclude unterminated circuits from topology maps
+* [#1275](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1275) - Raise validation error on prefix import when multiple VLANs are found
+
+---
+
+# v2.0.6 (2017-06-12)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#40](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/40) - Added IP utilization graph to prefix list
+* [#704](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/704) - Allow filtering VLANs by group when editing prefixes
+* [#913](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/913) - Added headers to object CSV exports
+* [#990](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/990) - Enable logging configuration in configuration.py
+* [#1180](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1180) - Simplified the process of finding related devices when viewing a device
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1253](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1253) - Improved `upgrade.sh` to allow forcing Python2
+
+---
+
+# v2.0.5 (2017-06-08)
+
+## Notes
+
+The maximum number of objects an API consumer can request has been set to 1000 (e.g. `?limit=1000`). This limit can be modified by defining `MAX_PAGE_SIZE` in confgiuration.py. (To remove this limit, set `MAX_PAGE_SIZE=0`.)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#655](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/655) - Implemented header-based CSV import of objects
+* [#1190](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1190) - Allow partial string matching when searching on custom fields
+* [#1237](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1237) - Enabled setting limit=0 to disable pagination in API requests; added `MAX_PAGE_SIZE` configuration setting
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#837](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/837) - Enforce uniqueness where applicable during bulk import of IP addresses
+* [#1226](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1226) - Improved validation for custom field values submitted via the API
+* [#1232](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1232) - Improved rack space validation on bulk import of devices (see #655)
+* [#1235](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1235) - Fix permission name for adding/editing inventory items
+* [#1236](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1236) - Truncate rack names in elevations list; add facility ID
+* [#1239](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1239) - Fix server error when creating VLANGroup via API
+* [#1243](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1243) - Catch ValueError in IP-based object filters
+* [#1244](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1244) - Corrected "device" secrets filter to accept a device name
+
+---
+
+# v2.0.4 (2017-05-25)
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1206](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1206) - Fix redirection in admin UI after activating secret keys when BASE_PATH is set
+* [#1207](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1207) - Include nested LAG serializer when showing interface connections (API)
+* [#1210](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1210) - Fix TemplateDoesNotExist errors on browsable API views
+* [#1212](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1212) - Allow assigning new VLANs to global VLAN groups
+* [#1213](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1213) - Corrected table header ordering links on object list views
+* [#1214](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1214) - Add status to list of required fields on child device import form
+* [#1219](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1219) - Fix image attachment URLs when BASE_PATH is set
+* [#1220](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1220) - Suppressed innocuous warning about untracked migrations under Python 3
+* [#1229](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1229) - Fix validation error on forms where API search is used
+
+---
+
+# v2.0.3 (2017-05-18)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#1196](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1196) - Added a lag_id filter to the API interfaces view
+* [#1198](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1198) - Allow filtering unracked devices on device list
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1157](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1157) - Hide nav menu search bar on small displays
+* [#1186](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1186) - Corrected VLAN edit form so that site assignment is not required
+* [#1187](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1187) - Fixed table pagination by introducing a custom table template
+* [#1188](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1188) - Serialize interface LAG as nested objected (API)
+* [#1189](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1189) - Enforce consistent ordering of objects returned by a global search
+* [#1191](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1191) - Bulk selection of IPs under a prefix incorrect when "select all" is used
+* [#1195](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1195) - Unable to create an interface connection when searching for peer device
+* [#1197](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1197) - Fixed status assignment during bulk import of devices, prefixes, IPs, and VLANs
+* [#1199](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1199) - Bulk import of secrets does not prompt user to generate a session key
+* [#1200](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1200) - Form validation error when connecting power ports to power outlets
+
+---
+
+# v2.0.2 (2017-05-15)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#1122](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1122) - Include NAT inside IPs in IP address list
+* [#1137](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1137) - Allow filtering devices list by rack
+* [#1170](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1170) - Include A and Z sites for circuits in global search results
+* [#1172](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1172) - Linkify racks in side-by-side elevations view
+* [#1177](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1177) - Render planned connections as dashed lines on topology maps
+* [#1179](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1179) - Adjust topology map text color based on node background
+* On all object edit forms, allow filtering the tenant list by tenant group
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1158](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1158) - Exception thrown when creating a device component with an invalid name
+* [#1159](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1159) - Only superusers can see "edit IP" buttons on the device interfaces list
+* [#1160](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1160) - Linkify secrets and tenants in global search results
+* [#1161](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1161) - Fix "add another" behavior when creating an API token
+* [#1166](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1166) - Fixed bulk IP address creation when assigning tenants
+* [#1168](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1168) - Total count of objects missing from list view paginator
+* [#1171](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1171) - Allow removing site assignment when bulk editing VLANs
+* [#1173](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1173) - Tweak interface manager to fall back to naive ordering
+
+---
+
+# v2.0.1 (2017-05-10)
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1149](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1149) - Port list does not populate when creating a console or power connection
+* [#1150](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1150) - Error when uploading image attachments with Unicode names under Python 2
+* [#1151](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1151) - Server error: name 'escape' is not defined
+* [#1152](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1152) - Unable to edit user keys
+* [#1153](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1153) - UnicodeEncodeError when searching for non-ASCII characters on Python 2
+
+---
+
+# v2.0.0 (2017-05-09)
+
+## New Features
+
+### API 2.0 ([#113](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/113))
+
+The NetBox API has been completely rewritten and now features full read/write ability.
+
+### Image Attachments ([#152](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/152))
+
+Users are now able to attach photos and other images to sites, racks, and devices. (Please ensure that the new `media` directory is writable by the system account NetBox runs as.)
+
+### Global Search ([#159](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/159))
+
+NetBox now supports searching across all primary object types at once.
+
+### Rack Elevations View ([#951](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/951))
+
+A new view has been introduced to display the elevations of multiple racks side-by-side.
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#154](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/154) - Expanded device status field to include options other than active/offline
+* [#430](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/430) - Include circuits when rendering topology maps
+* [#578](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/578) - Show topology maps not assigned to a site on the home view
+* [#1100](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1100) - Add a "view all" link to completed bulk import views is_pool for prefixes)
+* [#1110](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1110) - Expand bulk edit forms to include boolean fields (e.g. toggle is_pool for prefixes)
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+From v1.9.6:
+
+* [#403](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/403) - Record console/power/interface connects and disconnects as user actions
+* [#853](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/853) -  Added "status" field to device bulk import form
+* [#1101](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1101) - Fix AJAX scripting for device component selection forms
+* [#1103](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1103) - Correct handling of validation errors when creating IP addresses in bulk
+* [#1104](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1104) - Fix VLAN assignment on prefix import
+* [#1115](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1115) - Enabled responsive (side-scrolling) tables for small screens
+* [#1116](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1116) - Correct object links on recursive deletion error
+* [#1125](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1125) - Include MAC addresses on a device's interface list
+* [#1144](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1144) - Allow multiple status selections for Prefix, IP address, and VLAN filters
+
+From beta3:
+
+* [#1113](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1113) - Fixed server error when attempting to delete an image attachment
+* [#1114](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1114) - Suppress OSError when attempting to access a deleted image attachment
+* [#1126](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1126) - Fixed server error when editing a user key via admin UI attachment
+* [#1132](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1132) - Prompt user to unlock session key when importing secrets
+
+## Additional Changes
+
+* The Module DCIM model has been renamed to InventoryItem to better reflect its intended function, and to make room for work on [#824](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/824).
+* Redundant portions of the admin UI have been removed ([#973](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/973)).
+* The Docker build components have been moved into [their own repository](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox-docker).

docs/release-notes/version-2.1.md

@@ -0,0 +1,152 @@
+# v2.1.6 (2017-10-11)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#1548](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1548) - Automatically populate tenant assignment when adding an IP address from the prefix view
+* [#1561](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1561) - Added primary IP to the devices table in global search
+* [#1563](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1563) - Made necessary updates for Django REST Framework v3.7.0
+
+---
+
+# v2.1.5 (2017-09-25)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#1484](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1484) - Added individual "add VLAN" buttons on the VLAN groups list
+* [#1485](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1485) - Added `BANNER_LOGIN` configuration setting to display a banner on the login page
+* [#1499](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1499) - Added utilization graph to child prefixes table
+* [#1523](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1523) - Improved the natural ordering of interfaces (thanks to [@tarkatronic](https://github.com/tarkatronic))
+* [#1536](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1536) - Improved formatting of aggregate prefix statistics
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1469](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1469) - Allow a NAT IP to be assigned as the primary IP for a device
+* [#1472](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1472) - Prevented truncation when displaying secret strings containing HTML characters
+* [#1486](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1486) - Ignore subinterface IDs when validating LLDP neighbor connections
+* [#1489](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1489) - Corrected server error on validation of empty required custom field
+* [#1507](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1507) - Fixed error when creating the next available IP from a prefix within a VRF
+* [#1520](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1520) - Redirect on GET request to bulk edit/delete views
+* [#1522](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1522) - Removed object create/edit forms from the browsable API
+
+---
+
+# v2.1.4 (2017-08-30)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#1326](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1326) - Added dropdown widget with common values for circuit speed fields
+* [#1341](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1341) - Added a `MEDIA_ROOT` configuration setting to specify where uploaded files are stored on disk
+* [#1376](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1376) - Ignore anycast addresses when detecting duplicate IPs
+* [#1402](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1402) - Increased max length of name field for device components
+* [#1431](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1431) - Added interface form factor for 10GBASE-CX4
+* [#1432](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1432) - Added a `commit_rate` field to the circuits list search form
+* [#1460](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1460) - Hostnames with no domain are now acceptable in custom URL fields
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1429](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1429) - Fixed uptime formatting on device status page
+* [#1433](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1433) - Fixed `devicetype_id` filter for DeviceType components
+* [#1443](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1443) - Fixed API validation error involving custom field data
+* [#1458](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1458) - Corrected permission name on prefix/VLAN roles list
+
+---
+
+# v2.1.3 (2017-08-15)
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1330](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1330) - Raise validation error when assigning an unrelated IP as the primary IP for a device
+* [#1389](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1389) - Avoid splitting carat/prefix on prefix list
+* [#1400](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1400) - Removed redundant display of assigned device interface from IP address list
+* [#1414](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1414) - Selecting a site from the rack filters automatically updates the available rack groups
+* [#1419](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1419) - Allow editing image attachments without re-uploading an image
+* [#1420](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1420) - Exclude virtual interfaces from device LLDP neighbors view
+* [#1421](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1421) - Improved model validation logic for API serializers
+* Fixed page title capitalization in the browsable API
+
+---
+
+# v2.1.2 (2017-08-04)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#992](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/992) - Allow the creation of multiple services per device with the same protocol and port
+* Tweaked navigation menu styling
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1388](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1388) - Fixed server error when searching globally for IPs/prefixes (rolled back #1379)
+* [#1390](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1390) - Fixed IndexError when viewing available IPs within large IPv6 prefixes
+
+---
+
+# v2.1.1 (2017-08-02)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#893](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/893) - Allow filtering by null values for NullCharacterFields (e.g. return only unnamed devices)
+* [#1368](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1368) - Render reservations in rack elevations view
+* [#1374](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1374) - Added NAPALM_ARGS and NAPALM_TIMEOUT configiuration parameters
+* [#1375](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1375) - Renamed `NETBOX_USERNAME` and `NETBOX_PASSWORD` configuration parameters to `NAPALM_USERNAME` and `NAPALM_PASSWORD`
+* [#1379](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1379) - Allow searching devices by interface MAC address in global search
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#461](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/461) - Display a validation error when attempting to assigning a new child device to a rack face/position
+* [#1385](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1385) - Connected device API endpoint no longer requires authentication if `LOGIN_REQUIRED` is False
+
+---
+
+# v2.1.0 (2017-07-25)
+
+## New Features
+
+### IP Address Roles ([#819](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/819))
+
+The IP address model now supports the assignment of a functional role to help identify special-purpose IPs. These include:
+
+* Loopback
+* Secondary
+* Anycast
+* VIP
+* VRRP
+* HSRP
+* GLBP
+
+### Automatic Provisioning of Next Available IP ([#1246](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1246))
+
+A new API endpoint has been added at `/api/ipam/prefixes/<pk>/available-ips/`. A GET request to this endpoint will return a list of available IP addresses within the prefix (up to the pagination limit). A POST request will automatically create and return the next available IP address.
+
+### NAPALM Integration ([#1348](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1348))
+
+The [NAPALM automation](https://napalm-automation.net/) library provides an abstracted interface for pulling live data (e.g. uptime, software version, running config, LLDP neighbors, etc.) from network devices. The NetBox API has been extended to support executing read-only NAPALM methods on devices defined in NetBox. To enable this functionality, ensure that NAPALM has been installed (`pip install napalm`) and the `NETBOX_USERNAME` and `NETBOX_PASSWORD` [configuration parameters](http://netbox.readthedocs.io/en/stable/configuration/optional-settings/#netbox_username) have been set in configuration.py.
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#838](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/838) - Display details of all objects being edited/deleted in bulk
+* [#1041](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1041) - Added enabled and MTU fields to the interface model
+* [#1121](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1121) - Added asset_tag and description fields to the InventoryItem model
+* [#1141](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1141) - Include RD when listing VRFs in a form selection field
+* [#1203](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1203) - Implemented query filters for all models
+* [#1218](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1218) - Added IEEE 802.11 wireless interface types
+* [#1269](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1269) - Added circuit termination to interface serializer
+* [#1320](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1320) - Removed checkbox from confirmation dialog
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1079](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1079) - Order interfaces naturally via API
+* [#1285](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1285) - Enforce model validation when creating/editing objects via the API
+* [#1358](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1358) - Correct VRF example values in IP/prefix import forms
+* [#1362](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1362) - Raise validation error when attempting to create an API key that's too short
+* [#1371](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1371) - Extend DeviceSerializer.parent_device to include standard fields
+
+## API changes
+
+* Added a new API endpoint which makes [NAPALM](https://github.com/napalm-automation/napalm) accessible via NetBox
+* Device components (console ports, power ports, interfaces, etc.) can only be filtered by a single device name or ID. This limitation was necessary to allow the natural ordering of interfaces according to the device's parent device type.
+* Added two new fields to the interface serializer: `enabled` (boolean) and `mtu` (unsigned integer)
+* Modified the interface serializer to include three discrete fields relating to connections: `is_connected` (boolean), `interface_connection`, and `circuit_termination`
+* Added two new fields to the inventory item serializer: `asset_tag` and `description`
+* Added "wireless" to interface type filter (in addition to physical, virtual, and LAG)
+* Added a new endpoint at /api/ipam/prefixes/<pk>/available-ips/ to retrieve or create available IPs within a prefix
+* Extended `parent_device` on DeviceSerializer to include the `url` and `display_name` of the parent Device, and the `url` of the DeviceBay

docs/release-notes/version-2.2.md

@@ -0,0 +1,225 @@
+# v2.2.10 (2018-02-21)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#78](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/78) - Extended topology maps to support console and power connections
+* [#1693](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1693) - Allow specifying loose or exact matching for custom field filters
+* [#1714](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1714) - Standardized CSV export functionality for all object lists
+* [#1876](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1876) - Added explanatory title text to disabled NAPALM buttons on device view
+* [#1885](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1885) - Added a device filter field for primary IP
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1858](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1858) - Include device/VM count for cluster list in global search results
+* [#1859](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1859) - Implemented support for line breaks within CSV fields
+* [#1860](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1860) - Do not populate initial values for custom fields when editing objects in bulk
+* [#1869](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1869) - Corrected ordering of VRFs with duplicate names
+* [#1886](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1886) - Allow setting the primary IPv4/v6 address for a virtual machine via the web UI
+
+---
+
+# v2.2.9 (2018-01-31)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#144](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/144) - Implemented bulk import/edit/delete views for InventoryItems
+* [#1073](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1073) - Include prefixes/IPs from all VRFs when viewing the children of a container prefix in the global table
+* [#1366](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1366) - Enable searching for regions by name/slug
+* [#1406](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1406) - Display tenant description as title text in object tables
+* [#1824](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1824) - Add virtual machine count to platforms list
+* [#1835](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1835) - Consistent positioning of previous/next rack buttons
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1621](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1621) - Tweaked LLDP interface name evaluation logic
+* [#1765](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1765) - Improved rendering of null options for model choice fields in filter forms
+* [#1807](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1807) - Populate VRF from parent when creating a new prefix
+* [#1809](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1809) - Populate tenant assignment from parent when creating a new prefix
+* [#1818](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1818) - InventoryItem API serializer no longer requires specifying a null value for items with no parent
+* [#1845](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1845) - Correct display of VMs in list with no role assigned
+* [#1850](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1850) - Fix TypeError when attempting IP address import if only unnamed devices exist
+
+---
+
+# v2.2.8 (2017-12-20)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#1771](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1771) - Added name filter for racks
+* [#1772](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1772) - Added position filter for devices
+* [#1773](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1773) - Moved child prefixes table to its own view
+* [#1774](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1774) - Include a button to refine search results for all object types under global search
+* [#1784](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1784) - Added `cluster_type` filters for virtual machines
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1766](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1766) - Fixed display of "select all" button on device power outlets list
+* [#1767](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1767) - Use proper template for 404 responses
+* [#1778](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1778) - Preserve initial VRF assignment when adding IP addresses in bulk from a prefix
+* [#1783](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1783) - Added `vm_role` filter for device roles
+* [#1785](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1785) - Omit filter forms from browsable API
+* [#1787](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1787) - Added missing site field to virtualization cluster CSV export
+
+---
+
+# v2.2.7 (2017-12-07)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#1722](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1722) - Added virtual machine count to site view
+* [#1737](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1737) - Added a `contains` API filter to find all prefixes containing a given IP or prefix
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1712](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1712) - Corrected tenant inheritance for new IP addresses created from a parent prefix
+* [#1721](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1721) - Differentiated child IP count from utilization percentage for prefixes
+* [#1740](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1740) - Delete session_key cookie on logout
+* [#1741](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1741) - Fixed Unicode support for secret plaintexts
+* [#1743](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1743) - Include number of instances for device types in global search
+* [#1751](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1751) - Corrected filtering for IPv6 addresses containing letters
+* [#1756](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1756) - Improved natural ordering of console server ports and power outlets
+
+---
+
+# v2.2.6 (2017-11-16)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#1669](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1669) - Clicking "add an IP" from the prefix view will default to the first available IP within the prefix
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1397](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1397) - Display global search in navigation menu unless display is less than 1200px wide
+* [#1599](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1599) - Reduce mobile cut-off for navigation menu to 960px
+* [#1715](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1715) - Added missing import buttons on object lists
+* [#1717](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1717) - Fixed interface validation for virtual machines
+* [#1718](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1718) - Set empty label to "Global" or VRF field in IP assignment form
+
+---
+
+# v2.2.5 (2017-11-14)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#1512](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1512) - Added a view to search for an IP address being assigned to an interface
+* [#1679](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1679) - Added IP address roles to device/VM interface lists
+* [#1683](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1683) - Replaced default 500 handler with custom middleware to provide preliminary troubleshooting assistance
+* [#1684](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1684) - Replaced prefix `parent` filter with `within` and `within_include`
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1471](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1471) - Correct bulk selection of IP addresses within a prefix assigned to a VRF
+* [#1642](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1642) - Validate device type classification when creating console server ports and power outlets
+* [#1650](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1650) - Correct numeric ordering for interfaces with no alphabetic type
+* [#1676](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1676) - Correct filtering of child prefixes upon bulk edit/delete from the parent prefix view
+* [#1689](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1689) - Disregard IP address mask when filtering for child IPs of a prefix
+* [#1696](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1696) - Fix for NAPALM v2.0+
+* [#1699](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1699) - Correct nested representation in the API of primary IPs for virtual machines and add missing primary_ip property
+* [#1701](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1701) - Fixed validation in `extras/0008_reports.py` migration for certain versions of PostgreSQL
+* [#1703](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1703) - Added API serializer validation for custom integer fields
+* [#1705](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1705) - Fixed filtering of devices with a status of offline
+
+---
+
+# v2.2.4 (2017-10-31)
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1670](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1670) - Fixed server error when calling certain filters (regression from #1649)
+
+---
+
+# v2.2.3 (2017-10-31)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#999](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/999) - Display devices on which circuits are terminated in circuits list
+* [#1491](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1491) - Added initial data for the virtualization app
+* [#1620](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1620) - Loosen IP address search filter to match all IPs that start with the given string
+* [#1631](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1631) - Added a `post_run` method to the Report class
+* [#1666](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1666) - Allow modifying the owner of a rack reservation
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1513](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1513) - Correct filtering of custom field choices
+* [#1603](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1603) - Hide selection checkboxes for tables with no available actions
+* [#1618](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1618) - Allow bulk deletion of all virtual machines
+* [#1619](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1619) - Correct text-based filtering of IP network and address fields
+* [#1624](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1624) - Add VM count to device roles table
+* [#1634](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1634) - Cluster should not be a required field when importing child devices
+* [#1649](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1649) - Correct filtering on null values (e.g. ?tenant_id=0) for django-filters v1.1.0+
+* [#1653](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1653) - Remove outdated description for DeviceType's `is_network_device` flag
+* [#1664](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1664) - Added missing `serial` field in default rack CSV export
+
+---
+
+# v2.2.2 (2017-10-17)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#1580](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1580) - Allow cluster assignment when bulk importing devices
+* [#1587](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1587) - Add primary IP column for virtual machines in global search results
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1498](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1498) - Avoid duplicating nodes when generating topology maps
+* [#1579](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1579) - Devices already assigned to a cluster cannot be added to a different cluster
+* [#1582](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1582) - Add `virtual_machine` attribute to IPAddress
+* [#1584](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1584) - Colorized virtual machine role column
+* [#1585](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1585) - Fixed slug-based filtering of virtual machines
+* [#1605](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1605) - Added clusters and virtual machines to object list for global search
+* [#1609](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1609) - Added missing `virtual_machine` field to IP address interface serializer
+
+---
+
+# v2.2.1 (2017-10-12)
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1576](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1576) - Moved PostgreSQL validation logic into the relevant migration (fixed ImproperlyConfigured exception on init)
+
+---
+
+# v2.2.0 (2017-10-12)
+
+**Note:** This release requires PostgreSQL 9.4 or higher. Do not attempt to upgrade unless you are running at least PostgreSQL 9.4.
+
+**Note:** The release replaces the deprecated pycrypto library with [pycryptodome](https://github.com/Legrandin/pycryptodome). The upgrade script has been extended to automatically uninstall the old library, but please verify your installed packages with `pip freeze | grep pycrypto` if you run into problems.
+
+## New Features
+
+### Virtual Machines and Clusters ([#142](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/142))
+
+Our second-most popular feature request has arrived! NetBox now supports the creation of virtual machines, which can be assigned virtual interfaces and IP addresses. VMs are arranged into clusters, each of which has a type and (optionally) a group.
+
+### Custom Validation Reports ([#1511](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1511))
+
+Users can now create custom reports which are run to validate data in NetBox. Reports work very similar to Python unit tests: Each report inherits from NetBox's Report class and contains one or more test method. Reports can be run and retrieved via the web UI, API, or CLI. See [the docs](http://netbox.readthedocs.io/en/stable/miscellaneous/reports/) for more info.
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#494](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/494) - Include asset tag in device info pop-up on rack elevation
+* [#1444](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1444) - Added a `serial` field to the rack model
+* [#1479](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1479) - Added an IP address role for CARP
+* [#1506](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1506) - Extended rack facility ID field from 30 to 50 characters
+* [#1510](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1510) - Added ability to search by name when adding devices to a cluster
+* [#1527](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1527) - Replace deprecated pycrypto library with pycryptodome
+* [#1551](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1551) - Added API endpoints listing static field choices for each app
+* [#1556](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1556) - Added CPAK, CFP2, and CFP4 100GE interface form factors
+* Added CSV import views for all object types
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1550](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1550) - Corrected interface connections link in navigation menu
+* [#1554](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1554) - Don't require form_factor when creating an interface assigned to a virtual machine
+* [#1557](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1557) - Added filtering for virtual machine interfaces
+* [#1567](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1567) - Prompt user for session key when importing secrets
+
+## API Changes
+
+* Introduced the virtualization app and its associated endpoints at `/api/virtualization`
+* Added the `/api/extras/reports` endpoint for fetching and running reports
+* The `ipam.Service` and `dcim.Interface` models now have a `virtual_machine` field in addition to the `device` field. Only one of the two fields may be defined for each object
+* Added a `vm_role` field to `dcim.DeviceRole`, which indicates whether a role is suitable for assigned to a virtual machine
+* Added a `serial` field to 'dcim.Rack` for serial numbers
+* Each app now has a `_choices` endpoint, which lists the available options for all model field with static choices (e.g. interface form factors)

docs/release-notes/version-2.3.md

@@ -0,0 +1,223 @@
+# v2.3.7 (2018-07-26)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#2166](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2166) - Enable partial matching on device asset_tag during search
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1977](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1977) - Fixed exception when creating a virtual chassis with a non-master device in position 1
+* [#1992](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1992) - Isolate errors when one of multiple NAPALM methods fails
+* [#2202](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2202) - Ditched half-baked concept of tenancy inheritance via VRF
+* [#2222](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2222) - IP addresses created via the `available-ips` API endpoint should have the same mask as their parent prefix (not /32)
+* [#2231](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2231) - Remove `get_absolute_url()` from DeviceRole (can apply to devices or VMs)
+* [#2250](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2250) - Include stat counters on report result navigation
+* [#2255](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2255) - Corrected display of results in reports list
+* [#2256](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2256) - Prevent navigation menu overlap when jumping to test results on report page
+* [#2257](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2257) - Corrected casting of RIR utilization stats as floats
+* [#2266](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2266) - Permit additional logging of exceptions beyond custom middleware
+
+---
+
+# v2.3.6 (2018-07-16)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#2107](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2107) - Added virtual chassis to global search
+* [#2125](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2125) - Show child status in device bay list
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#2214](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2214) - Error when assigning a VLAN to an interface on a VM in a cluster with no assigned site
+* [#2239](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2239) - Pin django-filter to version 1.1.0
+
+---
+
+# v2.3.5 (2018-07-02)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#2159](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2159) - Allow custom choice field to specify a default choice
+* [#2177](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2177) - Include device serial number in rack elevation pop-up
+* [#2194](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2194) - Added `address` filter to IPAddress model
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1826](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1826) - Corrected description of security parameters under API definition
+* [#2021](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2021) - Fix recursion error when viewing API docs under Python 3.4
+* [#2064](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2064) - Disable calls to online swagger validator
+* [#2173](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2173) - Fixed IndexError when automatically allocating IP addresses from large IPv6 prefixes
+* [#2181](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2181) - Raise validation error on invalid `prefix_length` when allocating next-available prefix
+* [#2182](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2182) - ValueError can be raised when viewing the interface connections table
+* [#2191](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2191) - Added missing static choices to circuits and DCIM API endpoints
+* [#2192](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2192) - Prevent a 0U device from being assigned to a rack position
+
+---
+
+# v2.3.4 (2018-06-07)
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#2066](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2066) - Catch `AddrFormatError` exception on invalid IP addresses
+* [#2075](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2075) - Enable tenant assignment when creating a rack reservation via the API
+* [#2083](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2083) - Add missing export button to rack roles list view
+* [#2087](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2087) - Don't overwrite existing vc_position of master device when creating a virtual chassis
+* [#2093](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2093) - Fix link to circuit termination in device interfaces table
+* [#2097](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2097) - Fixed queryset-based bulk deletion of clusters and regions
+* [#2098](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2098) - Fixed missing checkboxes for host devices in cluster view
+* [#2127](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2127) - Prevent non-conntectable interfaces from being connected
+* [#2143](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2143) - Accept null value for empty time zone field
+* [#2148](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2148) - Do not force timezone selection when editing sites in bulk
+* [#2150](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2150) - Fix display of LLDP neighbors when interface name contains a colon
+
+---
+
+# v2.3.3 (2018-04-19)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#1990](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1990) - Improved search function when assigning an IP address to an interface
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1975](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1975) - Correct filtering logic for custom boolean fields
+* [#1988](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1988) - Order interfaces naturally when bulk renaming
+* [#1993](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1993) - Corrected status choices in site CSV import form
+* [#1999](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1999) - Added missing description field to site edit form
+* [#2012](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2012) - Fixed deselection of an IP address as the primary IP for its parent device/VM
+* [#2014](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2014) - Allow assignment of VLANs to VM interfaces via the API
+* [#2019](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2019) - Avoid casting oversized numbers as integers
+* [#2022](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2022) - Show 0 for zero-value fields on CSV export
+* [#2023](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2023) - Manufacturer should not be a required field when importing platforms
+* [#2037](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2037) - Fixed IndexError exception when attempting to create a new rack reservation
+
+---
+
+# v2.3.2 (2018-03-22)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#1586](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1586) - Extend bulk interface creation to support alphanumeric characters
+* [#1866](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1866) - Introduced AnnotatedMultipleChoiceField for filter forms
+* [#1930](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1930) - Switched to drf-yasg for Swagger API documentation
+* [#1944](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1944) - Enable assigning VLANs to virtual machine interfaces
+* [#1945](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1945) - Implemented a VLAN members view
+* [#1949](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1949) - Added a button to view elevations on rack groups list
+* [#1952](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1952) - Implemented a more robust mechanism for assigning VLANs to interfaces
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1948](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1948) - Fix TypeError when attempting to add a member to an existing virtual chassis
+* [#1951](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1951) - Fix TypeError exception when importing platforms
+* [#1953](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1953) - Ignore duplicate IPs when calculating prefix utilization
+* [#1955](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1955) - Require a plaintext value when creating a new secret
+* [#1978](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1978) - Include all virtual chassis member interfaces in LLDP neighbors view
+* [#1980](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1980) - Fixed bug when trying to nullify a selection custom field under Python 2
+
+---
+
+# v2.3.1 (2018-03-01)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#1910](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1910) - Added filters for cluster group and cluster type
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1915](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1915) - Redirect to device view after deleting a component
+* [#1919](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1919) - Prevent exception when attempting to create a virtual machine without selecting devices
+* [#1921](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1921) - Ignore ManyToManyFields when validating a new object created via the API
+* [#1924](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1924) - Include VID in VLAN lists when editing an interface
+* [#1926](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1926) - Prevent reassignment of parent device when bulk editing VC member interfaces
+* [#1927](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1927) - Include all VC member interfaces on A side when creating a new interface connection
+* [#1928](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1928) - Fixed form validation when modifying VLANs assigned to an interface
+* [#1934](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1934) - Fixed exception when rendering export template on an object type with custom fields assigned
+* [#1935](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1935) - Correct API validation of VLANs assigned to interfaces
+* [#1936](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1936) - Trigger validation error when attempting to create a virtual chassis without specifying member positions
+
+---
+
+# v2.3.0 (2018-02-26)
+
+## New Features
+
+### Virtual Chassis ([#99](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/99))
+
+A virtual chassis represents a set of physical devices with a shared control plane; for example, a stack of switches managed as a single device. Viewing the master device of a virtual chassis will show all member interfaces and IP addresses.
+
+### Interface VLAN Assignments ([#150](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/150))
+
+Interfaces can now be assigned an 802.1Q mode (access or trunked) and associated with particular VLANs. Thanks to [John Anderson](https://github.com/lampwins) for his work on this!
+
+### Bulk Object Creation via the API ([#1553](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1553))
+
+The REST API now supports the creation of multiple objects of the same type using a single POST request. For example, to create multiple devices:
+
+```
+curl -X POST -H "Authorization: Token <TOKEN>" -H "Content-Type: application/json" -H "Accept: application/json; indent=4" http://localhost:8000/api/dcim/devices/ --data '[
+{"name": "device1", "device_type": 24, "device_role": 17, "site": 6},
+{"name": "device2", "device_type": 24, "device_role": 17, "site": 6},
+{"name": "device3", "device_type": 24, "device_role": 17, "site": 6},
+]'
+```
+
+Bulk creation is all-or-none: If any of the creations fails, the entire operation is rolled back.
+
+### Automatic Provisioning of Next Available Prefixes ([#1694](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1694))
+
+Similar to IP addresses, NetBox now supports automated provisioning of available prefixes from within a parent prefix. For example, to retrieve the next three available /28s within a parent /24:
+
+```
+curl -X POST -H "Authorization: Token <TOKEN>" -H "Content-Type: application/json" -H "Accept: application/json; indent=4" http://localhost:8000/api/ipam/prefixes/10153/available-prefixes/ --data '[
+{"prefix_length": 28},
+{"prefix_length": 28},
+{"prefix_length": 28}
+]'
+```
+
+If the parent prefix cannot accommodate all requested prefixes, the operation is cancelled and no new prefixes are created.
+
+### Bulk Renaming of Device/VM Components ([#1781](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1781))
+
+Device components (interfaces, console ports, etc.) can now be renamed in bulk via the web interface. This was implemented primarily to support the bulk renumbering of interfaces whose parent is part of a virtual chassis.
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#1283](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1283) - Added a `time_zone` field to the site model
+* [#1321](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1321) - Added `created` and `last_updated` fields for relevant models to their API serializers
+* [#1553](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1553) - Introduced support for bulk object creation via the API
+* [#1592](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1592) - Added tenancy assignment for rack reservations
+* [#1744](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1744) - Allow associating a platform with a specific manufacturer
+* [#1758](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1758) - Added a `status` field to the site model
+* [#1821](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1821) - Added a `description` field to the site model
+* [#1864](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1864) - Added a `status` field to the circuit model
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#1136](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1136) - Enforce model validation during bulk update
+* [#1645](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1645) - Simplified interface serialzier for IP addresses and optimized API view queryset
+* [#1838](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1838) - Fix KeyError when attempting to create a VirtualChassis with no devices selected
+* [#1847](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1847) - RecursionError when a virtual chasis master device has no name
+* [#1848](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1848) - Allow null value for interface encapsulation mode
+* [#1867](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1867) - Allow filtering on device status with multiple values
+* [#1881](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1881)* - Fixed bulk editing of interface 802.1Q settings
+* [#1884](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1884)* - Provide additional context to identify devices when creating/editing a virtual chassis
+* [#1907](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1907) - Allow removing an IP as the primary for a device when editing the IP directly
+
+\* New since v2.3-beta2
+
+## Breaking Changes
+
+* Constants representing device status have been renamed for clarity (for example, `STATUS_ACTIVE` is now `DEVICE_STATUS_ACTIVE`). Custom validation reports will need to be updated if they reference any of these constants.
+
+## API Changes
+
+* API creation calls now accept either a single JSON object or a list of JSON objects. If multiple objects are passed and one or more them fail validation, no objects will be created.
+* Added `created` and `last_updated` fields for objects inheriting from CreatedUpdatedModel.
+* Removed the `parent` filter for prefixes (use `within` or `within_include` instead).
+* The IP address serializer now includes only a minimal nested representation of the assigned interface (if any) and its parent device or virtual machine.
+* The rack reservation serializer now includes a nested representation of its owning user (as well as the assigned tenant, if any).
+* Added endpoints for virtual chassis and VC memberships.
+* Added `status`, `time_zone` (pytz format), and `description` fields to dcim.Site.
+* Added a `manufacturer` foreign key field on dcim.Platform.
+* Added a `status` field on circuits.Circuit.

docs/release-notes/version-2.4.md

@@ -0,0 +1,233 @@
+
+# v2.4.9 (2018-12-07)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#2089](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2089) - Add SONET interface form factors
+* [#2495](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2495) - Enable deep-merging of config context data
+* [#2597](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2597) - Add FibreChannel SFP28 (32GFC) interface form factor
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#2400](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2400) - Correct representation of nested object assignment in API docs
+* [#2576](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2576) - Correct type for count_* fields in site API representation
+* [#2606](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2606) - Fixed filtering for interfaces with a virtual form factor
+* [#2611](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2611) - Fix error handling when assigning a clustered device to a different site
+* [#2613](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2613) - Decrease live search minimum characters to three
+* [#2615](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2615) - Tweak live search widget to use brief format for API requests
+* [#2623](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2623) - Removed the need to pass the model class to the rqworker process for webhooks
+* [#2634](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2634) - Enforce consistent representation of unnamed devices in rack view
+
+---
+
+# v2.4.8 (2018-11-20)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#2490](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2490) - Added bulk editing for config contexts
+* [#2557](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2557) - Added object view for tags
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#2473](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2473) - Fix encoding of long (>127 character) secrets
+* [#2558](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2558) - Filter on all tags when multiple are passed
+* [#2565](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2565) - Improved rendering of Markdown tables
+* [#2575](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2575) - Correct model specified for rack roles table
+* [#2588](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2588) - Catch all exceptions from failed NAPALM API Calls
+* [#2589](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2589) - Virtual machine API serializer should require cluster assignment
+
+---
+
+# v2.4.7 (2018-11-06)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#2388](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2388) - Enable filtering of devices/VMs by region
+* [#2427](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2427) - Allow filtering of interfaces by assigned VLAN or VLAN ID
+* [#2512](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2512) - Add device field to inventory item filter form
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#2502](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2502) - Allow duplicate VIPs inside a uniqueness-enforced VRF
+* [#2514](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2514) - Prevent new connections to already connected interfaces
+* [#2515](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2515) - Only use django-rq admin tmeplate if webhooks are enabled
+* [#2528](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2528) - Enable creating circuit terminations with interface assignment via API
+* [#2549](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2549) - Changed naming of `peer_device` and `peer_interface` on API /dcim/connected-device/ endpoint to use underscores
+
+---
+
+# v2.4.6 (2018-10-05)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#2479](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2479) - Add user permissions for creating/modifying API tokens
+* [#2487](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2487) - Return abbreviated API output when passed `?brief=1`
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#2393](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2393) - Fix Unicode support for CSV import under Python 2
+* [#2483](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2483) - Set max item count of API-populated form fields to MAX_PAGE_SIZE
+* [#2484](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2484) - Local config context not available on the Virtual Machine Edit Form
+* [#2485](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2485) - Fix cancel button when assigning a service to a device/VM
+* [#2491](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2491) - Fix exception when importing devices with invalid device type
+* [#2492](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2492) - Sanitize hostname and port values returned through LLDP
+
+---
+
+# v2.4.5 (2018-10-02)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#2392](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2392) - Implemented local context data for devices and virtual machines
+* [#2402](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2402) - Order and format JSON data in form fields
+* [#2432](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2432) - Link remote interface connections to the Interface view
+* [#2438](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2438) - API optimizations for tagged objects
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#2406](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2406) - Remove hard-coded limit of 1000 objects from API-populated form fields
+* [#2414](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2414) - Tags field missing from device/VM component creation forms
+* [#2442](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2442) - Nullify "next" link in API when limit=0 is passed
+* [#2443](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2443) - Enforce JSON object format when creating config contexts
+* [#2444](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2444) - Improve validation of interface MAC addresses
+* [#2455](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2455) - Ignore unique address enforcement for IPs with a shared/virtual role
+* [#2470](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2470) - Log the creation of device/VM components as object changes
+
+---
+
+# v2.4.4 (2018-08-22)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#2168](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2168) - Added Extreme SummitStack interface form factors
+* [#2356](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2356) - Include cluster site as read-only field in VirtualMachine serializer
+* [#2362](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2362) - Implemented custom admin site to properly handle BASE_PATH
+* [#2254](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2254) - Implemented searchability for Rack Groups
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#2353](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2353) - Handle `DoesNotExist` exception when deleting a device with connected interfaces
+* [#2354](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2354) - Increased maximum MTU for interfaces to 65536 bytes
+* [#2355](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2355) - Added item count to inventory tab on device view
+* [#2368](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2368) - Record change in device changelog when altering cluster assignment
+* [#2369](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2369) - Corrected time zone validation on site API serializer
+* [#2370](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2370) - Redirect to parent device after deleting device bays
+* [#2374](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2374) - Fix toggling display of IP addresses in virtual machine interfaces list
+* [#2378](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2378) - Corrected "edit" link for virtual machine interfaces
+
+---
+
+# v2.4.3 (2018-08-09)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#2333](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2333) - Added search filters for ConfigContexts
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#2334](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2334) - TypeError raised when WritableNestedSerializer receives a non-integer value
+* [#2335](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2335) - API requires group field when creating/updating a rack
+* [#2336](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2336) - Bulk deleting power outlets and console server ports from a device redirects to home page
+* [#2337](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2337) - Attempting to create the next available prefix within a parent assigned to a VRF raises an AssertionError
+* [#2340](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2340) - API requires manufacturer field when creating/updating an inventory item
+* [#2342](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2342) - IntegrityError raised when attempting to assign an invalid IP address as the primary for a VM
+* [#2344](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2344) - AttributeError when assigning VLANs to an interface on a device/VM not assigned to a site
+
+---
+
+# v2.4.2 (2018-08-08)
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#2318](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2318) - ImportError when viewing a report
+* [#2319](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2319) - Extend ChoiceField to properly handle true/false choice keys
+* [#2320](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2320) - TypeError when dispatching a webhook with a secret key configured
+* [#2321](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2321) - Allow explicitly setting a null value on nullable ChoiceFields
+* [#2322](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2322) - Webhooks firing on non-enabled event types
+* [#2323](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2323) - DoesNotExist raised when deleting devices or virtual machines
+* [#2330](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2330) - Incorrect tab link in VRF changelog view
+
+---
+
+# v2.4.1 (2018-08-07)
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#2303](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2303) - Always redirect to parent object when bulk editing/deleting components
+* [#2308](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2308) - Custom fields panel absent from object view in UI
+* [#2310](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2310) - False validation error on certain nested serializers
+* [#2311](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2311) - Redirect to parent after editing interface from device/VM view
+* [#2312](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2312) - Running a report yields a ValueError exception
+* [#2314](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2314) - Serialized representation of object in change log does not include assigned tags
+
+---
+
+# v2.4.0 (2018-08-06)
+
+## New Features
+
+### Webhooks ([#81](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/81))
+
+Webhooks enable NetBox to send a representation of an object every time one is created, updated, or deleted. Webhooks are sent from NetBox to external services via HTTP, and can be limited by object type. Services which receive a webhook can act on the data provided by NetBox to automate other tasks.
+
+Special thanks to [John Anderson](https://github.com/lampwins) for doing the heavy lifting for this feature!
+
+### Tagging ([#132](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/132))
+
+Tags are free-form labels which can be assigned to a variety of objects in NetBox. Tags can be used to categorize and filter objects in addition to built-in and custom fields. Objects to which tags apply now include a `tags` field in the API.
+
+### Contextual Configuration Data ([#1349](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1349))
+
+Sometimes it is desirable to associate arbitrary data with a group of devices to aid in their configuration. (For example, you might want to associate a set of syslog servers for all devices at a particular site.) Context data enables the association of arbitrary data (expressed in JSON format) to devices and virtual machines grouped by region, site, role, platform, and/or tenancy. Context data is arranged hierarchically, so that data with a higher weight can be entered to override more general lower-weight data. Multiple instances of data are automatically merged by NetBox to present a single dictionary for each object.
+
+### Change Logging ([#1898](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1898))
+
+When an object is created, updated, or deleted, NetBox now automatically records a serialized representation of that object (similar to how it appears in the REST API) as well the event time and user account associated with the change.
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#238](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/238) - Allow racks with the same name within a site (but in different groups)
+* [#971](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/971) - Add a view to show all VLAN IDs available within a group
+* [#1673](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1673) - Added object/list views for services
+* [#1687](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1687) - Enabled custom fields for services
+* [#1739](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1739) - Enabled custom fields for secrets
+* [#1794](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1794) - Improved POST/PATCH representation of nested objects
+* [#2029](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2029) - Added optional NAPALM arguments to Platform model
+* [#2034](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2034) - Include the ID when showing nested interface connections (API change)
+* [#2118](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2118) - Added `latitude` and `longitude` fields to Site for GPS coordinates
+* [#2131](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2131) - Added `created` and `last_updated` fields to DeviceType
+* [#2157](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2157) - Fixed natural ordering of objects when sorted by name
+* [#2225](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2225) - Add "view elevations" button for site rack groups
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#2272](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2272) - Allow subdevice_role to be null on DeviceTypeSerializer"
+* [#2286](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2286) - Fixed "mark connected" button for PDU outlet connections
+
+## API Changes
+
+* Introduced the `/extras/config-contexts/`, `/extras/object-changes/`, and `/extras/tags/` API endpoints
+* API writes now return a nested representation of related objects (rather than only a numeric ID)
+* The dcim.DeviceType serializer now includes `created` and `last_updated` fields
+* The dcim.Site serializer now includes `latitude` and `longitude` fields
+* The ipam.Service and secrets.Secret serializers now include custom fields
+* The dcim.Platform serializer now includes a free-form (JSON) `napalm_args` field
+
+## Changes Since v2.4-beta1
+
+### Enhancements
+
+* [#2229](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2229) - Allow mapping of ConfigContexts to tenant groups
+* [#2259](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2259) - Add changelog tab to interface view
+* [#2264](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2264) - Added "map it" link for site GPS coordinates
+
+### Bug Fixes
+
+* [#2137](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2137) - Fixed JSON serialization of dates
+* [#2258](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2258) - Include changed object type on home page changelog
+* [#2265](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2265) - Include parent regions when filtering applicable ConfigContexts
+* [#2288](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2288) - Fix exception when assigning objects to a ConfigContext via the API
+* [#2296](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2296) - Fix AttributeError when creating a new object with tags assigned
+* [#2300](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2300) - Fix assignment of an interface to an IP address via API PATCH
+* [#2301](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2301) - Fix model validation on assignment of ManyToMany fields via API PATCH
+* [#2305](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2305) - Make VLAN fields optional when creating a VM interface via the API

docs/release-notes/version-2.5.md

@@ -0,0 +1,365 @@
+# v2.5.13 (2019-05-31)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#2813](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2813) - Add tenant group filters
+* [#3085](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3085) - Catch all exceptions during export template rendering
+* [#3138](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3138) - Add 2.5GE and 5GE interface form factors
+* [#3151](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3151) - Add inventory item count to manufacturers list
+* [#3156](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3156) - Add site link to rack reservations overview
+* [#3183](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3183) - Enable bulk deletion of sites
+* [#3185](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3185) - Improve performance for custom field access within templates
+* [#3186](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3186) - Add interface name filter for IP addresses
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#3031](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3031) - Fixed form field population of tags with spaces
+* [#3132](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3132) - Circuit termination missing from available cable termination types
+* [#3150](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3150) - Fix formatting of cable length during cable trace
+* [#3184](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3184) - Correctly display color block for white cables
+* [#3190](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3190) - Fix custom field rendering for Jinja2 export templates
+* [#3211](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3211) - Fix error handling when attempting to delete a protected object via API
+* [#3223](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3223) - Fix filtering devices by "has power outlets"
+* [#3227](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3227) - Fix exception when deleting a circuit with a termination(s)
+* [#3228](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3228) - Fixed login link retaining query parameters
+
+---
+
+# v2.5.12 (2019-05-01)
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#3127](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3127) - Fix natural ordering of device components
+
+---
+
+2.5.11 (2019-04-29)
+
+## Notes
+
+This release upgrades the Django framework to version 2.2.
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#2986](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2986) - Improve natural ordering of device components
+* [#3023](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3023) - Add support for filtering cables by connected device
+* [#3070](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3070) - Add decommissioning status for devices
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#2621](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2621) - Upgrade Django requirement to 2.2 to fix object deletion issue in the changelog middleware
+* [#3072](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3072) - Preserve multiselect filter values when updating per-page count for list views
+* [#3112](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3112) - Fix ordering of interface connections list by termination B name/device
+* [#3116](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3116) - Fix `tagged_items` count in tags API endpoint
+* [#3118](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3118) - Disable `last_login` update on login when maintenance mode is enabled
+
+---
+
+# v2.5.10 (2019-04-08)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#3052](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3052) - Add Jinja2 support for export templates
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#2937](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2937) - Redirect to list view after editing an object from list view
+* [#3036](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3036) - DCIM interfaces API endpoint should not include VM interfaces
+* [#3039](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3039) - Fix exception when retrieving change object for a component template via API
+* [#3041](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3041) - Fix form widget for bulk cable label update
+* [#3044](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3044) - Ignore site/rack fields when connecting a new cable via device search
+* [#3046](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3046) - Fix exception at reports API endpoint
+* [#3047](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3047) - Fix exception when writing mac address for an interface via API
+
+---
+
+# v2.5.9 (2019-04-01)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#2933](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2933) - Add username to outbound webhook requests
+* [#3011](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3011) - Add SSL support for django-rq (requires django-rq v1.3.1+)
+* [#3025](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3025) - Add request ID to outbound webhook requests (for correlating all changes part of a single request)
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#2207](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2207) - Fixes deterministic ordering of interfaces
+* [#2577](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2577) - Clarification of wording in API regarding filtering
+* [#2924](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2924) - Add interface type for QSFP28 50GE
+* [#2936](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2936) - Fix device role selection showing duplicate first entry
+* [#2998](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2998) - Limit device query to non-racked devices if no rack selected when creating a cable
+* [#3001](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3001) - Fix API representation of ObjectChange `action` and add `changed_object_type`
+* [#3014](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3014) - Fixes VM Role filtering
+* [#3019](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3019) - Fix tag population when running NetBox within a path
+* [#3022](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3022) - Add missing cable termination types to DCIM `_choices` endpoint
+* [#3026](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3026) - Tweak prefix/IP filter forms to filter using VRF ID rather than route distinguisher
+* [#3027](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3027) - Ignore empty local context data when rendering config contexts
+* [#3032](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3032) - Save assigned tags when creating a new secret
+
+---
+
+# v2.5.8 (2019-03-11)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#2435](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2435) - Printer friendly CSS
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#2065](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2065) - Correct documentation for VM interface serializer
+* [#2705](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2705) - Fix endpoint grouping in API docs
+* [#2781](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2781) - Fix filtering of sites/devices/VMs by multiple regions
+* [#2923](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2923) - Provider filter form's site field should be blank by default
+* [#2938](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2938) - Enforce deterministic ordering of device components returned by API
+* [#2939](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2939) - Exclude circuit terminations from API interface connections endpoint
+* [#2940](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2940) - Allow CSV import of prefixes/IPs to VRF without an RD assigned
+* [#2944](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2944) - Record the deletion of an IP address in the changelog of its parent interface (if any)
+* [#2952](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2952) - Added the `slug` field to the Tenant filter for use in the API and search function
+* [#2954](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2954) - Remove trailing slashes to fix root/template paths on Windows
+* [#2961](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2961) - Prevent exception when exporting inventory items belonging to unnamed devices
+* [#2962](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2962) - Increase ExportTemplate `mime_type` field length
+* [#2966](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2966) - Accept `null` cable length_unit via API
+* [#2972](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2972) - Improve ContentTypeField serializer to elegantly handle invalid data
+* [#2976](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2976) - Add delete button to tag view
+* [#2980](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2980) - Improve rendering time for API docs
+* [#2982](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2982) - Correct CSS class assignment on color picker
+* [#2984](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2984) - Fix logging of unlabeled cable ID on cable deletion
+* [#2985](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2985) - Fix pagination page length for rack elevations
+
+---
+
+# v2.5.7 (2019-02-21)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#2357](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2357) - Enable filtering of devices by rack face
+* [#2638](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2638) - Add button to copy unlocked secret to clipboard
+* [#2870](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2870) - Add Markdown rendering for provider NOC/admin contact fields
+* [#2878](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2878) - Add cable types for OS1/OS2 singlemode fiber
+* [#2890](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2890) - Add port types for APC fiber
+* [#2898](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2898) - Enable filtering cables list by connection status
+* [#2903](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2903) - Clarify purpose of tags field on interface edit form
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#2852](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2852) - Allow filtering devices by null rack position
+* [#2884](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2884) - Don't display connect button for wireless interfaces
+* [#2888](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2888) - Correct foreground color of device roles in rack elevations
+* [#2893](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2893) - Remove duplicate display of VRF RD on IP address view
+* [#2895](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2895) - Fix filtering of nullable character fields
+* [#2901](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2901) - Fix ordering regions by site count
+* [#2910](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2910) - Fix config context list and edit forms to use Select2 elements
+* [#2912](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2912) - Cable type in filter form should be blank by default
+* [#2913](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2913) - Fix assigned prefixes link on VRF view
+* [#2914](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2914) - Fix empty connected circuit link on device interfaces list
+* [#2915](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2915) - Fix bulk editing of pass-through ports
+
+---
+
+# v2.5.6 (2019-02-13)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#2758](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2758) - Add cable trace button to pass-through ports
+* [#2839](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2839) - Add "110 punch" type for pass-through ports
+* [#2854](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2854) - Enable bulk editing of pass-through ports
+* [#2866](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2866) - Add cellular interface types (GSM/CDMA/LTE)
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#2841](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2841) - Fix filtering by VRF for prefix and IP address lists
+* [#2844](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2844) - Correct display of far cable end for pass-through ports
+* [#2845](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2845) - Enable filtering of rack unit list by unit ID
+* [#2856](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2856) - Fix navigation links between LAG interfaces and their members on device view
+* [#2857](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2857) - Add `display_name` to DeviceType API serializer; fix DeviceType list for bulk device edit
+* [#2862](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2862) - Follow return URL when connecting a cable
+* [#2864](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2864) - Correct display of VRF name when no RD is assigned
+* [#2877](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2877) - Fixed device role label display on light background color
+* [#2880](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2880) - Sanitize user password if an exception is raised during login
+
+---
+
+# v2.5.5 (2019-01-31)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#2805](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2805) - Allow null route distinguisher for VRFs
+* [#2809](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2809) - Remove VRF child prefixes table; link to main prefixes view
+* [#2825](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2825) - Include directly connected device for front/rear ports
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#2824](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2824) - Fix template exception when viewing rack elevations list
+* [#2833](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2833) - Fix form widget for front port template creation
+* [#2835](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2835) - Fix certain model filters did not support the `q` query param
+* [#2837](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2837) - Fix select2 nullable filter fields add multiple null_option elements when paging
+
+---
+
+# v2.5.4 (2019-01-29)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#2516](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2516) - Implemented Select2 for all Model backed selection fields
+* [#2590](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2590) - Implemented the color picker with Select2 to show colors in the background
+* [#2733](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2733) - Enable bulk assignment of MAC addresses to interfaces
+* [#2735](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2735) - Implemented Select2 for all list filter form select elements
+* [#2753](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2753) - Implemented Select2 to replace most all instances of select fields in forms
+* [#2766](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2766) - Extend users admin table to include superuser and active fields
+* [#2782](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2782) - Add `is_pool` field for prefix filtering
+* [#2807](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2807) - Include device site/rack assignment in cable trace view
+* [#2808](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2808) - Loosen version pinning for Django to allow patch releases
+* [#2810](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2810) - Include description fields in interface connections export
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#2779](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2779) - Include "none" option when filter IP addresses by role
+* [#2783](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2783) - Fix AttributeError exception when attempting to delete region(s)
+* [#2795](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2795) - Fix duplicate display of pagination controls on child prefix/IP tables
+* [#2798](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2798) - Properly URL-encode "map it" link on site view
+* [#2802](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2802) - Better error handling for unsupported NAPALM methods
+* [#2816](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2816) - Handle exception when deleting a device with connected components
+
+---
+
+# v2.5.3 (2019-01-11)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#1630](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1630) - Enable bulk editing of prefix/IP mask length
+* [#1870](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1870) - Add per-page toggle to object lists
+* [#1871](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1871) - Enable filtering sites by parent region
+* [#1983](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1983) - Enable regular expressions when bulk renaming device components
+* [#2682](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2682) - Add DAC and AOC cable types
+* [#2693](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2693) - Additional cable colors
+* [#2726](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2726) - Include cables in global search
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#2742](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2742) - Preserve cluster assignment when editing a device
+* [#2757](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2757) - Always treat first/last IPs within a /31 or /127 as usable
+* [#2762](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2762) - Add missing DCIM field values to API `_choices` endpoint
+* [#2777](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2777) - Fix cable validation to handle duplicate connections on import
+
+
+---
+
+# v2.5.2 (2018-12-21)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#2561](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2561) - Add 200G and 400G interface types
+* [#2701](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2701) - Enable filtering of prefixes by exact prefix value
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#2673](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2673) - Fix exception on LLDP neighbors view for device with a circuit connected
+* [#2691](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2691) - Cable trace should follow circuits
+* [#2698](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2698) - Remove pagination restriction on bulk component creation for devices/VMs
+* [#2704](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2704) - Fix form select widget population on parent with null value
+* [#2707](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2707) - Correct permission evaluation for circuit termination cabling
+* [#2712](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2712) - Preserve list filtering after editing objects in bulk
+* [#2717](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2717) - Fix bulk deletion of tags
+* [#2721](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2721) - Detect loops when tracing front/rear ports
+* [#2723](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2723) - Correct permission evaluation when bulk deleting tags
+* [#2724](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2724) - Limit rear port choices to current device when editing a front port
+
+---
+
+# v2.5.1 (2018-12-13)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#2655](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2655) - Add 128GFC Fibrechannel interface type
+* [#2674](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2674) - Enable filtering changelog by object type under web UI
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#2662](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2662) - Fix ImproperlyConfigured exception when rendering API docs
+* [#2663](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2663) - Prevent duplicate interfaces from appearing under VLAN members view
+* [#2666](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2666) - Correct display of length unit in cables list
+* [#2676](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2676) - Fix exception when passing dictionary value to a ChoiceField
+* [#2678](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2678) - Fix error when viewing webhook in admin UI without write permission
+* [#2680](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2680) - Disallow POST requests to `/dcim/interface-connections/` API endpoint
+* [#2683](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2683) - Fix exception when connecting a cable to a RearPort with no corresponding FrontPort
+* [#2684](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2684) - Fix custom field filtering
+* [#2687](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2687) - Correct naming of before/after filters for changelog entries
+
+---
+
+# v2.5.0 (2018-12-10)
+
+## Notes
+
+### Python 3 Required
+
+As promised, Python 2 support has been completed removed. Python 3.5 or higher is now required to run NetBox. Please see [our Python 3 migration guide](https://netbox.readthedocs.io/en/stable/installation/migrating-to-python3/) for assistance with upgrading.
+
+### Removed Deprecated User Activity Log
+
+The UserAction model, which was deprecated by the new change logging feature in NetBox v2.4, has been removed. If you need to archive legacy user activity, do so prior to upgrading to NetBox v2.5, as the database migration will remove all data associated with this model.
+
+### View Permissions in Django 2.1
+
+Django 2.1 introduces view permissions for object types (not to be confused with object-level permissions). Implementation of [#323](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/323) is planned for NetBox v2.6. Users are encourage to begin assigning view permissions as desired in preparation for their eventual enforcement.
+
+### upgrade.sh No Longer Invokes sudo
+
+The `upgrade.sh` script has been tweaked so that it no longer invokes `sudo` internally. This was done to ensure compatibility when running NetBox inside a Python virtual environment. If you need elevated permissions when upgrading NetBox, call the upgrade script with `sudo upgrade.sh`.
+
+## New Features
+
+### Patch Panels and Cables ([#20](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/20))
+
+NetBox now supports modeling physical cables for console, power, and interface connections. The new pass-through port component type has also been introduced to model patch panels and similar devices.
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#450](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/450) - Added `outer_width` and `outer_depth` fields to rack model
+* [#867](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/867) - Added `description` field to circuit terminations
+* [#1444](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1444) - Added an `asset_tag` field for racks
+* [#1931](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1931) - Added a count of assigned IP addresses to the interface API serializer
+* [#2000](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2000) - Dropped support for Python 2
+* [#2053](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2053) - Introduced the `LOGIN_TIMEOUT` configuration setting
+* [#2057](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2057) - Added description columns to interface connections list
+* [#2104](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2104) - Added a `status` field for racks
+* [#2165](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2165) - Improved natural ordering of Interfaces
+* [#2292](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2292) - Removed the deprecated UserAction model
+* [#2367](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2367) - Removed deprecated RPCClient functionality
+* [#2426](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2426) - Introduced `SESSION_FILE_PATH` configuration setting for authentication without write access to database
+* [#2594](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2594) - `upgrade.sh` no longer invokes sudo
+
+## Changes From v2.5-beta2
+
+* [#2474](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2474) - Add `cabled` and `connection_status` filters for device components
+* [#2616](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2616) - Convert Rack `outer_unit` and Cable `length_unit` to integer-based choice fields
+* [#2622](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2622) - Enable filtering cables by multiple types/colors
+* [#2624](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2624) - Delete associated content type and permissions when removing InterfaceConnection model
+* [#2626](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2626) - Remove extraneous permissions generated from proxy models
+* [#2632](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2632) - Change representation of null values from `0` to `null`
+* [#2639](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2639) - Fix preservation of length/dimensions unit for racks and cables
+* [#2648](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2648) - Include the `connection_status` field in nested represenations of connectable device components
+* [#2649](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2649) - Add `connected_endpoint_type` to connectable device component API representations
+
+## API Changes
+
+* The `/extras/recent-activity/` endpoint (replaced by change logging in v2.4) has been removed
+* The `rpc_client` field has been removed from dcim.Platform (see #2367)
+* Introduced a new API endpoint for cables at `/dcim/cables/`
+* New endpoints for front and rear pass-through ports (and their templates) in parallel with existing device components
+* The fields `interface_connection` on Interface and `interface` on CircuitTermination have been replaced with `connected_endpoint` and `connection_status`
+* A new `cable` field has been added to console, power, and interface components and to circuit terminations
+* New fields for dcim.Rack: `status`, `asset_tag`, `outer_width`, `outer_depth`, `outer_unit`
+* The following boolean filters on dcim.Device and dcim.DeviceType have been renamed:
+    * `is_console_server`: `console_server_ports`
+    * `is_pdu`: `power_outlets`
+    * `is_network_device`: `interfaces`
+* The following new boolean filters have been introduced for dcim.Device and dcim.DeviceType:
+    * `console_ports`
+    * `power_ports`
+    * `pass_through_ports`
+* The field `interface_ordering` has been removed from the DeviceType serializer
+* Added a `description` field to the CircuitTermination serializer
+* Added `ipaddress_count` to InterfaceSerializer to show the count of assigned IP addresses for each interface
+* The `available-prefixes` and `available-ips` IPAM endpoints now return an HTTP 204 response instead of HTTP 400 when no new objects can be created
+* Filtering on null values now uses the string `null` instead of zero

docs/release-notes/version-2.6.md

@@ -0,0 +1,505 @@
+# v2.6.12 (2020-01-13)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#1982](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1982) - Improved NAPALM method documentation in Swagger (OpenAPI)
+* [#2050](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2050) - Preview image attachments when hovering over the link
+* [#2113](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2113) - Allow NAPALM driver settings to be changed with request headers
+* [#2598](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2598) - Toggle the display of child prefixes/IP addresses
+* [#3009](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3009) - Search by description when assigning IP address to interfaces
+* [#3021](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3021) - Add `tenant` filter field for cables
+* [#3090](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3090) - Enable filtering of interfaces by name on the device view
+* [#3187](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3187) - Add rack selection field to rack elevations view
+* [#3393](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3393) - Paginate assigned circuits at the provider details view
+* [#3440](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3440) - Add total path length to cable trace
+* [#3491](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3491) - Include content of response on webhook error
+* [#3623](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3623) - Enable word expansion during interface creation
+* [#3668](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3668) - Enable searching by DNS name when assigning IP address
+* [#3851](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3851) - Allow passing initial data to custom script forms
+* [#3891](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3891) - Add `local_context_data` filter for virtual machines
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#3589](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3589) - Fix validation on tagged VLANs of an interface
+* [#3849](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3849) - Fix ordering of models when dumping data to JSON
+* [#3853](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3853) - Fix device role link on config context view
+* [#3856](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3856) - Allow filtering VM interfaces by multiple MAC addresses
+* [#3857](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3857) - Fix rendering of grouped custom links
+* [#3862](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3862) - Allow filtering device components by multiple device names
+* [#3864](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3864) - Disallow /0 masks for prefixes and IP addresses
+* [#3872](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3872) - Paginate related IPs on the IP address view
+* [#3876](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3876) - Fix minimum/maximum value rendering for site ASN field
+* [#3882](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3882) - Fix filtering of devices by rack group
+* [#3898](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3898) - Fix references to deleted cables without a label
+* [#3905](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3905) - Fix divide-by-zero on power feeds with low power values
+
+---
+
+# v2.6.11 (2020-01-03)
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#3831](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3831) - Fix API-driven filter field rendering (#3812 regression)
+* [#3833](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3833) - Add missing region filters for multiple objects
+
+---
+
+# v2.6.10 (2020-01-02)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#2233](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2233) - Add ability to move inventory items between devices
+* [#2892](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2892) - Extend admin UI to allow deleting old report results
+* [#3062](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3062) - Add `assigned_to_interface` filter for IP addresses
+* [#3461](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3461) - Fail gracefully on custom link rendering exception
+* [#3705](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3705) - Provide request context when executing custom scripts
+* [#3762](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3762) - Add date/time picker widgets
+* [#3788](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3788) - Enable partial search for inventory items
+* [#3812](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3812) - Optimize size of pages containing a dynamic selection field
+* [#3827](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3827) - Allow filtering console/power/interface connections by device ID
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#3106](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3106) - Restrict queryset of chained fields when form validation fails
+* [#3695](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3695) - Include A/Z termination sites for circuits in global search
+* [#3712](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3712) - Scrolling to target (hash) did not account for the header size
+* [#3780](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3780) - Fix AttributeError exception in API docs
+* [#3809](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3809) - Filter platform by manufacturer when editing devices
+* [#3811](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3811) - Fix filtering of racks by group on device list
+* [#3822](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3822) - Fix exception when editing a device bay (regression from #3596)
+
+---
+
+# v2.6.9 (2019-12-16)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#3152](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3152) - Include direct link to rack elevations on site view
+* [#3441](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3441) - Move virtual machine results near devices in global search
+* [#3761](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3761) - Added copy button for API tokens
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#2170](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2170) - Prevent the deletion of a virtual chassis when a cross-member LAG is present
+* [#2358](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2358) - Respect custom field default values when creating objects via the REST API
+* [#3749](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3749) - Fix exception on password change page for local users
+* [#3757](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3757) - Fix unable to assign IP to interface
+
+---
+
+# v2.6.8 (2019-12-10)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#3139](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3139) - Disable password change form for LDAP-authenticated users
+* [#3457](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3457) - Display cable colors on device view
+* [#3329](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3329) - Remove obsolete P3P policy header
+* [#3663](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3663) - Add query filters for `created` and `last_updated` fields
+* [#3722](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3722) - Allow the underscore character in IPAddress DNS names
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#3312](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3312) - Fix validation error when editing power cables in bulk
+* [#3644](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3644) - Fix exception when connecting a cable to a RearPort with no corresponding FrontPort
+* [#3669](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3669) - Include `weight` field in prefix/VLAN role form
+* [#3674](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3674) - Include comments on PowerFeed view
+* [#3679](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3679) - Fix link for assigned ipaddress in interface page
+* [#3709](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3709) - Prevent exception when importing an invalid cable definition
+* [#3720](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3720) - Correctly indicate power feed terminations on cable list
+* [#3724](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3724) - Fix API filtering of interfaces by more than one device name
+* [#3725](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3725) - Enforce client validation for minimum service port number
+
+---
+
+# v2.6.7 (2019-11-01)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#3445](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3445) - Add support for additional user defined headers to be added to webhook requests
+* [#3499](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3499) - Add `ca_file_path` to Webhook model to support user supplied CA certificate verification of webhook requests
+* [#3594](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3594) - Add ChoiceVar for custom scripts
+* [#3619](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3619) - Add 400GE OSFP interface type
+* [#3659](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3659) - Add filtering for objects in admin UI
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#3309](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3309) - Rewrite change logging middleware to resolve sporadic testing failures
+* [#3340](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3340) - Add missing options to connect front ports to console ports
+* [#3357](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3357) - Enable filter sites/devices/VMs by null region
+* [#3460](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3460) - Extend upgrade script to validate Python dependencies
+* [#3596](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3596) - Prevent server error when reassigning a device to a new device bay
+* [#3629](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3629) - Use `get_lldp_neighors_detail` to validation LLDP neighbors
+* [#3635](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3635) - Add missing cache support for the circuits app
+* [#3636](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3636) - Add missing `rack_group` field to PowerFeed CSV export
+* [#3652](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3652) - Limit next/previous rack by assigned rack group
+
+---
+
+# v2.6.6 (2019-10-10)
+
+## Notes
+
+* This release includes a migration which automatically updates all existing cables to enable filtering by site/rack (see [#3259](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3259)). This migration may take several minutes to complete on installations with tens of thousands of cables defined.
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#1941](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1941) - Add InfiniBand interface types
+* [#3259](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3259) - Add `rack` and `site` filters for cables
+* [#3471](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3471) - Disallow raw HTML in Markdown-rendered fields
+* [#3545](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3545) - Add `MultiObjectVar` for custom scripts
+* [#3563](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3563) - Enable editing of individual DeviceType components
+* [#3580](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3580) - Render text and URL fields as textareas in the custom link form
+* [#3581](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3581) - Introduce `commit_default` custom script attribute to not commit changes by default
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#3458](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3458) - Prevent primary IP address for a device/VM from being reassigned
+* [#3463](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3463) - Correct CSV headers for exported power feeds
+* [#3474](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3474) - Fix device status page loading when NAPALM call fails
+* [#3571](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3571) - Prevent erroneous redirects when editing tags
+* [#3573](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3573) - Ensure consistent display of changelog retention period
+* [#3574](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3574) - Change `device` to `parent` in interface editing VLAN filtering logic
+* [#3575](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3575) - Restore label for comments field when bulk editing circuits
+* [#3582](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3582) - Enforce view permissions on global search results
+* [#3588](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3588) - Enforce object-form JSON for local context data on devices and VMs
+
+---
+
+# v2.6.5 (2019-09-25)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#3297](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3297) - Include reserved units when calculating rack utilization
+* [#3347](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3347) - Extend upgrade script to automatically remove stale content types
+* [#3352](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3352) - Enable filtering changelog API by `changed_object_id`
+* [#3515](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3515) - Enable export templates for inventory items
+* [#3524](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3524) - Enable bulk editing of power outlet/power port associations
+* [#3529](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3529) - Enable filtering circuits list by region
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#3435](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3435) - Change IP/prefix CSV export to reference VRF name instead of RD
+* [#3464](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3464) - Fix foreground text color on color picker fields
+* [#3519](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3519) - Prevent cables from being terminated to virtual/wireless interfaces via API
+* [#3521](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3521) - Fix error in `parseURL` related to variables in API URL
+* [#3531](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3531) - Fixed rack role foreground color
+* [#3534](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3534) - Added blank option for untagged VLANs
+* [#3540](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3540) - Fixed virtual machine interface edit with new inline vlan edit fields
+* [#3543](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3543) - Added inline VLAN editing to virtual machine interfaces
+
+---
+
+# v2.6.4 (2019-09-19)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#2160](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2160) - Add bulk editing for interface VLAN assignment
+* [#3027](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3028) - Add `local_context_data` boolean filter for devices
+* [#3318](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3318) - Increase length of platform name and slug to 100 characters
+* [#3341](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3341) - Enable inline VLAN assignment while editing an interface
+* [#3485](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3485) - Enable embedded graphs for devices
+* [#3510](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3510) - Add minimum/maximum prefix length enforcement for `IPNetworkVar`
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#3489](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3489) - Prevent exception triggered by webhook upon object deletion
+* [#3501](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3501) - Fix rendering of checkboxes on custom script forms
+* [#3511](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3511) - Correct API URL for nested device bays
+* [#3513](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3513) - Fix assignment of tags when creating front/rear ports
+* [#3514](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3514) - Label TextVar fields when rendering custom script forms
+
+---
+
+# v2.6.3 (2019-09-04)
+
+## New Features
+
+### Custom Scripts ([#3415](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3415))
+
+Custom scripts allow for the execution of arbitrary code via the NetBox UI. They can be used to automatically create, manipulate, or clean up objects or perform other tasks within NetBox. Scripts are defined as Python files which contain one or more subclasses of `extras.scripts.Script`. Variable fields can be defined within scripts, which render as form fields within the web UI to prompt the user for input data. Scripts are executed and information is logged via the web UI. Please see [the docs](https://netbox.readthedocs.io/en/stable/additional-features/custom-scripts/) for more detail.
+
+Note: There are currently no API endpoints for this feature. These are planned for the upcoming v2.7 release.
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#3386](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3386) - Add `mac_address` filter for virtual machines
+* [#3391](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3391) - Update Bootstrap CSS to v3.4.1
+* [#3405](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3405) - Fix population of power port/outlet details on device creation
+* [#3422](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3422) - Prevent navigation menu from overlapping page content
+* [#3430](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3430) - Linkify platform field on device view
+* [#3454](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3454) - Enable filtering circuits by region
+* [#3456](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3456) - Enable bulk editing of tag color
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#3392](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3392) - Add database index for ObjectChange time
+* [#3420](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3420) - Serial number filter for racks, devices, and inventory items is now case-insensitive
+* [#3428](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3428) - Fixed cache invalidation issues ([#3300](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3300), [#3363](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3363), [#3379](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3379), [#3382](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3382)) by switching to `prefetch_related()` instead of `select_related()` and removing use of `update()`
+* [#3421](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3421) - Fix exception when ordering power connections list by PDU
+* [#3424](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3424) - Fix tag coloring for non-linked tags
+* [#3426](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3426) - Improve API error handling for ChoiceFields
+
+---
+
+# v2.6.2 (2019-08-02)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#984](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/984) - Allow ordering circuits by A/Z side
+* [#3307](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3307) - Add power panels count to home page
+* [#3314](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3314) - Paginate object changelog entries
+* [#3367](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3367) - Add BNC port type and coaxial cable type
+* [#3368](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3368) - Indicate indefinite changelog retention when applicable
+* [#3370](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3370) - Add filter class to VirtualChassis API
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#3018](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3018) - Components connected via a cable must have an equal number of positions
+* [#3289](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3289) - Prevent position from being nullified when moving a device to a new rack
+* [#3293](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3293) - Enable filtering device components by multiple device IDs
+* [#3315](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3315) - Enable filtering devices/interfaces by multiple MAC addresses
+* [#3317](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3317) - Fix permissions for ConfigContextBulkDeleteView
+* [#3323](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3323) - Fix permission evaluation for interface connections view
+* [#3342](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3342) - Fix cluster delete button
+* [#3384](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3384) - Maximum and allocated draw fields should be included on power port template creation form
+* [#3385](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3385) - Fix power panels list when bulk editing power feeds
+
+---
+
+# v2.6.1 (2019-06-25)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#3154](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3154) - Add `virtual_chassis_member` device filter
+* [#3277](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3277) - Add cable trace buttons for console and power ports
+* [#3281](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3281) - Hide custom links which render as empty text
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#3229](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3229) - Limit rack group selection by parent site on racks list
+* [#3269](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3269) - Raise validation error when specifying non-existent cable terminations
+* [#3275](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3275) - Fix error when adding power outlets to a device type
+* [#3279](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3279) - Reset the PostgreSQL sequence for Tag and TaggedItem IDs
+* [#3283](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3283) - Fix rack group assignment on PowerFeed CSV import
+* [#3290](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3290) - Fix server error when viewing cascaded PDUs
+* [#3292](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3292) - Ignore empty URL query parameters
+
+---
+
+# v2.6.0 (2019-06-20)
+
+## New Features
+
+### Power Panels and Feeds ([#54](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/54))
+
+NetBox now supports power circuit modeling via two new models: power panels and power feeds. Power feeds are terminated
+to power panels and are optionally associated with individual racks. Each power feed defines a supply type (AC/DC),
+amperage, voltage, and phase. A power port can be connected directly to a power feed, but a power feed may have only one
+power port connected to it.
+
+Additionally, the power port model, which represents a device's power input, has been extended to include fields
+denoting maximum and allocated draw, in volt-amperes. This allows a device (e.g. a PDU) to calculate its total load
+compared to its connected power feed.
+
+### Caching ([#2647](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2647))
+
+To improve performance, NetBox now supports caching for most object and list views. Caching is implemented using Redis,
+which is now a required dependency. (Previously, Redis was required only if webhooks were enabled.)
+
+A new configuration parameter is available to control the cache timeout:
+
+```
+# Cache timeout (in seconds)
+CACHE_TIMEOUT = 900
+```
+
+### View Permissions ([#323](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/323))
+
+Django 2.1 introduced the ability to enforce view-only permissions for different object types. NetBox now enforces
+these by default. You can grant view permission to a user or group by assigning the "can view" permission for the
+desired object(s).
+
+To exempt certain object types from the enforcement of view permissions, so that any user (including anonymous users)
+can view them, add them to the new `EXEMPT_VIEW_PERMISSIONS` setting in `configuration.py`:
+
+```
+EXEMPT_VIEW_PERMISSIONS = [
+    'dcim.site',
+    'ipam.prefix',
+]
+```
+
+To exclude _all_ objects, effectively disabling view permissions and restoring pre-v2.6 behavior, set:
+
+```
+EXEMPT_VIEW_PERMISSIONS = ['*']
+```
+
+### Custom Links ([#969](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/969))
+
+Custom links are created under the admin UI and will be displayed on each object of the selected type. Link text and
+URLs can be formed from Jinja2 template code, with the viewed object passed as context data. For example, to link to an
+external NMS from the device view, you might create a custom link with the following URL:
+
+```
+https://nms.example.com/nodes/?name={{ obj.name }}
+```
+
+Custom links appear as buttons at the top of the object view. Grouped links will render as a dropdown menu beneath a
+single button.
+
+### Prometheus Metrics ([#3104](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3104))
+
+NetBox now supports exposing native Prometheus metrics from the application. [Prometheus](https://prometheus.io/) is a
+popular time series metric platform used for monitoring. Metric exposition can be toggled with the `METRICS_ENABLED`
+configuration setting; it is not enabled by default. NetBox exposes metrics at the `/metrics` HTTP endpoint, e.g.
+`https://netbox.local/metrics`.
+
+NetBox makes use of the [django-prometheus](https://github.com/korfuri/django-prometheus) library to export a number of
+different types of metrics, including:
+
+* Per model insert, update, and delete counters
+* Per view request counters
+* Per view request latency histograms
+* Request body size histograms
+* Response body size histograms
+* Response code counters
+* Database connection, execution, and error counters
+* Cache hit, miss, and invalidation counters
+* Django middleware latency histograms
+* Other Django related metadata metrics
+
+For the exhaustive list of exposed metrics, visit the `/metrics` endpoint on your NetBox instance. See the documentation
+for more details on using Prometheus metrics in NetBox.
+
+## Changes
+
+### New Dependency: Redis
+
+[Redis](https://redis.io/) is an in-memory data store similar to memcached. While Redis has been an optional component
+of NetBox since the introduction of webhooks in version 2.4, it is now required to support NetBox's new caching
+functionality (as well as other planned features). Redis can be installed via your platform's package manager: for
+example, `sudo apt-get install redis-server` on Ubuntu or `sudo yum install redis` on CentOS.
+
+The Redis database is configured using a configuration setting similar to `DATABASE` in `configuration.py`:
+
+```
+REDIS = {
+    'HOST': 'localhost',
+    'PORT': 6379,
+    'PASSWORD': '',
+    'DATABASE': 0,
+    'CACHE_DATABASE': 1,
+    'DEFAULT_TIMEOUT': 300,
+    'SSL': False,
+}
+```
+
+Note that if you were using these settings in a prior release with webhooks, the `DATABASE` setting remains the same but
+an additional `CACHE_DATABASE` setting has been added with a default value of 1 to support the caching backend. The
+`DATABASE` setting will be renamed in a future release of NetBox to better relay the meaning of the setting. It is
+highly recommended to keep the webhook and cache databases seperate. Using the same database number for both may result
+in webhook processing data being lost during cache flushing events.
+
+### API Support for Specifying Related Objects by Attributes([#3077](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3077))
+
+Previously, specifying a related object in an API request required knowing the primary key (integer ID) of that object.
+For example, when creating a new device, its rack would be specified as an integer:
+
+```
+{
+    "name": "MyNewDevice",
+    "rack": 123,
+    ...
+}
+```
+
+The NetBox API now also supports referencing related objects by a set of sufficiently unique attrbiutes. For example, a
+rack can be identified by its name and parent site:
+
+```
+{
+    "name": "MyNewDevice",
+    "rack": {
+        "site": {
+            "name": "Equinix DC6"
+        },
+        "name": "R204"
+    },
+    ...
+}
+```
+
+There is no limit to the depth of nested references. Note that if the provided parameters do not return exactly one
+object, a validation error is raised.
+
+### API Device/VM Config Context Included by Default ([#2350](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2350))
+
+The rendered config context for devices and VMs is now included by default in all API results (list and detail views).
+Previously, the rendered config context was available only in the detail view for individual objects. Users with large
+amounts of context data may observe a performance drop when returning multiple objects. To combat this, in cases where
+the rendered config context is not needed, the query parameter `?exclude=config_context` may be appended to the request
+URL to exclude the config context data from the API response.
+
+### Changes to Tag Permissions
+
+NetBox now makes use of its own `Tag` model instead of the stock model which ships with django-taggit. This new model
+lives in the `extras` app and thus any permissions that you may have configured using "Taggit | Tag" should be changed
+to now use "Extras | Tag." Also note that the admin interface for tags has been removed as it was redundant to the
+functionality provided by the front end UI.
+
+### CORS_ORIGIN_WHITELIST Requires URI Scheme
+
+If you have the `CORS_ORIGIN_WHITELIST` configuration parameter defined, note that each origin must now incldue a URI
+scheme. This change was introuced in django-cors-headers 3.0.
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#166](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/166) - Add `dns_name` field to IPAddress
+* [#524](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/524) - Added power utilization graphs to power feeds, devices, and racks
+* [#1792](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1792) - Add CustomFieldChoices API endpoint at `/api/extras/_custom_field_choices/`
+* [#1863](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1863) - Add child object counts to API representation of organizational objects
+* [#2324](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2324) - Add `color` field for tags
+* [#2643](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2643) - Add `description` field to console/power components and device bays
+* [#2791](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2791) - Add `comments` field for tags
+* [#2920](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2920) - Rename Interface `form_factor` to `type` (backward-compatible until v2.7)
+* [#2926](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2926) - Add change logging to the Tag model
+* [#3038](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3038) - OR logic now used when multiple values of a query filter are passed
+* [#3264](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3264) - Annotate changelog retention time on UI
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#2968](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2968) - Correct API documentation for SerializerMethodFields
+* [#3176](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3176) - Add cable trace button for console server ports and power outlets
+* [#3231](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3231) - Fixed cosmetic error indicating a missing schema migration
+* [#3239](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3239) - Corrected count of tags reported via API
+
+## Bug Fixes From v2.6-beta1
+
+* [#3123](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3123) - Exempt `/metrics` view from authentication
+* [#3125](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3125) - Fix exception when viewing PDUs
+* [#3126](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3126) - Incorrect calculation of PowerFeed available power
+* [#3130](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3130) - Fix exception when creating a new power outlet
+* [#3136](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3136) - Add power draw fields to power port creation form
+* [#3137](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3137) - Add `power_port` and `feed_leg` fields to power outlet creation form
+* [#3140](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3140) - Add bulk edit capability for power outlets and console server ports
+* [#3204](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3204) - Fix interface filtering when connecting cables
+* [#3207](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3207) - Fix link for connecting interface to rear port
+* [#3258](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3258) - Exception raised when creating/viewing a circuit with a non-connected termination
+
+## API Changes
+
+* New API endpoints for power modeling: `/api/dcim/power-panels/` and `/api/dcim/power-feeds/`
+* New API endpoint for custom field choices: `/api/extras/_custom_field_choices/`
+* ForeignKey fields now accept either the related object PK or a dictionary of attributes describing the related object.
+* Organizational objects now include child object counts. For example, the Role serializer includes `prefix_count` and `vlan_count`.
+* The `id__in` filter is now deprecated and will be removed in v2.7. (Begin using the `?id=1&id=2` format instead.)
+* Added a `description` field for all device components.
+* dcim.Device: The devices list endpoint now includes rendered context data.
+* dcim.DeviceType: `instance_count` has been renamed to `device_count`.
+* dcim.Interface: `form_factor` has been renamed to `type`. Backward compatibility for `form_factor` will be maintained until NetBox v2.7.
+* dcim.Interface: The `type` filter has been renamed to `kind`.
+* dcim.Site: The `count_*` read-only fields have been renamed to `*_count` for consistency with other objects.
+* dcim.Site: Added the `virtualmachine_count` read-only field.
+* extras.Tag: Added `color` and `comments` fields to the Tag serializer.
+* virtualization.VirtualMachine: The virtual machines list endpoint now includes rendered context data.

docs/release-notes/version-2.7.md

@@ -0,0 +1,476 @@
+# v2.7.8 (2020-02-25)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#3145](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3145) - Add a "decommissioning" cable status
+* [#4173](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4173) - Return graceful error message when webhook queuing fails
+* [#4227](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4227) - Omit internal fields from the change log data
+* [#4237](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4237) - Support Jinja2 templating for webhook payload and headers
+* [#4262](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4262) - Extend custom scripts to pass the `commit` value via `run()`
+* [#4267](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4267) - Denote rack role on rack elevations list
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#4221](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4221) - Fix exception when deleting a device with interface connections when an interfaces webhook is defined
+* [#4222](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4222) - Escape double quotes on encapsulated values during CSV export
+* [#4224](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4224) - Fix display of rear device image if front image is not defined
+* [#4228](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4228) - Improve fit of device images in rack elevations
+* [#4230](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4230) - Fix rack units filtering on elevation endpoint
+* [#4232](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4232) - Enforce consistent background striping in rack elevations
+* [#4235](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4235) - Fix API representation of `content_type` for export templates
+* [#4239](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4239) - Fix exception when selecting all filtered objects during bulk edit
+* [#4240](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4240) - Fix exception when filtering foreign keys by NULL
+* [#4241](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4241) - Correct IP address hyperlinks on interface view
+* [#4246](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4246) - Fix duplication of field attributes when multiple IPNetworkVars are present in a script
+* [#4252](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4252) - Fix power port assignment for power outlet templates created via REST API
+* [#4272](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4272) - Interface type should be required by API serializer
+
+---
+
+# v2.7.7 (2020-02-20)
+
+**Note:** This release fixes a bug affecting the natural ordering of interfaces. If any interfaces appear unordered in
+NetBox, run the following management command to recalculate their naturalized values after upgrading:
+
+```
+python3 manage.py renaturalize dcim.Interface
+```
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#1529](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1529) - Enable display of device images in rack elevations
+* [#2511](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2511) - Compare object change to the previous change
+* [#3810](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3810) - Preserve slug value when editing existing objects
+* [#3840](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3840) - Enhance search function when selecting VLANs for interface assignment
+* [#4170](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4170) - Improve color contrast in rack elevation drawings
+* [#4206](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4206) - Add RJ-11 console port type
+* [#4209](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4209) - Enable filtering interfaces list view by enabled
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#2519](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2519) - Avoid race condition when provisioning "next available" IPs/prefixes via the API
+* [#3967](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3967) - Fix missing migration for interface templates of type "other"
+* [#4168](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4168) - Role is not required when creating a virtual machine
+* [#4175](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4175) - Fix potential exception when bulk editing objects from a filtered list
+* [#4179](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4179) - Site is required when creating a rack group or power panel
+* [#4183](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4183) - Fix representation of NaturalOrderingField values in change log
+* [#4194](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4194) - Role field should not be required when searching/filtering secrets
+* [#4196](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4196) - Fix exception when viewing LLDP neighbors page
+* [#4202](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4202) - Prevent reassignment to master device when bulk editing VC member interfaces
+* [#4204](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4204) - Fix assignment of mask length when bulk editing prefixes
+* [#4211](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4211) - Include trailing text when naturalizing interface names
+* [#4213](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4213) - Restore display of tags and custom fields on power feed view
+
+---
+
+# v2.7.6 (2020-02-13)
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#4166](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4166) - Fix schema migrations to enforce maximum character length for naturalized fields
+
+---
+
+# v2.7.5 (2020-02-13)
+
+**Note:** This release includes several database schema migrations that calculate and store copies of names for certain objects to improve natural ordering performance (see [#3799](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3799)). These migrations may take a few minutes to run if you have a very large number of objects defined in NetBox.
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#3766](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3766) - Allow custom script authors to specify the form widget for each variable
+* [#3799](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3799) - Greatly improve performance when ordering device components
+* [#3984](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3984) - Add support for Redis Sentinel
+* [#3986](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3986) - Include position numbers in SVG image when rendering rack elevations
+* [#4093](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4093) - Add more status choices for virtual machines
+* [#4100](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4100) - Add device filter to component list views
+* [#4113](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4113) - Add bulk edit functionality for device type components
+* [#4116](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4116) - Enable bulk edit and delete functions for device component list views
+* [#4129](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4129) - Add buttons to delete individual device type components
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#3507](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3507) - Fix filtering IP addresses by multiple devices
+* [#3995](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3995) - Make dropdown menus in the navigation bar scrollable on small screens
+* [#4083](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4083) - Permit nullifying applicable choice fields via API requests
+* [#4089](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4089) - Selection of power outlet type during bulk update is optional
+* [#4090](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4090) - Render URL custom fields as links under object view
+* [#4091](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4091) - Fix filtering of objects by custom fields using UI search form
+* [#4099](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4099) - Linkify interfaces on global interfaces list
+* [#4108](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4108) - Avoid extraneous database queries when rendering search forms
+* [#4134](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4134) - Device power ports and outlets should inherit type from the parent device type
+* [#4137](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4137) - Disable occupied terminations when connecting a cable to a circuit
+* [#4138](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4138) - Restore device bay counts in rack elevation diagrams
+* [#4146](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4146) - Fix enforcement of secret role assignment for secret decryption
+* [#4150](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4150) - Correct YAML rendering of config contexts
+* [#4159](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4159) - Fix implementation of Redis caching configuration
+
+---
+
+# v2.7.4 (2020-02-04)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#568](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/568) - Allow custom fields to be imported and exported using CSV
+* [#2921](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2921) - Replace tags filter with Select2 widget
+* [#3313](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3313) - Toggle config context display between JSON and YAML
+* [#3886](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3886) - Enable assigning config contexts by cluster and cluster group
+* [#4051](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4051) - Disable the `makemigrations` management command
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#4030](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4030) - Fix exception when bulk editing interfaces (revised)
+* [#4043](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4043) - Fix toggling of required fields in custom scripts
+* [#4049](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4049) - Restore missing `tags` field in IPAM service serializer
+* [#4052](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4052) - Fix error when bulk importing interfaces to virtual machines
+* [#4056](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4056) - Repair schema migration for Rack.outer_unit (from #3569)
+* [#4067](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4067) - Correct permission checked when creating a rack (vs. editing)
+* [#4071](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4071) - Enforce "view tag" permission on individual tag view
+* [#4079](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4079) - Fix assignment of power panel when bulk editing power feeds
+* [#4084](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4084) - Fix exception when creating an interface with tagged VLANs
+
+---
+
+# v2.7.3 (2020-01-28)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#3310](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3310) - Pre-select site/rack for B side when creating a new cable
+* [#3338](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3338) - Include circuit terminations in API representation of circuits
+* [#3509](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3509) - Add IP address variables for custom scripts
+* [#3978](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3978) - Add VRF filtering to search NAT IP
+* [#4005](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4005) - Include timezone context in webhook timestamps
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#3950](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3950) - Automatically select parent manufacturer when specifying initial device type during device creation
+* [#3982](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3982) - Restore tooltip for reservations on rack elevations
+* [#3983](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3983) - Permit the creation of multiple unnamed devices
+* [#3989](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3989) - Correct HTTP content type assignment for webhooks
+* [#3999](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3999) - Do not filter child results by null if non-required parent fields are blank
+* [#4008](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4008) - Toggle rack elevation face using front/rear strings
+* [#4017](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4017) - Remove redundant tenant field from cluster form
+* [#4019](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4019) - Restore border around background devices in rack elevations
+* [#4022](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4022) - Fix display of assigned IPs when filtering device interfaces
+* [#4025](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4025) - Correct display of cable status (various places)
+* [#4027](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4027) - Repair schema migration for #3569 to convert IP addresses with DHCP status
+* [#4028](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4028) - Correct URL patterns to match Unicode characters in tag slugs
+* [#4030](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4030) - Fix exception when setting interfaces to tagged mode in bulk
+* [#4033](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/4033) - Restore missing comments field label of various bulk edit forms
+
+---
+
+# v2.7.2 (2020-01-21)
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#3135](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3135) - Documented power modelling
+* [#3842](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3842) - Add 802.11ax interface type
+* [#3954](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3954) - Add `device_bays` filter for devices and device types
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#3721](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3721) - Allow Unicode characters in tag slugs
+* [#3923](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3923) - Indicate validation failure when using SSH-style RSA keys
+* [#3951](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3951) - Fix exception in webhook worker due to missing constant
+* [#3953](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3953) - Fix validation error when creating child devices
+* [#3960](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3960) - Fix legacy device status choice
+* [#3962](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3962) - Fix display of unnamed devices in rack elevations
+* [#3963](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3963) - Restore tooltip for devices in rack elevations
+* [#3964](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3964) - Show borders around devices in rack elevations
+* [#3965](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3965) - Indicate the presence of "background" devices in rack elevations
+* [#3966](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3966) - Fix filtering of device components by region/site
+* [#3967](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3967) - Resolve migration of "other" interface type
+
+---
+
+# v2.7.1 (2020-01-16)
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#3941](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3941) - Fixed exception when attempting to assign IP to interface
+* [#3943](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3943) - Prevent rack elevation links from opening new tabs/windows
+* [#3944](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3944) - Fix AttributeError exception when viewing prefixes list
+
+---
+
+# v2.7.0 (2020-01-16)
+
+**Note:** This release completely removes the topology map feature ([#2745](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2745)).
+
+**Note:** NetBox v2.7 is the last major release that will support Python 3.5. Beginning with NetBox v2.8, Python 3.6 or
+higher will be required.
+
+## New Features
+
+### Enhanced Device Type Import ([#451](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/451))
+
+NetBox now supports the import of device types and related component templates using definitions written in YAML or
+JSON. For example, the following will create a new device type with four network interfaces, two power ports, and a
+console port:
+
+```yaml
+manufacturer: Acme
+model: Packet Shooter 9000
+slug: packet-shooter-9000
+u_height: 1
+interfaces:
+  - name: ge-0/0/0
+    type: 1000base-t
+  - name: ge-0/0/1
+    type: 1000base-t
+  - name: ge-0/0/2
+    type: 1000base-t
+  - name: ge-0/0/3
+    type: 1000base-t
+power-ports:
+  - name: PSU0
+  - name: PSU1
+console-ports:
+  - name: Console
+```
+
+This new functionality replaces the old CSV-based import form, which did not allow for bulk import of component
+templates.
+
+### Bulk Import of Device Components ([#822](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/822))
+
+Device components such as console ports, power ports, and interfaces can now be imported in bulk to multiple devices in
+CSV format. Here's an example showing the bulk import of interfaces to several devices:
+
+```
+device,name,type
+Switch1,Vlan100,Virtual
+Switch1,Vlan200,Virtual
+Switch2,Vlan100,Virtual
+Switch2,Vlan200,Virtual
+```
+
+The import form for each type of device component is available under the "Devices" item in the navigation menu.
+
+### External File Storage ([#1814](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1814))
+
+In prior releases, the only option for storing uploaded files (e.g. image attachments) was to save them to the local
+filesystem on the NetBox server. This release introduces support for several remote storage backends provided by the
+[`django-storages`](https://django-storages.readthedocs.io/en/stable/) library. These include:
+
+* Amazon S3
+* ApacheLibcloud
+* Azure Storage
+* netbox-community Spaces
+* Dropbox
+* FTP
+* Google Cloud Storage
+* SFTP
+
+To enable remote file storage, first install the `django-storages` package:
+
+```
+pip install django-storages
+```
+
+Then, set the appropriate storage backend and its configuration in `configuration.py`. Here's an example using Amazon
+S3:
+
+```python
+STORAGE_BACKEND = 'storages.backends.s3boto3.S3Boto3Storage'
+STORAGE_CONFIG = {
+    'AWS_ACCESS_KEY_ID': '<Key>',
+    'AWS_SECRET_ACCESS_KEY': '<Secret>',
+    'AWS_STORAGE_BUCKET_NAME': 'netbox',
+    'AWS_S3_REGION_NAME': 'eu-west-1',
+}
+```
+
+Thanks to [@steffann](https://github.com/steffann) for contributing this work!
+
+### Rack Elevations Rendered via SVG ([#2248](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2248))
+
+NetBox v2.7 introduces a new method of rendering rack elevations as an
+[SVG image](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Scalable_Vector_Graphics) via a REST API endpoint. This replaces the prior
+method of rendering elevations using pure HTML and CSS, which was cumbersome and had several shortcomings. Rendering
+rack elevations as SVG images via the REST API allows users to retrieve and make use of the drawings in their own
+tooling. This also opens the door to other feature requests related to rack elevations in the NetBox backlog.
+
+This feature implements a new REST API endpoint:
+
+```
+/api/dcim/racks/<id>/elevation/
+```
+
+By default, this endpoint returns a paginated JSON response representing each rack unit in the given elevation. This is
+the same response returned by the existing rack units detail endpoint at `/api/dcim/racks/<id>/units/`, which will be
+removed in v2.8 (see [#3753](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3753)).
+
+To render the elevation as an SVG image, include the `render=svg` query parameter in the request. You may also control
+the width and height of the elevation drawing (in pixels) by passing the `unit_width` and `unit_height` parameters. (The
+default values for these parameters are 230 and 20, respectively.) Additionally, the `face` parameter may be used to
+request either the `front` or `rear` of the elevation. Below is in example request:
+
+```
+/api/dcim/racks/<id>/elevation/?render=svg&face=rear&unit_width=300&unit_height=35
+```
+
+Thanks to [@hellerve](https://github.com/hellerve) for doing the heavy lifting on this!
+
+## Changes
+
+### Topology Maps Removed ([#2745](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2745))
+
+The topology maps feature has been removed to help focus NetBox development efforts. Please replicate any required data
+to another source before upgrading NetBox to v2.7, as any existing topology maps will be deleted.
+
+### Supervisor Replaced with systemd ([#2902](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2902))
+
+The NetBox [installation documentation](https://netbox.readthedocs.io/en/stable/installation/) has been updated to
+provide instructions for managing the WSGI and RQ services using systemd instead of supervisor. This removes the need to
+install supervisor and simplifies administration of the processes.
+
+### Redis Configuration ([#3282](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3282))
+
+NetBox v2.6 introduced request caching and added the `CACHE_DATABASE` option to the existing `REDIS` database
+configuration parameter. This did not, however, allow for using two different Redis connections for the separate caching
+and webhook queuing functions. This release modifies the `REDIS` parameter to accept two discrete subsections named
+`webhooks` and `caching`. This requires modification of the `REDIS` parameter in `configuration.py` as follows:
+
+Old Redis configuration:
+
+```python
+REDIS = {
+    'HOST': 'localhost',
+    'PORT': 6379,
+    'PASSWORD': '',
+    'DATABASE': 0,
+    'CACHE_DATABASE': 1,
+    'DEFAULT_TIMEOUT': 300,
+    'SSL': False,
+}
+```
+
+New Redis configuration:
+
+```python
+REDIS = {
+    'webhooks': {
+        'HOST': 'redis.example.com',
+        'PORT': 1234,
+        'PASSWORD': 'foobar',
+        'DATABASE': 0,
+        'DEFAULT_TIMEOUT': 300,
+        'SSL': False,
+    },
+    'caching': {
+        'HOST': 'localhost',
+        'PORT': 6379,
+        'PASSWORD': '',
+        'DATABASE': 1,
+        'DEFAULT_TIMEOUT': 300,
+        'SSL': False,
+    }
+}
+```
+
+Note that the `CACHE_DATABASE` parameter has been removed and the connection settings have been duplicated for both
+`webhooks` and `caching`. This allows the user to make use of separate Redis instances if desired. It is fine to use the
+same Redis service for both functions, although the database identifiers should be different.
+
+### WEBHOOKS_ENABLED Configuration Setting Removed ([#3408](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3408))
+
+As `django-rq` is now a required library, NetBox assumes that the RQ worker process is running. The installation and
+upgrade documentation has been updated to reflect this, and the `WEBHOOKS_ENABLED` configuration parameter is no longer
+used. Please ensure that both the NetBox WSGI service and the RQ worker process are running on all production
+installations.
+
+### API Choice Fields Now Use String Values ([#3569](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3569))
+
+NetBox's REST API presents fields which reference a particular choice as a dictionary with two keys: `value` and
+`label`. In previous versions, `value` was an integer which represented a particular choice in the database. This has
+been changed to a more human-friendly "slug" string, which is essentially a simplified version of the choice's `label`.
+
+For example, The site model's `status` field was previously represented as:
+
+```json
+"status": {
+    "value": 1,
+    "label": "Active"
+},
+```
+
+In NetBox v2.7, it now looks like this:
+
+```json
+"status": {
+    "value": "active",
+    "label": "Active",
+    "id": 1
+},
+```
+
+This change allows for much more intuitive representation and manipulation of values, and removes the need for API
+consumers to maintain local mappings of static integer values.
+
+Note that that all v2.7 releases will continue to accept the legacy integer values in write requests (`POST`, `PUT`, and
+`PATCH`) to maintain backward compatibility. Additionally, the legacy numeric identifier is conveyed in the `id` field
+for convenient reference as consumers adopt to the new string values. This behavior will be discontinued in NetBox v2.8.
+
+## Enhancements
+
+* [#33](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/33) - Add ability to clone objects (pre-populate form fields)
+* [#648](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/648) - Pre-populate form fields when selecting "create and
+  add another"
+* [#792](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/792) - Add power port and power outlet types
+* [#1865](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/1865) - Add console port and console server port types
+* [#2669](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2669) - Relax uniqueness constraint on device and VM names
+* [#2902](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/2902) - Replace `supervisord` with `systemd`
+* [#3455](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3455) - Add tenant assignment to virtual machine clusters
+* [#3520](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3520) - Add Jinja2 template support for graphs
+* [#3525](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3525) - Enable IP address filtering using multiple address
+  parameters
+* [#3564](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3564) - Add list views for all device components
+* [#3538](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3538) - Introduce a REST API endpoint for executing custom
+  scripts
+* [#3655](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3655) - Add `description` field to organizational models
+* [#3664](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3664) - Enable applying configuration contexts by tags
+* [#3706](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3706) - Increase `available_power` maximum value on
+  PowerFeed
+* [#3731](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3731) - Change Graph.type to a ContentType foreign key field
+* [#3801](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3801) - Use YAML for export of device types
+
+## Bug Fixes
+
+* [#3830](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3830) - Ensure deterministic ordering for all models
+* [#3900](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3900) - Fix exception when deleting device types
+* [#3914](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3914) - Fix interface filter field when unauthenticated
+* [#3919](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3919) - Fix utilization graph extending out of bounds when
+  utilization > 100%
+* [#3927](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3927) - Fix exception when deleting devices with secrets
+  assigned
+* [#3930](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3930) - Fix API rendering of the `family` field for
+  aggregates
+
+## Bug Fixes (From Beta)
+
+* [#3868](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3868) - Fix creation of interfaces for virtual machines
+* [#3878](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3878) - Fix database migration for cable status field
+
+## API Changes
+
+* Choice fields now use human-friendly strings for their values instead of integers (see
+  [#3569](https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox/issues/3569)).
+* Introduced the `/api/extras/scripts/` endpoint for retrieving and executing custom scripts
+* circuits.CircuitType: Added field `description`
+* dcim.ConsolePort: Added field `type`
+* dcim.ConsolePortTemplate: Added field `type`
+* dcim.ConsoleServerPort: Added field `type`
+* dcim.ConsoleServerPortTemplate: Added field `type`
+* dcim.DeviceRole: Added field `description`
+* dcim.PowerPort: Added field `type`
+* dcim.PowerPortTemplate: Added field `type`
+* dcim.PowerOutlet: Added field `type`
+* dcim.PowerOutletTemplate: Added field `type`
+* dcim.RackRole: Added field `description`
+* extras.Graph: Added field `template_language` (to indicate `django` or `jinja2`)
+* extras.Graph: The `type` field has been changed to a content type foreign key. Models are specified as
+  `<app>.<model>`; e.g. `dcim.site`.
+* ipam.Role: Added field `description`
+* secrets.SecretRole: Added field `description`
+* virtualization.Cluster: Added field `tenant`

mkdocs.yml

@@ -1,28 +1,81 @@
 site_name: NetBox
+theme: readthedocs
+repo_url: https://github.com/netbox-community/netbox
 
 pages:
-    - 'Introduction': 'index.md'
-    - 'Installation':
-        - 'PostgreSQL': 'installation/postgresql.md'
-        - 'NetBox': 'installation/netbox.md'
-        - 'Web Server': 'installation/web-server.md'
-        - 'LDAP (Optional)': 'installation/ldap.md'
-        - 'Upgrading': 'installation/upgrading.md'
-    - 'Configuration':
-        - 'Mandatory Settings': 'configuration/mandatory-settings.md'
-        - 'Optional Settings': 'configuration/optional-settings.md'
-    - 'Data Model':
-        - 'Circuits': 'data-model/circuits.md'
-        - 'DCIM': 'data-model/dcim.md'
-        - 'IPAM': 'data-model/ipam.md'
-        - 'Secrets': 'data-model/secrets.md'
-        - 'Tenancy': 'data-model/tenancy.md'
-        - 'Extras': 'data-model/extras.md'
-    - 'API':
-        - 'Overview': 'api/overview.md'
-        - 'Authentication': 'api/authentication.md'
-        - 'Working with Secrets': 'api/working-with-secrets.md'
-        - 'Examples': 'api/examples.md'
+    - Introduction: 'index.md'
+    - Installation:
+        - Installing NetBox: 'installation/index.md'
+        - 1. PostgreSQL: 'installation/1-postgresql.md'
+        - 2. NetBox: 'installation/2-netbox.md'
+        - 3. HTTP Daemon: 'installation/3-http-daemon.md'
+        - 4. LDAP (Optional): 'installation/4-ldap.md'
+        - Upgrading NetBox: 'installation/upgrading.md'
+        - Migrating to Python3: 'installation/migrating-to-python3.md'
+        - Migrating to systemd: 'installation/migrating-to-systemd.md'
+    - Configuration:
+        - Configuring NetBox: 'configuration/index.md'
+        - Required Settings: 'configuration/required-settings.md'
+        - Optional Settings: 'configuration/optional-settings.md'
+    - Core Functionality:
+        - IP Address Management: 'core-functionality/ipam.md'
+        - VLANs: 'core-functionality/vlans.md'
+        - Sites and Racks: 'core-functionality/sites-and-racks.md'
+        - Devices: 'core-functionality/devices.md'
+        - Virtual Machines: 'core-functionality/virtual-machines.md'
+        - Services: 'core-functionality/services.md'
+        - Circuits: 'core-functionality/circuits.md'
+        - Power: 'core-functionality/power.md'
+        - Secrets: 'core-functionality/secrets.md'
+        - Tenancy: 'core-functionality/tenancy.md'
+    - Additional Features:
+        - Caching: 'additional-features/caching.md'
+        - Change Logging: 'additional-features/change-logging.md'
+        - Context Data: 'additional-features/context-data.md'
+        - Custom Fields: 'additional-features/custom-fields.md'
+        - Custom Links: 'additional-features/custom-links.md'
+        - Custom Scripts: 'additional-features/custom-scripts.md'
+        - Export Templates: 'additional-features/export-templates.md'
+        - Graphs: 'additional-features/graphs.md'
+        - NAPALM: 'additional-features/napalm.md'
+        - Prometheus Metrics: 'additional-features/prometheus-metrics.md'
+        - Reports: 'additional-features/reports.md'
+        - Tags: 'additional-features/tags.md'
+        - Webhooks: 'additional-features/webhooks.md'
+    - Administration:
+        - Replicating NetBox: 'administration/replicating-netbox.md'
+        - NetBox Shell: 'administration/netbox-shell.md'
+    - API:
+        - Overview: 'api/overview.md'
+        - Authentication: 'api/authentication.md'
+        - Working with Secrets: 'api/working-with-secrets.md'
+        - Examples: 'api/examples.md'
+    - Development:
+        - Introduction: 'development/index.md'
+        - Style Guide: 'development/style-guide.md'
+        - Utility Views: 'development/utility-views.md'
+        - Extending Models: 'development/extending-models.md'
+        - Release Checklist: 'development/release-checklist.md'
+        - Squashing Migrations: 'development/squashing-migrations.md'
+    - Release Notes:
+        - Version 2.7: 'release-notes/version-2.7.md'
+        - Version 2.6: 'release-notes/version-2.6.md'
+        - Version 2.5: 'release-notes/version-2.5.md'
+        - Version 2.4: 'release-notes/version-2.4.md'
+        - Version 2.3: 'release-notes/version-2.3.md'
+        - Version 2.2: 'release-notes/version-2.2.md'
+        - Version 2.1: 'release-notes/version-2.1.md'
+        - Version 2.0: 'release-notes/version-2.0.md'
+        - Version 1.9: 'release-notes/version-1.9.md'
+        - Version 1.8: 'release-notes/version-1.8.md'
+        - Version 1.7: 'release-notes/version-1.7.md'
+        - Version 1.6: 'release-notes/version-1.6.md'
+        - Version 1.5: 'release-notes/version-1.5.md'
+        - Version 1.4: 'release-notes/version-1.4.md'
+        - Version 1.3: 'release-notes/version-1.3.md'
+        - Version 1.2: 'release-notes/version-1.2.md'
+        - Version 1.1: 'release-notes/version-1.1.md'
+        - Version 1.0: 'release-notes/version-1.0.md'
 
 markdown_extensions:
     - admonition: